Manual de Serviço

MANUAL DE SERVIÇO
Impressora a jato de tinta colorida de grande formato
SC-F9200 Series
Traduzido / VDerrihu
SEPS15001
PRECAUÇÕES
As notas de precaução ao longo do texto são categorizadas em relação a 1) Lesões corporais e 2) Danos ao equipamento.
PERIGO Sinaliza uma precaução que, se ignorada, pode resultar em lesões pessoais graves ou fatais. Deve-se ter muito cuidado ao executar
procedimentos precedidos por Títulos de PERIGO.
ATENÇÃO Sinaliza uma precaução que, se ignorada, pode resultar em danos ao equipamento.
As medidas de precaução discriminadas abaixo devem ser sempre observadas ao realizar procedimentos de reparo / manutenção.
PERIGO
1. SEMPRE DESCONECTE O PRODUTO DA FONTE DE ALIMENTAÇÃO E DOS DISPOSITIVOS PERIFÉRICOS EFECTUANDO QUALQUER
PROCEDIMENTO DE MANUTENÇÃO OU REPARO.
2. NENHUM TRABALHO DEVE SER REALIZADO NA UNIDADE POR PESSOAS NÃO FAMILIARES COM AS MEDIDAS DE SEGURANÇA
BÁSICAS, CONFORME DISPOSTO PARA TODOS OS TÉCNICOS ELETRÔNICOS EM SUA LINHA DE TRABALHO.
3. QUANDO REALIZAR O TESTE CONFORME INDICADO NESTE MANUAL, NÃO CONECTE A UNIDADE A UMA FONTE DE ALIMENTAÇÃO
ATÉ QUE FOR INSTRUÍDO PARA FAZER. QUANDO O CABO DE ALIMENTAÇÃO DEVE ESTAR CONECTADO, TOME EXTREMO CUIDADO
AO TRABALHAR COM A FONTE DE ALIMENTAÇÃO E OUTROS COMPONENTES ELETRÔNICOS.
4. QUANDO DESMONTAGEM OU MONTAGEM DE UM PRODUTO, CERTIFIQUE-SE DE USAR LUVAS PARA EVITAR LESÕES POR PEÇAS
METÁLICAS COM BORDAS AFIADAS.
ATENÇÃO
1. AS REPARAÇÕES DO PRODUTO EPSON DEVEM SER REALIZADAS APENAS POR UM TÉCNICO DE REPARO CERTIFICADO pela
EPSON.
2. CERTIFIQUE-SE DE QUE A FONTE DE TENSÃO É MESMA QUE A TENSÃO NOMINAL, INDICADA NO NÚMERO DE SÉRIE / PLACA DE
CLASSIFICAÇÃO. SE O PRODUTO EPSON TEM UMA CLASSIFICAÇÃO DE CA PRIMÁRIA DIFERENTE DA FONTE DE ENERGIA
DISPONÍVEL, NÃO O CONECTE À FONTE DE ENERGIA.
3. SEMPRE VERIFIQUE SE O PRODUTO EPSON FOI DESCONECTADO DA FONTE DE ALIMENTAÇÃO ANTES DE REMOVER OU
SUBSTITUIR AS PLACAS DE CIRCUITO IMPRESSO E / OU CHIPS INDIVIDUAIS.
4. PARA PROTEGER MICROPROCESSADORES E CIRCUITOS SENSÍVEIS, USE EQUIPAMENTO DE DESCARGA ESTÁTICO, COMO
CORREIAS DE PULSO ANTI-ESTÁTICAS, AO ACESSAR COMPONENTES INTERNOS.
5. SUBSTITUA OS COMPONENTES COM DEFICIÊNCIA APENAS POR ESSES COMPONENTES PELA FABRICAÇÃO; A INTRODUÇÃO DE
CIs DE SEGUNDA FONTE OU OUTROS COMPONENTES NÃO APROVADOS PODE DANIFICAR O PRODUTO E ANULAR QUALQUER
GARANTIA APLICÁVEL EPSON.
6. QUANDO FOR UTILIZADO O DUSTADOR DE AR NA REPARAÇÃO E NO TRABALHO DE MANUTENÇÃO, É PROIBIDA A UTILIZA-
ÇÃO DE PRODUTOS DO DUSTADOR DE AR CONTENDO O GÁS INFLAMÁVEL.
7. VERIFIQUE SE UM SOFTWARE ANTIVÍRUS ESTÁ INSTALADO NO COMPUTADOR USADO PARA SUPORTE DE SERVIÇO.
CERTIFIQUE-SE DE TER O ARQUIVO DE DEFINIÇÃO DE VÍRUS MAIS RECENTE PARA O SOFTWARE
Sobre Este Manual
Sobre este manual : este manual foi elaborado com o único propósito de fornecer as informações necessárias para que um técnico qualificado pela Epson execute a reparação /
manutenção adequada dos produtos aplicáveis da Epson. Você não deve usar este manual caso não seja qualificado .
Este manual contém informações confidenciais da Epson. Ao usar este manual, você deve mantê-lo em estrita confidencialidade e não deve divulgá-lo a terceiros sem o
consentimento prévio da Epson.
Este manual descreve as funções básicas, teoria das operações elétricas e mecânicas, manutenção e procedimentos de reparo da impressora. As instruções e procedimentos
incluídos neste documento destinam-se a técnicos de reparo experientes e deve-se prestar atenção às precauções na página anterior.
INFORMAÇÕES DO MANUAL
Este manual consiste em seis capítulos .
CAPÍTULO 1. DESCRIÇÕES DO PRODUTO
Fornece uma visão geral e especificações do produto.
CAPÍTULO 2. SOLUÇÃO DE PROBLEMAS
Descreve os procedimentos passo a passo para a solução de problemas.
CAPÍTULO 3. DESMONTAGEM / MONTAGEM
Descreve os procedimentos passo a passo para desmontar e montar o produto.
CAPÍTULO 4. AJUSTE
Fornece métodos de ajuste aprovados pela Epson.
CAPÍTULO 5. MANUTENÇÃO
Fornece procedimentos de manutenção preventiva e listas de lubrificantes e adesivos
aprovados pela Epson necessários para a manutenção do produto.
CAPÍTULO 6. COMPLEMENTO
Fornece as seguintes informações adicionais para referência:
- Diagrama de fiação
- Mapas do menu do painel
SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)

Símbolos usados neste manual
Vários símbolos são usados neste manual para fornecer informações adicionais sobre um tópico específico ou para alertar sobre um possível perigo presente durante um
procedimento ou ação. Esteja ciente de todos os símbolos quando eles são usados e sempre leia as mensagens de NOTA, CUIDADO ou A TENÇÃO.
Indica um procedimento, prática ou condição de operação ou manutenção que é necessário para manter a qualidade do produto.
Indica um procedimento, prática ou condição de operação ou manutenção que, se não for estritamente observado, pode resultar em danos ou destruição do
equipamento.
Pode indicar um procedimento, prática ou condição de operação ou manutenção necessária para realizar uma tarefa com eficiência. Também pode fornecer
informações adicionais relacionadas a um assunto específico, ou comentar os resultados alcançados por meio de uma ação anterior.
Indica um procedimento, prática ou condição de operação ou manutenção que, se não for estritamente observado, pode resultar em ferimentos ou morte.
Indica que uma determinada tarefa deve ser realizada de acordo com um determinado padrão após a desmontagem e antes da remontagem, caso contrário, a
qualidade dos componentes em questão pode ser adversamente afetada.
Lubrication
Indica que é necessária lubrificação das peças após a desmontagem, ao fazer uma manutenção ou substituir uma peça por uma nova.

Status de revisão
Revisão Data de emissão Descrição

A 26 de junho de 2015 First release
Capítulo 1
• 1.5 Painel de controle (p. 21):A descrição da tela foi revisada. (Para cobrança e reserva)
Capítulo 2
• 2.2 Soluções para Pedidos de Manutenção (p. 40):Pedidos de Manutenção foram adicionados. (Para prolongar a vida)
• 2.3 Soluções para erro de chamada de serviço (p. 44):A chamada de serviço foi adicionada. (Para prolongar a vida útil)
Capítulo 3
• 3.4.5.11 Sensor CR HP (p. 164):Procedimento adicionado. (Para prolongar a vida)
• 3.4.5.18 Suporte de tinta 2 (p. 189):O procedimento foi adicionado. (Para prolongar a vida útil)
Capítulo 4
• 4.1.2 Itens de ajuste e o pedido por peça reparada (p. 260): Observação e tabela 4-1 foram revisados.
(Para prolongar a vida útil e cobrança e reserva)
• 4.1.4 Ferramentas / Consumíveis para ajustes (p. 280):O código do cartucho de serviço HDK foi alterado.
• 4.2.2 Operação básica do NVRAM Viewer (p. 283):Procedimento adicionado. (Para prolongar a vida útil)
• 4.12.1 Forçar carga (p. 329):O procedimento foi adicionado recentemente. (Para cobrança e reserva)
B 12 de abril de 2016 • 4.12.2 Alternar entre cartuchos de tinta e tanques de tinta (p. 330):Procedimento adicionado. (Para cobrança e reserva)
• 4.12.3 Ativação do cartucho de limpeza (p. 331):Procedimento adicionado. (Para cobrança e reserva)
• 4.12.7 Alterar sinalizador (nB <--> HDK) (p. 335): O procedimento foi adicionado.
• 4.12.8 Substituição do tanque de tinta (p. 337):Procedimento adicionado. (Para cobrança e reserva)
• 4.14.6 Verifique o resultado da transferência de dados do chip CSIC para a placa principal (p. 347):O procedimento
foi adicionado recentemente.(Para cobrança e reserva)
• 4.14.7 Sinalizador para prolongar a vida (p. 350):Procedimento foi adicionado. (Para prolongar a vida)
Capítulo 5
• 5.3.1.1 Preparação antes de deixar a impressora sem uso (p. 368):Procedimento adicionado. (Para cobrança e reserva)
• 5.3.1.2 Preparação para instalação (após transporte) (p. 369):Procedimento adicionado. (Para cobrança e reserva)
• 5.3.2.1 Preparação antes do transporte (p. 370):Procedimento foi adicionado. (Para cobrança e reserva)
• 5.3.2.2 Preparação após o transporte (Sem substituição dos tanques de tinta) (p. 371):Procedimento adicionado.
(Para cobrança e reserva)
• 5.3.2.3 Preparação após o transporte (com substituição dos tanques de tinta) (p. 372):O procedimento foi
adicionado recentemente. (Para cobrança e reserva)

Revisão Data de emissão Descrição
Capítulo 2
• 2.5 Problemas na alimentação do papel (p. 68) : Procedimento adicionado.
Capítulo 3
• 3.4.9.5 Motor da bobina e conjunto da placa de montagem (p. 249) : O procedimento foi adicionado.
C 16 de setembro de 2016 Capítulo 4
• 4.1.2 Itens de ajuste e pedido por peça reparada (p. 260) : O procedimento foi adicionado.
• 4.7 Reset do contador (p. 293) : Procedimento adicionado.
Capítulo 5
• 5.4 Substituir peças (p. 373) : O artigo foi adicionado.

SC-F9200 Series Revisão C
Conteúdo
Capítulo 1 DESCRIÇÃO DO PRODUTO Capítulo 3 DESMONTAGEM E MONTAGEM
1.1 Descrição do produto. . . . . . . .............................................................................. 12 3.1 Visão geral . . . . . . .............................................................................................. 77
1.2 Especificações básicas . . . . . . . .......................................................................... 14 3.1.1 Precauções . . . . . . . ..................................................................................... 77
1.2.1 Especificações básicas . . . . . . . .................................................................. 14 3.1.2 Cuidados após a montagem . . . . . . . . ........................................................ 79
1.2.2 Especificações elétricas. . . . . . . . ................................................................ 14 3.1.3 Definição de Orientação . . . . . . . . .............................................................. 79
1.2.3 Especificações de tinta . . . . . . . ................................................................. 15 3.1.4 Ferramentas Recomendadas. . . . . . . . ......................................................... 80
1.3 Especificações de impressão . . . . . . . . ................................................................ 16 3.2 Diagrama de Peças . . . . . . .................................................................................. 81
1.3.1 Mídia Suportada . . . . . . . . .......................................................................... 16 3.3 Fluxograma de Desmontagem . . . . . . . .............................................................. 92
1.4 Especificações de Hardware . . . . . . . .................................................................. 17 3.4 Procedimento de desmontagem e montagem . . . . . . . . ....................................... 98
1.4.1 Dimensões e peso . . . . . . . . ........................................................................ 17 3.4.1 Preparação para manutenção . . . . . . . ........................................................ 98
1.4.2 Requisitos da sala de instalação . . . . . . . .................................................... 17 3.4.2 Consumíveis / Acessórios . . . . . . . .......................................................... 100
1.4.3 Nomes de peças. . . . . . . . ............................................................................ 18 3.4.3 Visor/Painel . . . . . . .................................................................................. 101
1.5 Painel de controle . . . . . . . .................................................................................. 21 3.4.4 Componentes do circuito elétrico . . . . . . . . ............................................. 123
1.5.1 Menu de configuração . . . . . . . .................................................................. 24 3.4.5 Mecanismo de transporte / mecanismo de sistema de tinta . . . . . . . . ...... 139
1.5.2 Modo Técnico . . . . . . . . ............................................................................. 35 3.4.6 Mecanismo de alimentação de papel . . . . . . . .......................................... 210
3.4.7 Mecanismo de aquecedor . . . . . . . ........................................................... 233
Capítulo 2 SOLUÇÃO DE PROBLEMAS 3.4.8 Unidade de Rolo . . . . . . . ......................................................................... 236
3.4.9 Unidade de bobina. . . . . . ......................................................................... 244
2.1 Visão geral . . . . . . .............................................................................................. 38 3.4.10 Unidade de Ventilador de Secagem Adicional . . . . . . . . ....................... 252
2.1.1 Verificação Preliminar. . . . . . . ................................................................... 38
2.1.2 Procedimento de Resolução de Problemas . . . . . . . ................................... 39 Capítulo 4 AJUSTE
2.1.3 Procedimento após a solução de problemas . . . . . . . . ................................ 39
4.1 Visão geral . . . . . . ............................................................................................ 259
2.2 Soluções para solicitações de manutenção. . . . . . . ............................................. 40
4.1.1 Precauções . . . . . . . ................................................................................... 259
2.3 Soluções para erro de chamada de serviço. . . . . . . ............................................. 44 4.1.2 Itens de ajuste e o pedido de repação de peças. . . . . . ............................. 260
2.4 Soluções para problemas de qualidade de impressão . . . . . . . ............................ 62 4.1.3 Itens de Ajuste. . . . . . . . ............................................................................ 272
2.4.1 Entupimento de tinta . . . . . . . . ................................................................... 66 4.1.4 Ferramentas / consumíveis para ajustes . . . . . . . ...................................... 280
2.5 Problemas na alimentação de papel . . . . . . . ...................................................... 68 4.1.5 Operações básicas do programa de serviço . . . . . . . ................................ 281
2.6 Outros Problemas . . . . . . . . ................................................................................. 70 4.2 NV-RAM BACKUP / Visualizador NVRAM . . . . . . . .................................... 282
2.6.1 Erro de fim de tinta. . . . . . . ........................................................................ 72 4.2.1 Procedimento de leitura NVRAM . . . . . . . .............................................. 282
2.6.2 Erro de mistura de tinta errada. . . . . . . . ..................................................... 72 4.2.2 Operação básica do visualizador NVRAM . . . . . . . . ............................... 283
2.7 Problemas no programa de serviço . . . . . . . . ...................................................... 74 4.3 AJUSTES (Individual). . . . . . . . ........................................................................ 289
2.8 Problemas no visualizador NVRAM . . . . . . . . ................................................... 75 4.4 AJUSTES (sequência) . . . . . . . ......................................................................... 290
8
4.5 Instalando Firmware . . . . . . . ........................................................................... 291 4.14.2 Entrada RTC e USB ID . . . . . . . ............................................................ 343
4.6 Imagem e impressão de teste . . . . . . . .............................................................. 292 4.14.3 Entrada de endereço MAC . . . . . . . . ...................................................... 344
4.14.4 Entrada do número de série . . . . . . . . .................................................... 345
4.7 Reiniciar contador (Reset) . . . . . . . .................................................................. 293
4.14.5 Configuração de data e hora de substituição da placa. ........................... 346
4.8 Referências. . . . . . . . .......................................................................................... 295 4.14.6 Verifique o resultado da transferência de dados do CSIC . . . . ............. 347
4.9 Sinalizador de carga de tinta inicial . . . . . . . . ................................................... 296 4.14.7 Sinalizar para prolongar a vida . . . . . . . ................................................ 350
4.10 Ajustes relacionados a CR. . . . . . . .................................................................. 297 4.15 Outras verificações e ajustes da impressora . . . . . . . . .................................... 351
4.10.1 Verificação da tensão da correia CR . . . . . . . ........................................ 297 4.15.1 Verificação de porta USB e comunicação de rede . . . . . . . ................... 351
4.10.2 Verificação de função APG . . . . . . . ...................................................... 301 4.15.2 Ajuste do Ventilador de Sucção . . . . . . . . ............................................. 352
4.10.3 Verificação do sensor de marca de tinta e ajuste automático . . . . . . . ... 303 4.15.3 Verificação da função do aquecedor . . . . . . . ........................................ 353
4.10.4 Verificação de escala CR . . . . . . . . ........................................................ 304 4.15.4 Configurações de reinicialização do painel e histórico. . . ...................... 354
4.10.5 Ajuste automático do amortecedor ativo CR . . . . . . . ............................ 305 4.15.5 Verificação de operação do painel LCD . . . . . . . .................................. 355
4.10.6 Ajuste PG. . . . . . . ................................................................................... 306 4.15.6 Verificação de operação dos botões do painel . . . . . . . . ........................ 355
4.11 Verificações e ajustes relacionados à cabeça . . . . . . . . ................................... 308 4.15.7 Medição do motor e ajuste automático. . . . . . . ...................................... 356
4.11.1 Redução da pressão interna do tubo . . . . . . . . ........................................ 308 4.15.8 Ajuste traseiro AD. . . . . . . ..................................................................... 358
4.11.2 Entrada de ID de cabeça. . . . . . . ............................................................ 309 4.15.9 Após o ajuste da posição do aquecedor. . ................................................ 360
4.11.3 Verificação do bico (Nozzle). . . . . . . . ................................................... 311
4.11.4 Limpeza . . . . . . . .................................................................................... 313
Capítulo 5 MANUTENÇÃO
4.11.5 Ajuste manual da inclinação da cabeça (direção CR) . . . . . . . .............. 314
4.11.6 Ajuste automático da inclinação da cabeça (direção PF) . . . . . . . . ........ 319 5.1 Visão geral . . . . . . ............................................................................................ 366
4.11.7 Ajuste manual para mudança de dados. . . . . . . ...................................... 321 5.2 Configurando / Armazenando da Impressora . . . . . . . . .................................... 367
4.11.8 Ajuste manual uni-d para entre 2 cabeças . . . . . . . ................................ 323 5.2.1 Configurando . . . . . . . .............................................................................. 367
4.11.9 Ajuste manual Uni-D . . . . . . . . .............................................................. 325 5.2.2 Armazenamento da impressora . . . . . . . ................................................... 367
4.11.10 Ajuste manual Bi-D . . . . . . . . .............................................................. 327 5.3 Quando não usada / transporte . . . . . . . . .......................................................... 368
4.12 Verificações e ajustes relacionados ao suprimento de tinta . . . . . . . . ............ 329 5.3.1 Quando não usada . . . . . . . . ..................................................................... 368
4.12.1 Forçar carga . . . . . . . . ............................................................................. 329 5.3.2 Transporte. . . . . . . ..................................................................................... 370
4.12.2 Alternar entre cartuchos de tinta e tanques de tinta . . . . . . . . ................ 330 5.4 Peças de Troca. . . . . . ........................................................................................ 373
4.12.3 Ativação do cartucho de limpeza . . . . . . . .............................................. 331
5.5 Limpeza. . . . . . . ................................................................................................. 375
4.12.4 Ejeção de tinta ou líquido de limpeza . . . . . . . . ..................................... 332
5.5.1 Verificação Preliminar . . . . . . . . .............................................................. 375
4.12.5 Limpeza interna do tubo. . . . . . . ............................................................ 333
5.5.2 Como limpar . . . . . . ................................................................................. 375
4.12.6 Carga de tinta inicial . . . . . . . . ............................................................... 334
4.12.7 Alterar sinalizador (nB <--> HDK) . . . . . . . . ......................................... 335 5.6 Lubrificação. . . . . . ............................................................................................ 387
4.12.8 Substituição do tanque de tinta . . . . . . . ................................................. 337
Capítulo 6 COMPLEMENTO
4.13 Verificações e ajustes relacionados ao feed de mídia . . . . . . . ....................... 338
4.13.1 Verificação da tensão da correia PF . . . . . . . ......................................... 338 6.1 Diagrama de Fiação . . . . . . . ............................................................................. 390
4.13.2 Verificação da escala PF . . . . . . . . ......................................................... 340 6.2 Diagrama de ligação. . . . . . . ............................................................................. 391
4.13.3 Ajuste manual para alimentação de mídia . . . . . . . ................................ 341 6.2.1 Sensores . . . . . . ........................................................................................ 391
4.14 Placas Verificações e Ajustes Relacionados . . . . . . . . .................................... 342 6.2.2 Tinteiro (1) . . . . . . . . ................................................................................ 393
4.14.1 Configuração inicial da placa principal . . . . . . . . .................................. 342 6.2.3 Tinteiro (2) . . . . . . . . ................................................................................ 394
9
6.2.4 Unidade CR (1) . ....................................................................................... 395

6.2.5 Unidade CR (2) . ....................................................................................... 396
6.2.6 Mecanismo de acionamento CR ............................................................... 397
6.2.7 Mecanismo de alimentação de papel / mecanismo de bomba . ................ 399
6.2.8 Ventilador . ............................................................................................... 401
6.2.9 Depois do aquecedor ................................................................................ 402
6.2.10 Unidade de rolo / unidade de bobina....................................................... 403
6.2.11 Unidade adicional de secagem de impressão. ......................................... 404
6.2.12 Mapa do menu do painel . ....................................................................... 406
6.3 Nomes de peças usados neste manual................................................................ 409
6.4 Diagrama Explodido / Lista de Peças. ............................................................... 412
10
Capítulo
1
DESCRIÇÃO DO PRODUTO

SC-F9200 Series Revision C
1.1 Product Description  CISS

The printer includes a 1.5-liter ink tank. Supplied ink packs allow you to refill the ink
 Available paper type even during printing.
 Available media width: Max. 1625 mm (64 inch), Min. 300mm (11.8 inch)  High speed throughput
 Printable width: Up to 1615 mm (Left/Right margin: 5mm) Table 1-1. High speed throughput (High speed mode)
 Paper thickness: Up to 1 mm Mode Printing Mode Number of passes Throughput
 Ink configuration Pattern printing 360x720 dpi 1 pass 100.1 m2/h
 Sublimation transfer ink Low quality printing 720x720 dpi 2 pass 57 m2/h
Main Print Mode 2 720x720 dpi 3 pass 46.9 m2/h*
Aqueous sublimation transfer ink
Main Print Mode 1 720x720 dpi 4 pass Speed 30 m2/h
Sublimates at 90°C or more.
High Quality 720x720 dpi 4 pass Quality 27.8 m2/h
 Providing newly developed Black ink High Quality 720x1440 dpi 6 pass 19.6 m2/h
The development of High Density Black ink has improved the density of High Quality 720x1440 dpi 8 pass 14.9 m2/h
black color when compared to Black ink, providing a richer, deeper black Note "*": When LV2 is selected for the feed speed during printing
color.
 Media handling
C A U T IO N  Wear protective eyewear, gloves and mask when treating the
Supports a variety of commercial media (no genuine media available).
ink.
Supported roll sizes are as follows:
 If ink adheres to your skin, immediately wash it off with plenty
of soap water. Consult a physician if any problem such as Table 1-2. Media handling
irritation appears.
Weight Roll Outer Diameter Paper Core Diameter
 If ink gets into your eyes, wash immediately with clean water.
Otherwise your eyes could be seriously injured. If you have any Normal Up to 40 kg Up to 250 mm 2 or 3 inch
medical condition, consult a physician.  Improves taking-up and drying
 If ink gets into your mouth, wash it well and immediately The drying process after the heater is improved by the optional Additional Drying
consult a physician. Fan Unit.
 Do not touch the printed media with your hands.
 Do not mix the ink with other type ink.  Supports RIP made by 3rd parties
 If it is hard to breath when using the printer, ventilate the room EPSON driver is not provided for Windows nor for Mac.
and let in fresh air.
 Dispose of the waste ink and printed media according to local
regulations.
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Product Description 12

 Realizes a high degree of usability

 Ease of use
Frequently-used menu is assigned to the short-cut keys on the control panel.
 Media handling
• Spindleless
• Easy loading of roll media by jacking up
 Improvement of reliability/durability
 Head life:
• 19 billion shots/nozzle or 3 years after ink is charged
 Operating life of the printer:
• 3 years or 6,750,000 pass / 135,000 m2
(64 inches/4 pass/720x720 dpi/Bi-d)
Figure 1-1. External View
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Product Description 13

1.2 Basic Specifications Table 1-5. Nozzle Layout (Head 2)

A B C D E F G H I J
1.2.1 Basic Specifications --- --- C Y M K K M Y C
Table 1-3. Basic specifications 1.2.2 Electric Specifications

Item Specification
Table 1-6. Electric specifications
Print method On-demand inkjet
Specification
Number of nozzles 360 nozzles x 2 lines x 4 (colors) Item
Printer Heater
Print Head Configuration of nozzles 720 nozzles for each color*2
AC100-120V
Line width of nozzles 1 inch Rated voltage AC100 to 240V AC200 to 240V
AC200-240V
Maximum resolution 720 x 1440 dpi Input voltage range AC90-132V AC180-264V ---
Control code ESC/P Raster Rated frequency 50 to 60Hz 50 to 60Hz
Paper feed method Friction 1) 12A 1) 6A 1) 1A
Rated current
For Main 512 MB 2) 12A 2) 6A 2) 0.5A
RAM 1) Approx. 110W
For Network 128 MB Printing Approx. 45 W
2) Approx. 650W
 USB 2.0 HS
Interface 1) Approx. 38W
 Ethernet (100Base-T/1000Base-T)*1 Ready mode ---
Power 2) Approx. 420W
15 °C to 35 °C
Operating consumption 1) Approx. 11W
(recommended: 15 to 25 °C) Sleep mode Approx. 0.3 W
2) Approx. 0.1W
-20 °C to 60 °C
Temperature Storage (before unpacking) (no more than 120 hours at 60 °C, 1) Approx. 0.9W
Power off Approx. 0.3 W or less
within a month at 40 °C) 2) Approx. 0.1W
-20 °C to 40 °C Power Printing Approx. 760W
Storage (after unpacking)
(within a month at 40 ℃ ) consumption Ready mode Approx. 458W
(Total for
20% to 80% (recommended: 40 to 60%) Sleep mode Approx. 11W
Operating numbers 1 and
Humidity (Non condensing)
2) Power off Approx. 1W
When storing (packed/unpacked) 5% to 85% (Non condensing)
Note *1: Use a shielded twisted pair cable (category 5 or higher).
"*2": Nozzle set configuration are;
Table 1-4. Nozzle Layout (Head 1)

A B C D E F G H I J
--- --- C Y M K K M Y C
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Basic Specifications 14

1.2.3 Ink Specifications

 Ink Pack
Table 1-7. Ink Pack
Item Specification
Form Dedicated ink pack (standing pouch)
 Black system: Black, High Density Black
Ink colors
 Color system: Yellow, Magenta, Cyan
Cartridge life See the date printed on the ink pack (at normal temperature)
Guaranteed life
25 days (from the day that the ink tank was refilled from the ink pack)
after installation
 Uninstalled: 15 to 35°C
Storage
 Transporting: -20 to 60 °C
temperature
(within 1 month under 40 °C, within 8 hours under 60 °C)
Capacity 1000ml
Dimensions 170 (W) x 272 (L) mm
 Cleaning liquid
Cleaning is for servicing only. The cleaning cartridge is only provided as an ASP
(CL14).
 Waste ink bottle
 Removable from the printer when it is filled with approx. 2000ml.
 Ink bottle FULL detection is carried out with a software counter.
 For the waste ink disposal, conform to the local industrial waste disposal
standards and ordinances in your country.
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Basic Specifications 15

1.3 Printing Specifications PRINTABLE AREA

Note *1: The value selected for [Side Margin (Left)] in the setup menu. The default value is
1.3.1 Supported Media 5mm. Choose a [Side Margin (Left)] over 10 mm when using media holding plates.
*2: The total of the values selected for [Print Start Position] and [Side Margin (Right)] in
Table 1-8. Supported Media the setup menu. The default value is 5mm. Chose a [Print Start Position] or [Side
Specification Margin (Right)] over 10 mm when using media holding plates.
Item
Standard Roll Media System
Roll core size 2 or 3 inch 300-1625mm
Roll outer diameter Up to 300 mm 3-25mm* 1
3-825mm*2
Media width 300 to 1625.6 mm (64 inches) 5mm
Media thickness Up to 1 mm
Roll weight Up to 40 kg
5mm
Figure 1-2. Printable area
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Printing Specifications 16

1.4 Hardware Specifications WEIGHT
This section provides the printer dimensions and shows the main components. Table 1-10. Weight
Item Weight
1.4.1 Dimensions and Weight Main body 155.5 kg
Standard Roll Unit 34.3 kg
DIMENSIONS
Standard Reel Unit 42.8 kg
Legs 40.4 kg
Drying Fan Unit 9.0 kg
Ink tank 6.0 kg
Ink tank unit 8.6 kg
Total weight 296.6 kg
1.4.2 Installation Room Requirement
Height
Width
Depth
Figure 1-3. Dimensions
Table 1-9. Dimensions

Figure 1-4. Installation Room Requirement
Description Width Depth Height
Stored 2,620 mm 1,013 mm 1,314 mm
Maximum 2,620 mm 1,198 mm 1,653 mm
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Hardware Specifications 17

1.4.3 Part Names Table 1-11. Front Side

No. Name
FRONT SIDE 11 Casters
12 Airflow vents
13 Waste Ink Bottle holder
14 Stand fixing screw
15 Waste Ink Bottle
16 Stopper
17 Waste ink tube
18 Ink tank
19 Heat shield
20 Slider
21 Lock lever
22 Chip unit check lamp
23 AC inlet #1/AC inlet #2
24 LAN port
25 USB port
26 Maintenance cover (right)
27 Media loading lever
28 Alert lamp
29 Control panel
Figure 1-5. FRONT SIDE
30 Front cover
Table 1-11. Front Side
No. Name
1 Maintenance cover (left)
2 After heater
3 Media guide bar
4 Handle
5 Roll core holder
6 Roll core holder locking screw
7 Roll support
8 Auto switch
9 Manual switch
10 Adjustment screw

SLIDER INSIDE
Figure 1-6. Front Side
Table 1-12. Slider

No. Name
Figure 1-7. Inside
1 Slider
2 Ink inlet cover Table 1-13. Inside
3 Chip unit No. Name
1 Print head
2 Media holding plate
3 Cutter groove
4 Pressure rollers
5 Platen
6 Wiper cleaner
7 Anti-drying caps
8 Suction caps
9 Wiper

BACK
Figure 1-8. Back
Table 1-14. Back

No. Name
1 Drive switch
2 Roll holder
3 Roll holder fixing screw
4 Spacer
5 Lift lever
6 Loading guide
7 Roll support
8 Handle

1.5 Control Panel Table 1-15. Control panel

Name Function
CONTROL PANEL 1 Power button Turns the printer ON or OFF.
 ON: The power is ON.
 Flashing: The printer is receiving data, performing head
2 Power light
cleaning, or other operations during shut-down.
13  OFF: The power is OFF.
1 3 Media Setup button Displays the Media Management Menu.
4 Display Displays the printer status, menu, message, etc.
12
5 Menu button Displays the Setup Menu.
Goes back to the previous tier when Setup Menu is
2 6 Back button
displayed.
11 Specifies the entering character position when registering

7 Left and Right arrow buttons
the setting name or setting IP address in the Setup Menu.
3  Advances/rewinds the media. Hold down button to
advance the media up to 103 cm. Hold down
8 Media Feed buttons button to rewind the media up to 25 cm.
 Selects the menu or the set value while the Setup Menu
is displayed.
9 OK button Determines the items or the settings.
4
Sets the temperature of the Heater.
10 Heating and Drying button When the additional dryer is installed, configures the
additional dryer settings.
11 Maintenance button Displays the Maintenance Menu.
 During printing, pauses the operation.
12 Pause/Cancel button  During setting, finishes the menu and goes back to
5 printable status.
 To advance the printed media to the cut position, press
the button while the printer is printable, then press the
13 Media Feed button [OK] button.
 During printing, performs the Media Feed Adjust
6 10 during printing.
7 8 9
Figure 1-9. Control Panel
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Control Panel 21

LCD Table 1-16. LCD

Name Function
 Display Description
 From left to right, shows the selected media number,
platen gap, media width, and media remaining.
 If a media setting bank number created with this printer is
1 selected as the print media, the number (from 1 to 30) will
be displayed. When [RIP Settings] is selected, 0 will be
2 displayed.
 The icon of platen gap changes depending on the setting
3 value as shown below.
7
4 Media information
: 1.5
4
6 : 2.0
5
: 2.5
 The media remaining is not displayed if [Off] is selected

Figure 1-10. LCD for [Remaining Setup] in the [Media Remaining] menu.
Table 1-16. LCD

Name Function
Printer status, operating status, or an error message is
1 Message
displayed.
The preset temperature of the After heater is displayed.
The heater temperature has reached the preset temperature.

2 Heater temperature
The heater temperature has not reached the preset temperature.
Feed adjustment
Displayed when an adjustment value has been entered during
3 information during
printing.
printing

Table 1-16. LCD Table 1-16. LCD

Name Function Name Function
The Charge status is displayed. The status of the wasted ink bottle is indicated as follows.
There is no problem because ink level is more No problem
than 70 mm from the ink tank base.The display
changes according to the conditions of ink usage. Almost full
6 Waste ink bottle status
Charge status Check the ink level. When the ink level is 70mm
or less from the base of the ink tank, replace the
Full
chip unit and refill from one ink pack.If there is
more than 70 mm, continue using the ink until it
is below 70 mm, and then replace and refill it. The setting of additional dryer is displayed.
The status of the chip unit is indicated as follows. None: No connection or wrong connection
Chip unit has not been reserved. Drying fan functions.
A chip unit is not attached or a chip unit is 7 Additional dryer status
attached that has completed charging(expended)
Drying fan does not function.
to the printer
A new chip unit has been reserved.
If a chip unit is removed in this state, the
reservation is canceled and the icon starts
blinking. A chip unit that has been removed can
5 be used because it has not charged the printer yet.
The chip unit that is not new (old) that may have
been partially used has been reserved.
Chip Unit Status The slider’s lock lever has been raised up.
Because of this, the printercanot be charged from
the reserved chip unit. Lower the lock lever.If the
cahrge has expended
An error occured.
An error occured while the chip unit that cannot

be recognized are attached.
Chip unit is nearing end of service life.
The chip unit could not be recognized or

reservation failed. Check the on-screen message.
The slider’s lock lever is raised up.

1.5.1 Setup Menu

Table 1-17. Setup Menu
Menu Menu Item/Setting Values (shaded one is the default) Explanation
Selects [On] to indicate and record the remaining amount of the
ON set media, or [Off] to set it to off. When [On] is selected,
[Length], [Remaining Alert] and [Print Remaining Length] are
Remaining Setup
displayed to be set. Remaining amount is derived from the
OFF setting values in [Length] and printed media length. It is
displayed on the Control Panel.
Media Remaining Sets the whole length of the set media between 1.0 to 999.5 m.
Length 1.0 to 999.5m (3 to 3000 ft)
You can make this setting by 0.5 m.
Sets the value to display the Remaining Alert between 1 to 15
Remaining Alert 1 to 15m (4 to 50 ft)
m. You can make this setting by 0.5 m.
Print Remaining
Print Prints the remaining amount of the media.
Media Setup Length
1 to 30 (Media Setup Numbers) Selects the media setting for printing.
When one of the values between 1 to 30 is selected, the printer
prints the media setting stored in the one of selected number. To
Select Media store the media setting in one of the numbers, set it in
RIP Setting [Customize Settings].
When [RIP Settings] is set, the printer prints in the media
setting set with software RIP.
Changes the current media setting. The items which can be
changed depend on which setting is selected, [RIP Settings] or
Customize Settings Current Settings
media number. For the items, refer to RIP Settings or the row of
1 to 30 as follows.


Names to the storing media setting within 22 characters of the
Setting Name one-byte alphabet and numbers.
Giving a name for easy identification is recommended.
Executes this setting when a banding (horizontal strip-shaped
patterns, uneven colors or lines) cannot be solved, even though
Feed Adjustment Manual head cleaning or Gap Adjustment is executed.
Check the printed patterns visually and adjust it by entering the
values.
1.5 The default setting of 2.0 is recommended in most situations.
2.0 2.5 if printout is scratched or smudged. Choosing a larger gap
Platen Gap
than required may result in ink status inside the printer, reduced
2.5 print quality, or shorter product life.
Manual (Uni-D) Select Head Alignment to realign the print head when print
Manual (Bi-D) results seem grainy or out of focus. When printing in both
directions, select Manual (Bi-D). If the graininess or
misalignment is not improved after performing Manual (Bi-D),
Head Alignment try Manual (Dual Head). If there is still no improvement,
Manual (Dual Head) perform Manual (Uni-D). When printing in one direction, select
Manual (Dual Head). If the graininess or misalignment is not
1 to 30 (Media setting improved after performing Manual (Dual Head), perform
Media Setup Customize Settings
bank) Manual (Uni-D).
OFF Set the after heater temperature. The default Heater
Heater Temperature Temperature is 55 °C.
30 to 55 °C
Sets a time period to pause the Print Head movement for drying
the ink between 0.0 to 10.0 seconds. Depending on the media
Drying Time Per Pass 0 to 10 sec type and density, drying ink may take longer. When leaked ink
or ink smear appears on the printed result, set the drying time
longer.
ON This item is displayed only when the optional Additional Print
Heating & Drying Drying System is installed. Select On to enable, or Off to
disable, the optional Additional Print Drying System. Note that
Additional Dryer even when On is selected, the additional print drying system
OFF will turn off with the heaters when the Heat Off Timer expires.
The additional print drying system will turn back on when the
heaters resume operation.
ON Select whether to feed media to the after heater after printing
(On/Off).
After Heater Feed
OFF Select On if the media will be cut before the next job starts.
Note, however, that the margin will increase.


Mode 0 If there is a section without print data (a blank area) during a
Mode 1 job, the media is fed quickly. If the value for the selected mode
Heating & Drying Blank Area Feed is small, the media is fed at a quicker speed. If this mode does
Mode 2
not allow the ink to dry sufficiently, see the following section
Mode 3 and change the mode.
Media Suction 0 to 10 Set it to a suction level appropriate for the used media.
Choose the range in which the print head moves during printing.
Data Width [Data Width] restricts print head movement to the printed area.
Restricting the extent of print head movement increases print
Head Movement speed.
If [Data Width] is selected, the print head will move the full
Printer Full Width width of the largest media supported by the printer. Select this
1 to 30
Media Setup Customize Settings option for more even print results with less variation.
(Media setting bank)
OFF Choose the number of times each line is printed.
Multi-Strike Printing
2 to 8
Printable Side Out Choose [Printable Side Out] or [Printable Side In] according to
Roll Type
Printable Side In how the media is rolled.
Choose [Periodically] or [Every page] to have the printer
Periodically automatically monitor and adjust media tension during printing
for optimal results, [Off] to disable automatic tension
Tension
adjustment. [Periodically] is recommended in most
Measurement
Every Page circumstances.
Select [Every page] for more precise tensioning, but note that
print times will increase.


Auto - Auto is recommended in most situations. If Media Size Check is
Feeding Tension not On when Auto is set, the appropriate tension is not applied
Manual 0 to 40
because the media width cannot be detected.
Auto -
If Media Size Check is Off, set Feeding Tension to Manual and
then set the recommended value for the media width. If Feeding
Tension is set to Auto and creases appear during printing or
black bands (dark stripes) appear in the print results, set Feeding
Take-up Tension Tension to Manual. When Manual is set, we recommend setting
Manual 1 to 9 Feeding Tension to a recommended value that complies with
the width of the loaded media. See the User’s Guide.
If other values are used, banding (horizontal banding, lines, or
strips of uneven color) or wrinkles may appear in the print
1 to 30 (Media results.
Customize Settings
setting bank) LV1 Choose a slower feed speed if thin media is creased or torn or
Feed Speed sticks together during printing. The lower the value, the slower
Media Setup LV2 the speed.
Select whether to enable (On) or disable (Off) operations to
On prevent media from sticking when the printer is turned on or
when printing starts. Since operations take longer when On is
Prevent Sticking selected, we recommend setting this to Off. Depending on the
media type, it may easily adhere to the platen. If operations are
Off performed while the media is on the platen, the media is not fed
correctly and could cause a jam. If this occurs, set On.
Yes If [Yes] is selected, the setting content of selected media
Restore Settings
No settings are returned to the default settings.
1.5 The default setting of 2.0 is recommended in most situations.
2.0 2.5 if printout is scratched or smudged. Choosing a larger gap
RIP Settings Platen Gap
than required may result in ink status inside the printer, reduced
2.5 print quality, or shorter product life.


0.1 to 1.0 mm (4 to 40
Input thickness. Sets the length of the media to be used between 0.1 to 1.0 mm.
mil)
Manual (Uni-D) Select Head Alignment to realign the print head when print
Manual (Bi-D) results seem grainy or out of focus. When printing in both
directions, select Manual (Bi-D). If the graininess or
Head Alignment misalignment is not improved after performing Manual (Bi-D),
try Manual (Dual Head). If there is still no improvement,
Manual (Dual Head) perform Manual (Uni-D). When printing in one direction, select
Manual (Dual Head). If the graininess or misalignment is not
improved after performing Manual (Dual Head), perform
Manual (Uni-D).
Printable Side Out Choose [Printable Side Out] or [Printable Side In] according to
Roll Type
Printable Side In how the media is rolled.
Periodically The default setting of Auto is recommended in most situations.
Media Setup RIP Settings If creases appear in the media during printing, we recommend
using Manual and setting the value to higher than Lv32.
When banding (horizontal banding, tint unevenness, or stripes)
Tension
occurs in printing results, we recommend using Manual and
Measurement Every Page setting the value to lower than Lv32.
When Media Size Check is set to Off, set Manual, and then set
Feeding Tension to a recommended value that complies with
the width of the loaded media.
Auto - The default setting of Auto is recommended in most situations.
Feeding Tension If media wrinkles when printing, or white banding (white or
Manual 0 to 40
light lines) appears in the print results, we recommend using
Auto -
Manual and setting the value to lower than Lv7. Make the
Take-up Tension same settings if ink adheres to the back of the take-up roll. If
Manual 1 to 9 thick media cannot be wound correctly, we recommend using
Manual and setting the value to higher than Lv7.


Select whether to enable (On) or disable (Off) operations to
On prevent media from sticking when the printer is turned on or
when printing starts. Since operations take longer when On is
Prevent Sticking selected, we recommend setting this to Off. Depending on the
RIP Settings media type, it may easily adhere to the platen. If operations are
Media Setup Off performed while the media is on the platen, the media is not fed
correctly and could cause a jam. If this occurs, set On.
Yes If [Yes] is selected, the setting content of selected media
Restore Settings
No settings are returned to the default settings.
Print Media List Print Print the contents of media setting banks 1 to 30.


Sets the side margin from the media’s right end while the media
is set in the printer. The media’s right end differs depending on
[Media End Check] setting in the Setup Menu as follows.
Side Margin (Right) 3 to 25 mm (0.12 to 1.00inch) When Media End Check is On: Right end of the media
When Media End Check is Off: Right end standard position (the
position up to Platen through the center of the media set position
attached on the Pre Heater)
Sets the side margin from the media left end while the media is
set in the printer. The media left end differs depending on
[Media End Check] setting in the Setup Menu as follows.
Side Margin (Left) 3 to 25 mm (0.12 to 1.00inch)
When Media End Check is On: Left end of the media
When Media End Check is Off: The position to the left 64 inch
from the right end standard position
Adjust this parameter if you want to print from the near center
of the media or if you want to shift the printed area left from the
Printer Setup Side Margin (Right) setting. The area between the right edge of
Print Start Position 0 to 800 mm (0.00 to 32.00 inch) the media and Print Start Position is left blank. If a value is
selected for Side Margin (Right), an additional area
corresponding to the width selected for Side Margin (Right) will
be left blank. See the following for more information.
Normal --- Allows you to enter a margin between pages. Even after making
adjustments, the size of the margin may change depending on
Margin Between Pages the media and usage environment. The margin increases when
No Margin -10 mm to +10 mm the number is moved in the + direction, and decreases when the
number is moved in the - direction.
ON Selects [On] to detect the media width and the top or [Off] to set
it to off. Select [Off] and print when Media Size error is
displayed even though the media is set correctly. However,
Media Size Check
OFF when this setting is set to [Off], the printed data can be out of
range of the media. If it happens, the ink contaminates the inside
of the printer. Setting to [On] is recommended usually.


ON Selects [On] to detect the media end or [Off] to set it to off.

Select [Off] and print when Media Out error is displayed even
Media End Check
though the media is set correctly. Setting to [On] is
OFF recommended usually.
ON Selects [On] to stop printing and display an error on the control

panel screen when the set media is skewed, or [Off] to continue
Media Skew Check
to print. The skewed media causes media jam, so setting to [On]
OFF is recommended usually.
Continue Select whether or not (Continue/Stop Printing) to print the
Media End Option
Stop Printing remaining data after replacement.
Selects the execution timing for the periodical check pattern
OFF printing from [Off] or one of the values between per [1] page to
per [10] pages. When this is set to [Off], the periodical check
pattern printing is not executed. When one of the values
Print Nozzle Pattern
between per [1] page to per [10] pages is selected, the check
1 to 10 pages pattern is printed on the top of the set page. Allows you to judge
whether any clogging can be seen in the following printing by
Printer Setup
checking the check patterns later on.
Off Selects the execution timing for periodical head cleaning from
Light [Off] or once per [1] hour to per [240] hours. When this is set to
1 - 240 hours
[Off], Periodical Cleaning is not executed. When one of the
Off
Medium values between per [1] hour to per [240] hours is selected, head
1 - 240 hours cleaning is performed automatically when the set time has
Periodical Cleaning Off passed. If the set time has come when the printer is printing or
Heavy in the sleep mode, Periodical Cleaning is performed after
1 - 240 hours
finishing the job or mode. In addition, the time counter is
Off cleared in the timings listed below.
Power  When the set value of this setting is changed.
1 - 240 hours
 When All Nozzles Cleaning is performed manually.
Selects the execution timing for the periodical head cleaning
OFF from [Off] or one of the values between per [1] page to per [10]
pages. When this is set to [Off], Periodical Cleaning is not
Cleaning Cycle
executed. When one of the values between per [1] page to per
to 10 pages [10] pages is selected, head cleaning is performed automatically
before printing the set page.


Turns to the sleep mode automatically when no error is
occurring, no print job receiving or there are no operations on
the control panel. In this setting, sets the time to turn to the sleep
mode automatically. When the printer turns to the sleep mode,
the screen display on the control panel disappears, and all
Heaters and internal motors turn off to reduce power
consumption. When the optional additional dryer is installed,
Heat Off Timer 15 - 240 min the fan stops in the sleep mode. Button operations on the control
Printer Setup panel (except [P] button) recovers the screen display on the
control panel. However, when there are no operations in this
condition, the screen display disappears again in about 30
seconds. The printer wakes from the sleep mode completely and
recovers normally, only when the operation with a hardware
operation is executed such as receiving a print job or operating
the Media Set Lever.
Yes When this is set to [Yes], returns the set values in [Printer
Restore Settings
No Setup] menus to their factory default.
Nozzle Check
Print At Right Prints the check patterns. Check them visually and execute head
Maintenance Print
Print At Center cleaning when blurring or space can be seen.
Print At Left


All Nozzles Checks the pattern numbers which blurring or space can be seen
Execute (Light) in their check patterns. Selects all lines or the nozzle lines
Head 1/Head 2
Execute (Medium) including the numbers, then executes head cleaning. When this
Head 1
Execute (Heavy) is set to [All Nozzles], executes head cleaning for all nozzles.
Head 2 When [Selected Nozzles] is selected, selects nozzle lines and
executes head cleaning only for them. Select the cleaning level
Cleaning
from [Execute (Light)], [Execute (Medium)] or [Execute
Execute (Light) (Heavy)]. Select [Execute (Light)] at first. When blurring or
Selected Nozzles Execute (Medium) space can be seen even though [Execute (Light)] is executed,
Execute (Heavy) select [Execute (Medium)]. When blurring or space can be seen
Maintenance even though [Execute (Medium)] is executed, select [Execute
(Heavy)].
Position the print head for maintenance. Perform such
maintenance as cleaning the wiper, caps, and the area around
Head Maintenance Move Head print head only after using this option to position the head for
cleaning. Moving the print head manually could cause
malfunction.
If you replace the Waste Ink Bottle before being prompted by a
message indicating the replacement interval of the Waste Ink
Waste Ink Counter ---
Bottle in the control panel, run the Waste Ink Counter option
after replacement.
Prints the list of current Printer Setup status, product life or
Print Status Sheet Print periodic replacement parts status. You can check each piece of
Printer Status information at once.
Firmware Version XXXXXX,X_XX,XXXX Displays the firmware version of the printer.
Auto
IP: XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX Sets the IP address, the subnet mask and the default gateway
IP Address Setting
Panel SM: XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX manually.
Network Setup DG: XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
Print Status Sheet Print Prints the list of current Network Setup.
Yes Returns the set values of Network Setup menus to their factory
Restore Settings
No default.


Sets the date and time for the internal clock. The set time is used
Date And Time YY/MM/DD HH:MM
for printing the job status and the printer status.
Japanese
English
French
Italian
German
Language Portuguese Selects the language used for the control panel display.
Spanish
Dutch
Preference Russian
Korean
Chinese
m Selects the unit of length to be used for various length
Unit: Length
ft/in information.
°C Selects the unit of temperature used for the control panel
Unit: Temperature
F display.
ON Enable (On) or disable (Off) the buzzer that sounds when an
Alert Sound Setting
OFF error occurs.
ON Selects [On] to inform an error and alert or [Off] to set it to off.
Alert Lamp Setting
OFF This setting informs with turning the Alert Lamp On/Off.
Yes When this is set to [Yes], returns all settings to their factory
Reset All Settings default except for Date And Time, Language, Unit: Length and
No Unit: Temperature in Preference menu.

1.5.2 Serviceman Mode

The Serviceman Mode is intended to be used by a service person for servicing the printer.
HOW TO START & QUIT
1. Turn the printer on by pressing the [Menu], [Back], and [OK] buttons together.
2. Turn the printer off to quit the Serviceman Mode.
SERVICEMAN MODE MENU LIST
Menu
Explanation
Class 1 2 3
Rear AD Adjusts the AD value of the PE Sensor.
CR Un Cap Unlocks or re-locks the carriage and uncaps/re-caps the Print Head.
Red
LCD RGB Check Green Checks the operation of the LCD.
Mecha Adjustment
Blue
Panel Check Checks the operation of the buttons and the LEDs.
PE
Sensor Check Checks the operation of sensors.
ILS
PGtyp
PG PG+
PG++
400 CPS
H to F Speed
500 CPS
Life CR Used only in manufacturing processes. Not used in service operations.
400 CPS
F to H Speed
500 CPS
Page Size
Fan
Life Count

Menu
Explanation
Class 1 2 3
Feed Amount 1
PS1
PS2
Feed Speed 1
PS3
PS4
Feed Amount 2
PF PS1
PS2
Feed Speed 2
PS3
Life PS4 Used only in manufacturing processes. Not used in service operations.
Wait
Fan
Life Count
PGtyp
PG PG+
APG PG++
Wait
Life Count
Display Count

CHAPTER
2
TROUBLE SHOOTING

2.1 Overview 2.1.1.2 Recurrence check of the trouble

Check if the trouble the user claims recurs with the returned printer.
This section explains the basic procedure for troubleshooting problems on the printer
quickly and efficiently.  If the F/W was not the latest, with the user's agreement, update the F/W to the
latest one and check if the trouble recurs.
When carrying out the troubleshooting procedures, take a flexible measure following
your sales company's policy and considering the troubling situation.
2.1.1.3 Check for the counter values/history
2.1.1 Preliminary Check Download NVRAM and check the following with NVRAM Viewer. (For the check
method, see p282.)
Make sure to verify or perform the following basic items whenever servicing the
printer.  Counter history of the periodic replacement parts. (if any part's life is near.)
 Printer's operating history (if any cause for the trouble exists)
2.1.1.1 Check for the usage environment
 Error history (the frequency/history of errors related with the trouble)
Check the user's usage environment.
 Temperature/humidity of the installation site 2.1.1.4 Test print check
(For the guaranteed environment, See "1.2.1 Basic Specifications" (See P
For the trouble related with print quality, carry out “Image Print” and check the current
14).)
adjustment status. (For the procedure of test print, see p292.)
 What type of media is used (manufacturer/type/width/thickness)?
 Genuine ink or 3rd party's ink?
 F/W version (the latest?)
 Error code
 Check also the following if necessary.
Phenomenon Check Item

The installation site inclined?
Any vibrating equipment near the site?
Bad print quality The user's panel settings
Is the interior dirty?
Clean it if dirty.
Missing dots/bad print quality Near a conditioner's ventilation duct?
TROUBLE SHOOTING Overview 38

2.1.2 Troubleshooting Procedure 2.1.3.2 If necessary to escalate the trouble case

Refer to the following items according to the observed symptom, carry out the Make a report with the following data.
corresponding troubleshooting following the procedures described in the next sections.  Backed-up NVRAM data
1. Trouble with a Maintenance Request or Service Call Error. (See P.40, P. 44)  Firmware version
2. Trouble on print quality (See P.62)
3. Trouble on paper feeding (See P.68)  Service program version
4. Other troubles (See P.70)  For bad print quality: a print sample with the marked symptom and a printed
5. Trouble on Service Program (See P.74) test pattern.
6. Trouble on NVRAM Viewer (See P.75)
 For faulty parts: the faulty parts themselves and a photos of the troubling
section.
2.1.3 Procedure after troubleshooting  Information on the user/the repair listed below
This is a format of the escalation report. At least check out the items on the
2.1.3.1 If the trouble has been successfully solved list and register the case in the escalation system.
 Check if the movement of the covers is normal (without any damage, noises).
• Model name
If any abnormality is found, lubricate or replace the faulty parts.
• Serial number
 Carry out the cleaning after repair. • With or without options
• Content of the claim from the user
 Prepare a report (nozzle check pattern and images of trouble such as ink
• Date of occurrence
leakage should be attached) on the repair. (follow your company/local office's
• Trouble occurrence conditions/recurrence method
policy.)
• What the service person actually observed
(Check items before check, the content of troubleshooting and repair.)
• Date of escalation
• Purpose of escalation
(Measures what the user/service person want done)
• Degree of urgency (S/A/B/C)
S: High (those which may cause a death, ignition, etc.)
A: Problems, bugs
B: Strong request
C: Inquiry
• Deadline for the response
• Repair history
• Part-replacement history
TROUBLE SHOOTING Overview 39

2.2 Remedies for Maintenance Requests

This section describes the remedies for maintenance requests. Maintenance requests do not effect the printer’s operation; therefore, you can continue the current printing. When a
maintenance request error occurs, the printer displays on the LCD a hexadecimal code of “NNNN” which correspond to the bit numbers assigned to error statuses as shown in the
table below.
There are 2 types of Maintenance Request; One is “Old Type“ and the other is “New Type“. It is possible to find out which type is matched by Serial Number of the printer shown
as Table2-1.
Table 2-1. How to find out by Serial Number

NA
Latin ESP ECC
EAL EPIL_India ETT EKL
Euro(West/Export) EPIL_ESP EHK
CISMEA
earlier than earlier than earlier than earlier than earlier than earlier than earlier than
Old
W3ME000253 W3PE000007 W3QE000029 W3UE000027 W3RE000019 W3SE000032 W3TE000137
Type
Ex):W3ME000252 Ex):W3PE000006 Ex):W3QE000028 Ex):W3UE000026 Ex):W3RE000018 Ex):W3SE000031 Ex):W3TE000136
W3TE000137
W3ME000253 W3PE000007 W3QE000029 W3UE000027 W3RE000019 W3SE000032
New or later
or later or later or later or later or later or later
Type Ex):W3TE000138
Ex):W3ME000254 Ex):W3PE000008 Ex):W3QE000030 Ex):W3UE000028 Ex):W3RE000020 Ex):W3SE000033
1: Ex):If the Serial Number is W3ME000254, it is later than W3ME000253.

Therefore W3ME000254 was manufactured by New Type and its Maintenance Request is matched on Table2-3.
TROUBLE SHOOTING Remedies for Maintenance Requests 40

Table 2-2. List of the Maintenance Requests for Old Type

Bit assignment (Binary) Hexadeci Part/Component
Status
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 mal causing the error
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 00000001 Reserved
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 00000002 Duct CR (Ink path) Near the end of life
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 00000004 Reserved
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 00000008 Reserved
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 00000010 Reserved
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 00000020 Reserved
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 00000040 Pump Cap Unit Near the end of life
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00000080 Ink Holder Near the end of life
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00000100 Reserved
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00000200 Ink Tube Near the end of life
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00000400 Reel Gear Near the end of life
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00000800 RTC battery Out of battery
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00001000 RTC Date/time not set
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00002000 Reserved
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00004000 Reserved
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00008000 CR Motor Cooling Fan lock Fan failure
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00010000 Reserved
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00020000 Reserved
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00040000 Reserved
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00080000 Reserved
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00100000 Reserved
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00200000 Reserved
Reach the end of
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00400000 Ink Holder
life (Suction pump)
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00800000 Reserved
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 01000000 Reserved
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 02000000 PF Motor Cooling Fan lock Fan failure
0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 04000000 Reserved
0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 08000000 Reserved
0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 10000000 Reserved
0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 20000000 Reserved
0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 40000000 Reserved
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 80000000 Reserved

Table 2-3. List of the Maintenance Requests for New Type

Bit assignment (Binary) Hexadeci Part/Component
Status
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 mal causing the error
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 00000001 Reserved
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 00000002 Duct CR (Ink path) Near the end of life
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 00000004 Reserved
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 00000008 Reserved
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 00000010 Reserved
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 00000020 Pump Cap Unit(Full) Near the end of life
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 00000040 Pump Cap Unit(Home) Near the end of life
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00000080 Ink Holder(Home) Near the end of life
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00000100 Ink Holder(Full) Near the end of life
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00000200 Ink Tube Near the end of life
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00000400 Reel Gear Near the end of life
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00000800 RTC battery Out of battery
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00001000 RTC Date/time not set
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00002000 Reserved
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00004000 PF Motor Cooling Fan lock Fan failure
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00008000 CR Motor Cooling Fan lock Fan failure
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00010000 Reserved
Reach the end of
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00020000 Duct CR (Ink path)
life
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00040000 Reserved
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00080000 Reserved
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00100000 Reserved
Reach the end of
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00200000 Pump Cap Unit(Full)
life (Suction pump)
Reach the end of
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00400000 Pump Cap Unit(Home)
life (Suction pump)
Reach the end of
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00800000 Ink Holder(Home)
life
Reach the end of
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 01000000 Ink Holder(Full)
life
Reach the end of
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 02000000 Ink Tube
life
0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 04000000 Reserved
0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 08000000 Reserved
0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 10000000 Reserved
0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 20000000 Reserved
0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 40000000 Reserved
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 80000000 Reserved

Note : Ex): When “Maintenance Request C00” is displayed.

As “C00” in hexadecimal means “0000000000000000000110000000000” in binary, you can find out the code is assigned to Bit-11 and Bit-12 referring to the above table.
In this case, two errors are occurring simultaneously. (Bit-11: out of battery/ Bit-12: the date/time not set.)

2.3 Remedies for Service Call Error

The following tables explains the Service Call error messages and remedies.
Table 2-4. Troubleshooting for Service Call Error

Code Error Name Cause Check Item Remedy
The Ink Tubes have reached the end of their service
Replace the Ink Tubes (Page 196) and reset the
1101 Ink Tubes life error life. (CR scan pass counter has reached a ---
counter (Page 293).
predetermined limit.)
The CR Unit does not respond to the CR HP Sensor, 1. Is the CR HP Sensor out of order? Does the light 1. Replace the CR HP Sensor. (Page 164)
or the sensor failed to detect the home position. shielding plate react to the sensor? 2. Re-install the CR Encoder. If it is faulty, replace
 CR HP Sensor failure 2. Is there any paper jammed inside the printer? it. (Page 166)
1125 CR HP detection error  False detection of the home due to paper jam or 3. Does the CR Scale have any scratches or dirt? 3. Clean the CR Scale using ethanol.
any other obstacle 4. Does the CR Encoder work properly? Check it 4. Replace the CR Scale. (Page 157)
 Misreading of the CR Scale using the Service Program. 5. Replace the CR Lock (Pump Cap Unit). (Page
 CR Lock is damaged. 5. Does the CR Lock function normally? 170, 177)
1. Connection failure of the CR Motor or the CR 1. Is there any problems such as damaged cable in the
Encoder. connections below?
2. Number of over current is reached limit of the CR  CR HP Sensor 1. Replace the CR HP Sensor.(Page 164)
CR Motor motor
1138  CR Encoder to SUB Board (CN102) 2. Replace the CR Encoder. (Page 166)
overcurrent error
 Irregular load  CR Motor to SUB-M Board (CN1) 3. Replace the CR Motor. (Page 161)
 CR Encoder failure 2. Does the CR Encoder work properly? Check it
 CR Motor failure using the Service Program.
1. Is the CR Motor driver on the Main Board
1. Remove the foreign material.
CR Motor The control terminal (Vre terminal) of the CR Motor damaged?
1139 2. If the error still occurs, replace the Main Board.
oscillation error driver has shorted out. 2. Is there any foreign materials around the CR Motor
(Page 123)
driver?
TROUBLE SHOOTING Remedies for Service Call Error 44


1. Is the CR Unit being attached correctly?
2. Is there any foreign materials on the CR Unit drive
Overcurrent to the CR Motor was detected.
path?
 CR Encoder cable is damaged.
3. Is there any problems such as damaged cable in the 1. Re-install the CR Unit. (Page 200)
CR Motor  CR Motor cable is damaged.
113A connections below? 2. Replace the CR Encoder. (Page 166)
overload error  Irregular load
 CR Encoder to SUB Board (CN102) 3. Replace the CR Motor. (Page 161)
 CR Encoder failure
 CR Motor to SUB-M Board (CN1)
 CR Motor failure
4. Does the CR Encoder work properly? Check it
using the Service Program.
The CR Motor was driven at a speed faster than a
predetermined one during deceleration.
1. Replace the CR Encoder. (Page 166)
CR Motor  Irregular load Does the CR Encoder work properly? Check it using
113B 2. Replace the SUB Board. (Page 131)
over speed error  CR Encoder failure the Service Program.
3. Replace the Main Board. (Page 123)
 SUB Board is damaged.
 CR Motor driver failure
1. Is there any problems such as damaged cable in the
The number of occurrences of reversing the CR connections below?
Motor has reached a predetermined limit.
 CR Encoder to SUB Board (CN102) 1. Adjust the tension of the CR Timing Belt. (Page
CR Motor  The polarity of CR Encoder cable is opposite.
113C  CR Motor to SUB-M Board (CN1) 297)
reversing error  The polarity of CR Motor cable is opposite.
2. Is the tension of the CR Timing Belt proper? 2. Replace the CR Encoder. (Page 166)
 Slipping of the teeth of CR Timing Belt
 CR Encoder failure 3. Does the CR Encoder work properly? Check it
Abnormally-long driving duration of the CR Motor
CR Motor was detected.
113D --- Replace the Main Board. (Page 123)
driving time-out error  Irregular load
 Firmware becomes out of control.
The CR Motor was driven at a speed abnormally
faster than a predetermined one during acceleration or
deceleration. 1. Replace the CR Encoder. (Page 166)
CR Motor  Irregular load Does the CR Encoder work properly? Check it using 2. Replace the CR Motor. (Page 161)
113E
velocity deviation error  CR Encoder failure the Service Program. 3. Replace the SUB Board. (Page 131)
 CR Motor failure 4. Replace the Main Board. (Page 123)
 CR Motor driver failure


The CR Motor was driven at a speed abnormally
slower than a predetermined one during operation.
connections below?
 CR Encoder cable is damaged.
CR Motor  CR Encoder to SUB Board (CN102) 1. Replace the CR Encoder. (Page 166)
113F  CR Motor cable is damaged.
lock error  CR Motor to SUB-M Board (CN1) 2. Replace the CR Motor. (Page 161)
 Irregular load
 CR Encoder failure
2. Does the CR Encoder work properly? Check it
 CR Motor failure
1. Is the PF Motor driver on the Main Board
PF Motor The control terminal (Vre terminal) of the PF Motor damaged?
oscillation error driver has shorted out. 2. Is there any foreign materials around the PF Motor
(Page 123)
driver?
Overcurrent to the PF Motor was detected.
 PF Encoder cable is damaged.
PF Motor  PF Motor cable is damaged. Does the PF Encoder work properly? Check it using 1. Replace the PF Encoder. (Page 215)
122A
overload error  Irregular load the Service Program. 2. Replace the Main Board. (Page 123)
 PF Encoder failure
 PF Motor failure
 Contamination of PF Encoder 1. Is the PF Encoder contaminated? 1. Replace the PF Encoder. (Page 215)
PF Motor
122B  Increase of load (paper jam) 2. Is there any foreign materials on the paper path? 2. Replace the FFC of the PF Encoder.
over speed error
 Cable disconnection 3. Check the Interface cable for breaking. 3. Replace the PF Motor. (Page 213)
PF Motor
122C PF Motor rotated in the reverse direction. --- Replace the PF Motor. (Page 213)
reversing error
Abnormally-long driving duration of the PF Motor
PF Motor was detected.


The PF Motor was driven at a speed abnormally faster
than a predetermined one during acceleration or
deceleration.
1. Replace the PF Encoder. (Page 215)
PF Motor  Irregular load Does the PF Encoder work properly? Check it using
122E 2. Replace the PF Motor. (Page 213)
velocity deviation error  PF Encoder failure the Service Program.
 PF Motor driver failure
The PF Motor was driven at a speed abnormally
connections below?
 CR Encoder cable disconnection
PF Motor  PF Encoder to SUB Board (CN102) 1. Replace the PF Encoder. (Page 215)
122F  CR Motor cable disconnection
lock error  PF Motor to SUB-M Board (CN1) 2. Replace the PF Motor. (Page 213)
 Irregular load
2. Does the PF Encoder work properly? Check it
 PF Encoder failure
1. Turn the power off and then back on. Does the
Head driver printer recover from the error? 1. Replace the Head FFC. (Page 150)
The temperature of the Head driver rises, and has
131B (transmission gate)
reached a predetermined limit. 2. Is the FFC connected to the connector properly 2. Replace the Print Head. (Page 144)
overheat error
without being tilted?
 Connection failure of the Pump Motor or the Pump
Motor encoder.
connections below?
 The number of occurrences of overcurrent to the
Pump Motor  Pump Motor (Pump Motor encoder) to Main Replace the Pump Motor encoder and Pump Motor
1418 Pump Motor has reached a predetermined limit.
overcurrent error Board (CN210/CN230) (Pump Cap Unit 2). (Page 177)
 Irregular load
2. Does the Pump Motor encoder work properly?
 Pump Motor encoder failure
Check it using the Service Program.
 Pump Motor failure
1. Is the Pump Motor driver on the Main Board
Pump Motor The control terminal (Vre terminal) of the Pump damaged?
oscillation error Motor driver has shorted out. 2. Is there any foreign materials around the Pump
(Page 123)
Motor driver?


Overcurrent to the Pump Motor was detected. 1. Is there any problems such as damaged cable in the
 Pump Motor encoder cable disconnection connections below?
Pump Motor  Pump Motor cable disconnection  Pump Motor (Pump Motor encoder) to Main Replace the Pump Motor encoder and Pump Motor
141A
overload error  Irregular load Board (CN210/CN230) (Pump Cap Unit 2). (Page 177)
 Pump Motor encoder failure 2. Does the Pump Motor encoder work properly?
 Pump Motor failure Check it using the Service Program.
The Pump Motor was driven at a speed faster than a
predetermined one during deceleration. 1. Replace the Pump Motor encoder (Pump Cap
Pump Motor Does the Pump Motor encoder work properly? Check
141B  Irregular load Unit2). (Page 177)
over speed error it using the Service Program.
 Pump Motor encoder failure 2. Replace the Main Board. (Page 123)
 Pump Motor driver failure
The number of occurrences of reversing the Pump
connections below?
Motor has reached a predetermined limit.
Pump Motor  Pump Motor (Pump Motor encoder) to Main Replace the Pump Motor encoder (Pump Cap Unit
141C  The polarity of Pump Motor encoder cable is
reversing error Board (CN210/CN230) 2). (Page 177)
opposite.
 The polarity of Pump Motor cable is opposite.
Abnormally-long driving duration of the Pump Motor
Pump Motor was detected.


The Pump Motor was driven at a speed abnormally
deceleration. 1. Replace the Pump Motor encoder and Pump
Pump Motor Does the Pump Motor encoder work properly? Check
141E  Irregular load Motor (Pump Cap Unit 2). (Page 177)
velocity deviation error it using the Service Program.
 Pump Motor encoder failure 2. Replace the Main Board. (Page 123)
 Pump Motor failure
 Pump Motor driver failure
The PF Motor was driven at a speed abnormally
connections below?
Pump Motor  Pump Motor (Pump Motor encoder) to Main Replace the Pump Motor encoder and Pump Motor
141F  Irregular load
lock error Board (CN210/CN230) (Pump Cap Unit 2). (Page 177)
 Pump Motor encoder failure
 Pump Motor failure
MNU1 overcurrent
14A8
error
14A9 MNU1 oscillation error
14AA MNU1 overload error
1. Is the cable (Pump Cap Unit 1 to Main Board) 1. Reconnect the cable.
14AB MNU1 over speed error
connected properly? 2. Replace the cable.
14AC MNU1 reversing error Failure of the Pump Cap Unit 1 2. Does the Pump Cap Unit 1 operate normally? 3. Replace the Pump Cap Unit 1. (Page 170)
MNU1 driving time-out 3. Is the Main Board out of order?
14AD 4. Replace the Main Board. (Page 123)
error
MNU1 velocity
14AE
deviation error
14AF MNU1 lock error
The Pump Cap Unit 1 has reached the end of its
Pump cap unit 1 Replace the Pump Cap Unit 1 (Page 170) and reset
1430 service life. (The total number of revolutions of the ---
Suction pump life error the counter (Page 293).
Pump Motor has reached a predetermined limit)
The Pump Cap Unit 2 has reached the end of its
Pump cap unit 2 Replace the Pump Cap Unit 2 (Page 177) and reset
1431 service life. (The total number of revolutions of the ---
Suction pump life error the counter (Page 293).
Pump Motor has reached a predetermined limit)
The Ink Holder 1 has reached the end of its service
life. (The total number of times that the holder was Replace the Ink Holder 1 (Page 183) and reset the
1432 Ink Holder 1 life error ---
removed from the printer has reached a predetermined counter (Page 293).
limit)


The IC Holder 2 has reached the end of its service
life. (The total number of times the ink cartridge is Replace the IC Holder 2 (Page 189) and reset the
1433 IC Holder 2 life error ---
removed from the printer has reached a predetermined counter (Page 293).
limit)
Ink Path CR Assy The Ink Path CR Assy has reached the end of its Replace the Ink Path CR Assy (Page 140) and reset
1435 ---
life error service life. the counter (Page 293).
Pump Cap Unit 1
1410 Pump Cap Unit 1 failure Is the sensor cable properly connected? Replace the Pump Cap Unit 1. (Page 170)
undetectable error
Pump Cap Unit 2
1411 Pump Cap Unit 2 failure Is the sensor cable properly connected? Replace the Pump Cap Unit 2. (Page 177)
undetectable error
Wrong color ink was filled in the ink tank. This error Check if wrong color ink is filled (check if the Discard the current ink tank, and clean the ink path
Wrong ink mixture
1417 occurs if the combination of the ink holder and the combination of the ink holder and the chip unit is using cleaning liquid, then install a new ink tank.
error
chip unit is not correct. correct.) (Page 72)
1. Is the PG Sensor out of order? Does the light
1. Replace the PG Sensor. (Page 169)
shielding plate react to the sensor?
2. Replace the APG Assy. (Page 167)
PG position When changing the PG, the PG sensor could not 2. Do the planetary gearing work normally? Do the
150C 3. Remove any obstacles around the CR Unit home
undetectable error detect the PG position. planet gears and outer gears properly engage with
each other? position. The printer changes the PG with the CR
Unit being at its home position.
3. Is the CR Unit out of its home position?
1. Is the APG Motor driver on the Main Board
APG Motor The control terminal (Vre terminal) of the APG Motor damaged?
oscillation error driver has shorted out. 2. Is there any foreign materials around the APG
(Page 123)
Motor driver?
 Connection failure of the APG Motor.
 Overcurrent to the APG Motor was detected. Is there any problems such as damaged cable in the
APG Motor  APG Motor cable is damaged. connections below?
151A Replace the APG Motor. (Page 167)
overload error  Irregular load  APG Motor (APG encoder) to Main Board
 APG encoder failure (CN210/CN203)
 APG Motor failure


The APG Motor was driven at a speed faster than a
APG Motor 1. Replace the APG Motor. (Page 167)
151B  Irregular load ---
over speed error 2. Replace the Main Board. (Page 123)
 APG encoder failure
 APG Motor driver failure
The number of occurrences of reversing the APG Is there any problems such as damaged cable in the
APG Motor Motor has reached a predetermined limit. connections below?
151C Replace the APG Motor. (Page 167)
reversing error  The polarity of APG Motor cable is opposite.  APG Motor (APG encoder) to Main Board
 APG Motor failure (CN210/CN203)
Abnormally-long driving duration of the APG Motor
APG Motor was detected.
The APG Motor was driven at a speed abnormally
deceleration.
APG Motor 1. Replace the APG Motor. (Page 167)
151E  Irregular load ---
velocity deviation error 2. Replace the Main Board. (Page 123)
 APG encoder failure
 APG Motor failure
 Connection failure of the APG Motor.
 The APG Motor was driven at a speed abnormally Is there any problems such as damaged cable in the
APG Motor slower than a predetermined one during operation. connections below?
151F Replace the APG Motor. (Page 167)
lock error  Irregular load  APG Motor (APG encoder) to Main Board
 APG encoder failure (CN210/CN203)
 APG Motor failure
1. Is the ATC Motor driver on the Main Board
ATC Motor The control terminal (Vre terminal) of the ATC Motor damaged?
oscillation error driver has shorted out. 2. Is there any foreign materials around the ATC
(Page 123)
Motor driver?


Overcurrent to the ATC Motor was detected. 1. Is there any problems such as damaged cable in the
 ATC Motor cable disconnection. connections below?
ATC Motor
159A  Irregular load  ATC Motor to Sub-F Board (CN602) Replace the ATC Motor. (Page 241)
overload error
 ATC Motor encoder failure 2. Does the ATC Motor encoder work properly?
 ATC Motor failure Check it using the Service Program.
The ATC Motor was driven at a speed faster than a
1. Replace the ATC Motor. (Page 241)
ATC Motor  Irregular load Does the ATC Motor encoder work properly? Check
159B 2. Replace the Sub-F Board. (Page 239)
over speed error  ATC Motor encoder failure it using the Service Program.
 Sub-F Board failure
The number of occurrences of reversing the ATC
connections below?
ATC Motor Motor has reached a predetermined limit.
159C  ATC Motor to Sub-F Board (CN602) Replace the ATC Motor. (Page 241)
reversing error  The polarity of ATC Motor cable is opposite.
2. Does the ATC Motor encoder work properly?
 ATC Motor failure
Abnormally-long driving duration of the ATC Motor
ATC Motor was detected.
The APG Motor was driven at a speed abnormally
deceleration.
1. Replace the ATC Motor. (Page 241)
ATC Motor  Irregular load Does the ATC Motor encoder work properly? Check
159E 2. Replace the Sub-F Board. (Page 239)
velocity deviation error  ATC Motor encoder failure it using the Service Program.
 ATC Motor failure
 Sub-F Board disconnection
 ATC Motor driver failure


 Connection failure of the ATC Motor.
 The ATC Motor was driven at a speed abnormally
connections below?
ATC Motor slower than a predetermined one during operation.
159F  ATC Motor to Sub-F Board (CN602) Replace the ATC Motor. (Page 241)
lock error  Irregular load
2. Does the ATC Motor encoder work properly?
 ATC Motor encoder failure
 ATC Motor failure
Is the combination of the Roll Unit and Reel Unit
Roll/Reel Units The combination of the Roll Unit and Reel Unit may Correct the combination of the Roll Unit and Reel
1610 either both of them are standard units or both of them
mismatch error be wrong; one of the units may be an optional unit. Unit to either both are standard or both are optional.
are optional units?
Roll Unit The Roll Unit could not be detected during
1611 Is the connector of the Roll Unit disconnected? Connect the connector of the Roll Unit.
undetectable error mechanism initialization process.
Roll Unit When the ATC Motor started to operate, it was 1. Is the connector of the Roll Unit disconnected?
1. Connect the connector of the Roll Unit.
1612 undetectable error at detected that the Roll Unit status is different from that 2. Has the Roll Unit been replaced since the power on
the start of operation detected during mechanism initialization process. 2. Turn the printer off and back on.
and while the ATC Motor was stopping?
Roll Unit
The connector of the Roll Unit was disconnected
1613 undetectable error Is the connector of the Roll Unit disconnected? Connect the connector of the Roll Unit.
during the ATC Motor was operating.
during operation
Reel Unit When the Reel Motor started to operate, it was 1. Is the connector of the Reel Unit disconnected?
1. Connect the connector of the Reel Unit.
1614 undetectable error at detected that the Reel Unit status is different from that 2. Has the Reel Unit been replaced since the power on
the start of operation detected during mechanism initialization process. 2. Turn the printer off and back on.
and while the Reel Motor was stopping?
Reel Unit
The connector of the Reel Unit was disconnected
1615 undetectable error Is the connector of the Reel Unit disconnected? Connect the connector of the Reel Unit.
during the Reel Motor was operating.
during operation
There is a problem with a specific bit on the board, Replace the Sub-F Board of the Roll Unit. (Page
1616 Roll Unit Board failure Unexpected error
which detects what device is connected to the board. 239)
There is a problem with a specific bit on the board, Replace the Sub-F Board of the Reel Unit. (Page
1617 Reel Unit Board failure Unexpected error
which detects what device is connected to the board. 247)
Roll/Reel Unit Board There is a problem with a specific bit on the board, Replace the Sub-F Board of the Roll Unit (Page
1618 Unexpected error
failure which detects what device is connected to the board. 239) and Reel Unit (Page 247).


If the error still occurs after resetting the date and
RTC data The various absolute time settings stored on the Reset the date and time settings of the RTC using the time, perform the followings.
1A23
invalid error NVRAM are abnormal. Service Program. 1. Replace the RTC backup battery.
1. Turn the power off and remove the RTC backup
battery.
RTC Access 2. After several seconds, re-attach the battery and
1A26 The RTC circuit on the Main Board malfunctions. ---
T/O error turn the power back on.
3. Reset the date and time settings of the RTC using
the Service Program.
 The Head FFC is not connected correctly.
Is the Head FFC connected properly without being
 A temperature out of a predetermined range was 1. Replace the Head FFC. (Page 150)
1A37 Thermistor error connected at an angle and any abnormalities such as
detected by the Head thermistor. 2. Replace the Print Head. (Page 144)
ripped terminal cover?
 Head thermistor failure
Transistor  Transistor failure
1A38 environmental  A temperature out of a predetermined range was --- Replace the Print Head. (Page 144)
temperature error detected by the Head thermistor.
 Connection failure of the Head FFC.
 Electric parts or components are damaged due to 1. Replace the Head FFC. (Page 150)
improper Head FFC connection such as connecting
1A39 Head error connected at an angle and any abnormalities such as 2. Replace the Print Head. (Page 144)
it at an angle.
ripped terminal cover? 3. Replace the Main Board. (Page 123)
 The drive circuit in the Print Head is damaged.
 The fuse of the Main Board has blown.
CR Motor Cooling Fan  Cable is damaged 1. Reconnect the cable.
1A3C ---
lock error  Fan failure 2. Replace the CR Motor Cooling Fan. (Page 163)
PF Motor Cooling Fan  Cable is damaged 1. Reconnect the cable.
1A3D ---
lock error  Fan failure 2. Replace the PF Motor Cooling Fan. (Page 214)
1. Reconnect the cable.
Power Supply Board  Cable is damaged
1A3D --- 2. Replace the Power Supply Board Cooling Fan.
Cooling Fan lock error  Fan failure
(Page 137)
Head rank ID Rewrite the Head rank ID with a correct one. (Page
1A41 An invalid Head rank ID was written to the NVRAM. Check the Head rank ID using the Service Program.
input error 309)


I2C communication
An I2C communication error has occurred in the
1A50 error between elements --- Replace the Main Board. (Page 123)
Main Board.
on ASIC and MAIN
Are the Main Board and Sub Board properly 1. Replace the FFC that connects the Main Board
I2C communication and Sub Board.
An I2C communication error between the Main Board connected to each other without any cable
1A51 error between elements
and Sub Board has occurred. disconnection, FFCs being connected at an angle, and 2. Replace the Sub Board. (Page 131)
on ASIC and SUB
any abnormalities such as ripped terminal cover? 3. Replace the Main Board. (Page 123)
I2C communication
1A52 error between elements The IC on the Main Board is broken. --- Replace the Main Board. (Page 123)
on ASIC and SUB
I2C communication
1A53 error between elements The IC on the Main Board is broken. --- Replace the Main Board. (Page 123)
on ASIC and SUB


Check the resistance between terminal on the Main
Board “F12”.
Main Board magnification

Check Position
CN400
F12
1. If the resistance of “F12”on the Main Board has

more than “1Ω”
=> The fuse of the Main Board has blown. It is
necessary to check whether drive circuit has
broken in the Print Head.
 CSIC control error. [CHECK] 1. Replace the Main Board.(Page 123)

 The drive circuit damage in the Print Head was Pull out the Print Head FFC from Main Board
1F80 CSIC error 2. Replace the Print Head.(Page 144)
caused by the 42V fuse blew out of the Main (Don’t pull out the FFC from Print Head) “CN400”
3. Replace the Ink Holder.(Page 183, 189)
Board and, check the resistance between “15”-”19” of FFC
terminal.
• more than “1MW” : Go to process “1”
• less than “1MW” : Go to process “1” and “2”
Head FFC
C A U T IO N ∗Be careful
to handling
of FFC.
∗Be careful
to electrode
measureme
nt.
15 19
2. If the resistance of “F12” on the Main Board has

less than “1Ω”
=> The fuse is normal of Main Board.
Go to process “3”


1. Replace the Ink Holder. (Page 183, 189)
1F81 CSIC error CSIC control error ---
CRCM Board communication error
1. Connect the FCC again.
 Broken FFC
1FB8 CSIC error Is the FFC connected at an angle? 2. Replace the FFC.
 Slant connection
 Ink holder board failure
1FB9 CSIC error CSIC control error ---
 Broken FFC
1FBE CSIC error Is the FFC connected at an angle? 2. Replace the FFC.
 Broken FFC
1FBF CSIC error Is the FFC connected at an angle? 2. Replace the FFC.


1FC0 CSIC error CSIC control error ---
1FC1 CSIC error CSIC control error ---
2000 NVRAM error NVRAM erase or write error has occurred. --- Replace the Main Board. (Page 123)
Writing to the SDRAM was attempted, but nothing
2002 SDRAM error --- Replace the Main Board. (Page 123)
could be written to it.
FLASH BOOT  Installing the firmware has failed. 1. Re-install the firmware. (Page 291)
2003 ---
checksum error  The Flash ROM is out of order. 1. Replace the Main Board. (Page 123)
1. Re-install the firmware. (Page 291)
200A F/W load error Reading/decompressing the firmware has failed. ---
System interrupt
A system failure such as CPU failure, or defective
200D watchdog time-out --- Replace the Main Board. (Page 123)
cash has occurred.
error
The AC power has been shut off due to a power 1. Replace the Power Supply Board. (Page 125)
3000 AC shut-off failure, unplugged, Power Supply Board failure, or Is the Power cable properly connected?
Main Board failure or the like. 2. Replace the Main Board. (Page 123)
This error is intended to be used in the product

Turn the power off and back on. Does the printer
Service call for FW development stage. It is supposed to not occur with 1. Re-install the firmware. (Page 291)
Dxxy recover from the error? (No repair work is needed
debugging marketed product, but may occur due to an 2. Replace the Main Board. (Page 123)
unless the error occurs again.)
unexpected cause such as external noises.
CPU related service  There is something wrong with the firmware. 1. Re-install the firmware. (Page 291)
Fxxx Is the firmware installed correct one for the printer?
call  The Main Board is out of order. 2. Replace the Main Board. (Page 123)


1. Is the Reel Motor driver on the Main Board
Reel Motor The control terminal (Vre terminal) of the Reel Motor damaged?
15A9 2. If the error still occurs, replace the Main Board.
oscillation error driver has shorted out. 2. Is there any foreign materials around the Reel
(Page 123)
Motor driver?
Overcurrent to the Reel Motor was detected. 1. Is there any problems such as damaged cable in the
 Reel Motor cable disconnection. connections below?
Reel Motor
15AA  Irregular load  Reel Motor to Sub-F Board (CN601) Replace the Reel Motor. (Page 249)
overload error
 Reel Motor encoder failure 2. Does the Reel Motor encoder work properly?
 Reel Motor failure Check it using the Service Program.
The Reel Motor was driven at a speed faster than a
1. Replace the Reel Motor. (Page 249)
Reel Motor  Irregular load Does the Reel Motor encoder work properly? Check it
15AB 2. Replace the Sub-F Board. (Page 247)
over speed error  Reel Motor encoder failure using the Service Program.
 Reel Motor driver failure
The number of occurrences of reversing the Reel
connections below?
Reel Motor Motor has reached a predetermined limit.
15AC  Reel Motor to Sub-F Board (CN601) Replace the Reel Motor. (Page 249)
reversing error  The polarity of Reel Motor cable is opposite.
2. Does the Reel Motor encoder work properly?
 Reel Motor failure
Abnormally-long driving duration of the Reel Motor
Reel Motor was detected.
15AD --- Replace the Main Board. (Page 123)


The Reel Motor was driven at a speed abnormally
deceleration.
1. Replace the Reel Motor. (Page 249)
Reel Motor  Irregular load Does the Reel Motor encoder work properly? Check it
15AE 2. Replace the Sub-F Board. (Page 247)
velocity deviation error  Reel Motor encoder failure using the Service Program.
 Reel Motor failure
 Reel Motor driver failure
 Connection failure of the Reel Motor.
 The Reel Motor was driven at a speed abnormally
connections below?
Reel Motor slower than a predetermined one during operation.
15AF  Reel Motor to Sub-F Board (CN601) Replace the Reel Motor. (Page 249)
lock error  Irregular load
2. Does the Reel Motor encoder work properly?
 Reel Motor encoder failure
 Reel Motor failure
1. Is there any abnormal load applied to the Pressure
1. Replace the Pressure Unit (Ink Holder). (Page
Pressurizing The initialization process did not complete within a Unit?
1620 183, 189)
initialization error predetermined time period. 2. Is there any disconnected connectors or damaged
cables?
Pressurizing/Suction The pressurizing and suction processes did not Unit?
1621 183, 189)
switching error complete within a predetermined time period. 2. Is there any disconnected connectors or damaged
cables?
Operating time-out The switching operation did not complete within a Unit?
1622 183, 189)
error predetermined time period. 2. Is there any disconnected connectors or damaged
cables?
1. Is the Pressure Motor driver on the Main Board
Continuous revolution The control terminal (Vre terminal) of the Pressure damaged?
error Motor driver has shorted out. 2. Is there any foreign materials around the Pressure
(Page 123)
Motor driver?


 Connection failure between the Main Board and 1. Is the cable connected properly?
Sub-E Board such as cable disconnection 1. Replace the cable.
2. Is the Sub-E Board out of order?
HTC common elements  There is something wrong with the elements on the
1931
communication error 3. Is the Main Board out of order? (Unlikely cause of 2. Replace the Sub-E Board. (Page 133)
Sub-E Board.
this error) 3. Replace the Main Board. (Page 123)
 There is something wrong with the communication
elements on the Main Board.
A thermistor temperature out of a predetermined 1. Is the thermistor out of order? 1. Replace the thermistor (After Heater). (Page
After Heater 233)
1950 range was detected the predetermined number of 2. Is there any disconnected connectors or damaged
AD abnormal error
times in a row. cables? 2. Replace the Main Board. (Page 123)
1. Replace the thermistor (After Heater). (Page
A heater temperature out of a predetermined range 1. Is the thermistor out of order? 233)
After Heater
1952 was detected the predetermined number of times in a 2. Is there any disconnected connectors or damaged
overheat error 2. Replace the After Heater. (Page 233)
row. cables?
1. Replace the thermistor (After Heater). (Page
1. Is the thermistor out of order? 233)
After Heater The difference between the current temperature and
1953 2. Is there any disconnected connectors or damaged
heat deviation error target temperature exceeded a predetermined limit. 2. Replace the After Heater. (Page 233)
cables?
1. Connect the cable again.
 Cable disconnection, broken cable, blown fuse, 1. Check the cable connection.
After Heater power 2. Replace the cable.
1954 heater failure 2. SUB-E Board failure.
abnormality 1 error 3. Replace the SUB-E Board. (Page 133)
 Unplugged AC cable (for After Heater) 3. After Heater failure.
4. Replace the After Heater. (Page 233)
Cool down the room temperature and turn off (and
then turn on) the printer. (The printer stops if the
Inner temperature 1. Check the room temperature.
196A The temperature of the Printhead has become high. temperature of the Printhead reaches 49 °C. A
overheating error 2. Check the RIP settings. warning is displayed when the temperature reaches
44 °C.)
Exchange parts is reached the end of life. 1. Make sure which parts have already reached the Replace the parts which have already reached the
4000 Exchange Parts
(Only for the printers which have films to extend life.) End of Life. End of Life.

2.4 Remedies for Print Quality Troubles

This section provides troubleshooting of print quality troubles classifying them by observed symptom. Before performing troubleshooting, refer to “Nozzle Check” (p311) and print
nozzle check pattern. Examine the printed pattern, and if any missing segment is found, perform the Print Head cleaning.
Table 2-5. Print Quality Troubles

Symptom Cause Check Item Remedy
The Wiper is contaminated and wiping 1. Is the Wiper or Wiper Cleaner contaminated? 1. Clean the Wiper. (Page 375)
the Print Head cannot be performed 2. Replace the Wiper (Page 100) and Wiper
2. Is the Wiper or Wiper Cleaner damaged?
properly. Cleaner (Page 100).
1. Clean the Cap. (Page 375)
The Head Cap is contaminated. Is the Cap contaminated? 2. Replace the Cap (Pump Cap Unit). (Page 170,
177)
There is some foreign material on the
Is there any foreign materials on the Print Head? Clean the Print Head. (Page 375)
Print Head.
There is something wrong in the pump
Is the pump tube being bent or getting caught between
The nozzles are still clogging after tube and the cleaning (suctioning of Route the pump tube correctly.
surrounding parts or components?
cleaning. ink) cannot be performed properly.
The ink is leaking. Is there any ink leakage observed on the ink flow paths? If any leakage is found correct it.
There is air inside the ink path. Is there any air bubbles observed in the ink flow paths? Run a head cleaning. (Page 313)
1. Reconnect the Head FFC.
The Head FFC is not connected
connected at an angle and any abnormalities such as ripped 2. If the trouble still occurs, the cause may be
correctly. breaking of the Head FFC. Replace the Head
terminal cover?
FFC. (Page 150)
If any of the remedies above does not help, replace the following parts one by one.
 Print Head (Page 144)
 Main Board (The fuse may have blown) (Page 123)
Carry out the adjustments correctly.
Have the following adjustments been made properly?  CR Direction Head Slant Adjustment (Page
The Print Head has not been adjusted
 CR Direction Head Slant Adjustment 314)
Horizontal or vertical lines look properly.
 PF Direction Head Slant Adjustment  PF Direction Head Slant Adjustment (Page
misaligned. 319)
1. Is the paper thickness setting correct? 1. Correct the paper thickness setting.
Improper PG adjustment
2. Has the PG adjustment been made properly? 2. Perform the PG adjustment. (Page 306)
TROUBLE SHOOTING Remedies for Print Quality Troubles 62


Carry out the following adjustments.
 CR Direction Head Slant Adjustment (Page
--- 314)
properly.
 PF Direction Head Slant Adjustment (Page
319)
Carry out the following adjustment.
 Feed amount adjustment
The paper was not fed properly. --- Check the following settings.
Bandings in the paper feeding direction.  Feed Adjustment
 Media Tension
1. Clean the PF Scale.
1. Is the PF Scale damaged or contaminated?
2. Reinstall the PF Scale and PF Encoder.
PF Scale or PF Encoder failure 2. Is the PF Scale attached properly?
3. Replace the PF Scale (Page 216) and PF
3. Is the PF Encoder installed correctly?
Encoder (Page 215).
The tension of the PF Timing Belt is not Correct the tension of the PF Timing Belt. (Page
---
proper. 338)
PF Motor failure --- Replace the PF Motor. (Page 213)


Carry out the adjustments correctly.
Have the following adjustments been made properly?  CR Direction Head Slant Adjustment (Page
 CR Direction Head Slant Adjustment 314)
properly.
 PF Direction Head Slant Adjustment  PF Direction Head Slant Adjustment (Page
319)
1. Is the paper thickness setting correct? 1. Correct the paper thickness setting.
Improper PG adjustment
2. Has the PG adjustment been made properly? 2. Perform the PG adjustment. (Page 306)
1. Clean the CR Scale.
1. Is the CR Scale damaged or contaminated?
Bandings in the carriage movement 2. Reinstall the CR Scale and CR Encoder.
CR Scale or CR Encoder failure 2. Is the CR Scale attached properly?
direction. 3. Replace the CR Scale (Page 157) and CR
3. Is the CR Encoder installed correctly?
Encoder (Page 166).
The tension of the CR Timing Belt is Correct the tension of the CR Timing Belt. (Page
---
not proper. 297)
1. Is there any slack in the loaded paper?
 Suction setting failure 1. Make the suction setting properly.
2. Does the Suction fan work normally? Check it using the
 Suction fan failure 2. Replace the Suction fan. (Page 221)
Service Program.
Lubrication on the CR moving parts is
Has the oil pad of the CR Unit dried out? If the pad is dry, lubricate it. (Page 387)
insufficient.


1. Is the paper wrinkled, bent, rippled, or warped? 1. Replace the paper with a proper new one.
There is a problem with the paper used. 2. Is the paper too thick and contacting with the head? 2. Adjust the PG setting according to the paper
3. Is the paper too thin and loosening when being fed? thickness.
1. Is paper advanced before ink on it dries?
2. Is the paper used a kind of paper that absorbs ink easily 1. Change the drying time setting to a longer one.
Drying failure and takes longer time to being dried? 2. Change the paper with another one.
3. Is the heater temperature setting appropriate? (SC- 3. Set the heater temperature higher.
F7100series only)
Printed side is smudged or smeared with Improper PG adjustment Has the PG adjustment been made properly? Perform the PG adjustment. (Page 306)
ink. The PF (Paper Feed) Roller is
Is the PF roller smudged or smeared with ink or anything? Clean the roller. Print some blank pages to clean it.
contaminated
1. Perform the followings
 Replace the paper holddown plate if any bend
1. Is paper holddown plate being raised improperly? is observed.
There is something wrong with the
2. Is the plate pressing paper too much and bringing the  Install the plate so that it properly presses
paper holddown plate.
paper too close to the Print Head side? paper.
2. Align the holes on the plate with the edges of
paper.
1. Clean the platen.
1. Is the platen contaminated with ink?
The platen is contaminated. 2. Enable (select “ON”) the Media Size Check
The backside of paper is smudged or 2. Is the Media Size Check function enabled?
function.
smeared with ink.
Suction Fan is making the ink mists
Is the suction level of the fan proper? Change the suction level appropriately.
drift to the back of the printing paper.
The ink in the ink cartridge is not Shake the ink cartridges so that ink droplets spread
---
Color or print density unevenness within a agitated enough. evenly inside the cartridges.
page or across pages. Deterioration of ink quality Have the installed ink cartridges expired? Replace the expired ink cartridges with new ones.
Improper PG adjustment Has the PG adjustment been made properly? Perform the PG adjustment. (Page 306)
Rewrite the Head rank ID with a correct one.
Too much ink discharge. Has the Head rank ID been written correctly?
Blurred print (Page 309)
The ink droplet sizes are not proper. Are the RIP settings proper? Change the RIP settings accordingly.
Traces of Pressure Roller are caused
Remove the paper if the printer is left for a long
because the paper had been kept set in ---
Paper dust is attached or the traces of the time.
the printer for a long time.
rollers appear.
The paper dust attached on the PF Clean the rollers. Print some blank pages to clean
Is there any paper dust attached to the PF rollers?
rollers transferred to the paper. them.

2.4.1 Ink Clogging C H E C K Due to the structure of this printer, you cannot replace only one
If the ink clogging persists even though you clean the surrounding area of the ink P O IN T tank. Therefore, replacement of the tanks should be made
system and perform a cleaning, carry out the following procedure. according to the combinations below.
• BK and M
REQUIRED TOOL • Y and C
 Cleaning cartridges (CL14) (2 to 4 pcs) 7. Lower the lock levers.
 New ink tanks (2 to 4 pcs) 8. Start the printer in the Serviceman Mode.
Turn on the printer while pressing [Menu] + [Back] + [OK].
 New chip unit (for 2 to 4 colors. See below for which colors should be prepared.)
9. Select Ink Eject.
C H E C K Due to the structure of this printer, you cannot replace only one Select the corresponding color rows, and press the [Run] button to run the ink
P O IN T tank. Therefore, replacement of the tanks should be made eject. (Page 332)
according to the combinations below. 10. Select Activation of Cleaning Cartridge.
 For SC-F7000 Series Select the corresponding color rows, and press the [Run] button to validate the
• BK and M cleaning cartridge. (Page 331)
• Y and C
 For SC-B7000 Series 11. Turn off the printer.
• BK and Y 12. Install the cleaning cartridges. (Page 207)
• M and C
13. Lower the lock levers.
REMEDY 14. Turn on the printer.
15. Discard the waste ink.
1. Turn on the printer.
16. Select Tube inner cleaning.
Select the corresponding color rows, and press the [Run] button to fill the cleaning
3. Select Countermeasure of ink clogging (When no using printer) from liquid. (Page 333)
ADJUSTMENT (Sequence).
4. Select Auto CR unlock & move CR to full column side.
18. Turn off the printer.
Press the [Run] button.
The CR lock is released and the CR Unit moves to the full side, then the printer 19. Remove the cleaning cartridges.
turns off automatically. 20. Lower the lock levers.
5. Clean the areas where ink is attached such as the area around the print head, cap,
wiper or wiper rail. (Page 375)
6. Remove the ink tank of the clogging ink color and the other ink tank of the
corresponding color combination given below. (Page 207)

21. Start the printer in the Serviceman Mode.

Select the corresponding color rows, and press the [Run] button to eject the
cleaning liquid. (Page 332)
23. Select Switch between Ink cartridges and Ink tanks.
Select the corresponding color rows and Ink tank, and press the [Run] button to
validate the ink tanks. (Page 329)
25. Install the new ink tanks. (Page 207)
26. Install the chip units, and then pour ink into the ink tanks.
30. Select Initial ink charge.
Select the corresponding color rows, and press the [Run] button to perform the
initial ink charge. (Page 334)
31. Select Nozzle Check.
Select Nozzle Check Pattern Print, and press the [Run] button to perform the
nozzle check. (Page 311)
32. Perform cleaning if necessary. (Page 313)
33. If the error persists, replace the Print Head.

2.5 Trouble on Paper Feeding

This section describes the possible troubles on paper feeding and their causes and remedies.
Table 2-6. Trouble on Paper Feeding

Improper PE Sensor adjustment --- Perform the Rear AD Adjustment. (Page 358)
Paper is not fed into the printer properly. Does the PE Sensor work normally? Check it using the
PE Sensor failure Replace the PE Sensor. (Page 224)
Service Program.
1. Clean the PF Scale.
1. Is the PF Scale damaged or contaminated?
2. Reinstall the PF Scale and PF Encoder.
PF Scale or PF Encoder failure 2. Is the PF Scale attached properly?
3. Replace the PF Scale (Page 216) and PF
3. Is the PF Encoder installed correctly?
Encoder (Page 215).
Paper feeding or paper ejecting is The tension of the PF Timing Belt is not Correct the tension of the PF Timing Belt. (Page
---
abnormal. proper. 338)
1. Is the suction setting proper?
 Suction setting failure 1. Make the suction setting properly.
2. Does the Suction fan work normally? Check it using the
 Suction fan failure 2. Replace the Suction fan.
Service Program.
PF rollers failure Are the PF rollers contaminated or damaged? Clean the rollers or replace them.
1. Perform the parallelism adjustment of the Roll
The Roll Unit or Reel Unit is not Unit or Reel Unit referring the Set Up Guide.
---
parallel. 2. If not improved, perform the After Heater
Positioning Check. (Page 360)
The Paper Skew Check function has Enable (select “ON”) the Paper Skew Check
---
been disabled. function.
The Paper Size Check function has Enable (select “ON”) the Media Size Check
---
Does the PW Sensor work normally? Check it using the
Paper is skewing. The PW Sensor is not working. Replace the PW Sensor. (Page 204)
Service Program.
The Roll Unit parallelism adjustment
--- Carry out the Roll Unit parallelism adjustment.
has not been made.
The Reel Unit parallelism adjustment
--- Carry out the Reel Unit parallelism adjustment.
has not been made.
Roll paper edge is attached to the take-
--- Attach the paper to the take-up reel correctly.
up reel at an angle.
The paper holddown plate is pressing Align the holes on the plate with the edges of
---
paper too strong. paper.
TROUBLE SHOOTING Trouble on Paper Feeding 68

Table 2-6. Trouble on Paper Feeding

Paper feed amount is not configured
--- Perform the Feed Adjustment. (Page 341)
correctly.
Enable (select “ON”) the Media Size Check
The Media Size Check function has
--- function. (The printer is not capable of precisely
Actual margins differ from the specified been disabled.
correcting less than 2 mm differences.)
margins.
The Media End Check function has Enable (select “ON”) the Media End Check
---
The Tension Check function has been
--- Set the Tension Check function to other than OFF.
set to OFF.
Make either one or both of the following settings.
Roll paper whose end edge is secured to  Set the Tension Check function to other than
the core was used with the Tension --- OFF.
Check function set to OFF.  Enable (select “ON”) the Media End Check
The end of Roll paper is not detected and function.
paper falls. Make either one or both of the following settings.
The Tension Check function has been  Set the Tension Check function to other than
set to OFF with the Media End Check --- OFF.
function disabled.  Enable (select “ON”) the Media End Check
function.
Roll paper is reeled off at a slant, or the Perform the Parallel adjustment of the Auto Take-
The Media Guide Bar is not parallel. ---
reeled-off paper gets wrinkled. up Reel Unit referring the User’s guide.
The tensioner has become distorted for
Roll paper is reeled off at a slant, or the
some reason. (It can be distorted if --- Replace the Reel Unit. (Page 245)
reeled-off paper gets wrinkled.
excessive force is applied.)
“Media Set Error” occurs. PW Sensor is contaminated. Is the PW Sensor contaminated? Clean the PW Sensor. (Page 375)
“Take-up Error” occurs even though Media The Gear at Mounting Plate Assy is
Is the Gear at Mounting Plate Assy broken? Replace the Mounting Plate Assy.
is set to Reel normally. broken.
TROUBLE SHOOTING Trouble on Paper Feeding 69

2.6 Other Troubles

Table 2-7. Other Troubles
The power cable is unplugged Is the power plug connected properly? Connect it properly.
Is the electrical outlet overloaded sharing with any other Use one electrical outlet for the printer only if
The power voltage is unstable.
electric equipment? possible.
Connection failure of the Power Supply Is there any problems in the connection between the PSH
Correct the problem.
Board Board (CN51) and the Main Board (CN700)?
The printer is not powered.
Connection failure of the Control Panel Is there any problems in the connection between the
Correct the problem.
Board Control Panel Board (CN1) and the Main Board (CN13)?
If any of the remedies above does not help, replace the following parts one by one.
 AC inlet
 Power Supply Board (Page 125)
A wrong type of network cable is used. Is a crossing cable used as the network cable? Replace the cable with a straight cable.
Is there any abnormalities observed on the cable?
 Are the connectors firmly inserted?
Network cable failure  Is the cable breaking? Correct the problem.
 Is the cable being bent or is there anything placed on the
cable?
Cannot access to a network. LAN connector failure Is the connector deformed or damaged? Replace the Main-B Board. (Page 124)
Rewrite the address with a correct one. (Page
The MAC address is invalid. ---
344)
Is there any problems in the connection between the Main-
Connection failure of the Main-B Board B Board (CN700/CN701) and the Main Board (CN15/ Correct the problem.
CN5)?
If any of the remedies above does not help, replace the Main-B Board. (Page 124)
TROUBLE SHOOTING Other Troubles 70

Table 2-7. Other Troubles

The tension of the CR Timing Belt is Correct the tension of the CR Timing Belt. (Page
---
not proper. 297)
Lubrication of the CR Unit and CR Does the CR Unit move smoothly? Check it by pulling the
If the unit does not move smoothly, lubricate it.
shaft is insufficient. CR Timing Belt.
1. Clean the CR Scale.
The printer makes a strange noise when the 1. Is the CR Scale damaged or contaminated?
2. Reinstall the CR Scale and CR Encoder.
CR is moving. CR Scale or CR Encoder failure 2. Is the CR Scale attached properly?
3. Replace the CR Scale (Page 157) and CR
3. Is the CR Encoder installed correctly?
Encoder (Page 166).
Unexpected tension was applied to the
Is the resin film on the CR FFC attached properly? Attach the resin film properly.
tubes.
If any of the remedies above does not help, replace the CR Motor. (Page 161)
The power cable of the After Heater is
After Heater power failure occurs --- Connect the power cable of the After Heater.
not connected.
1. Make the following settings.
1. Is the heater setting appropriate in the ambient
It takes a longer time to warm up the It takes 10 minutes or longer until the  Raise the ambient temperature.
temperature?
heater. heater temperature reaches.  Turn the heater temperature setting down.
2. Is the thermistor detached from the plate?
2. Screw the thermistor on the plate.
The power cable of the Drying Fan Unit
Does the Drying Fan icon appear on the panel display? Connect the power cable of the Drying Fan Unit.
is not connected.
The Drying Fan does not work when The Drying Fan Unit is not connected
Does the Drying Fan icon appear on the panel display? Connect the Drying Fan Unit to the printer.
printing. to the printer.
The Drying Fan function has been Does the Drying Fan icon (ON) appear on the panel
Enable (select “ON”) the Drying Fan function.
disabled with the panel setting. display?

2.6.1 Ink End Error REMEDY

Ink End Error (“Refill Ink Tank.”) occurs even sufficient ink remains in the ink tank 1. Turn on the printer.
(Remaining ink level is 70 mm or more from the bottom of the Ink Tank).
Table 2-8. Ink End Error
Cause Remedy
Foreign material came in from the spout of the
ink tank, and it caused filter clogging inside Replace the ink tank with a new one. Discard Turn on the printer while pressing [Menu] + [Back] + [OK].
the ink tank and blocked ink flow, then Ink the old tank and the ink inside the tank. 5. Remove the ink tank in which wrong ink was filled and the other ink tank of the
End Error occurred.
corresponding color combination given below. (Page 207)
Check the detection condition of ILS from
Sensor Check in the Serviceman Mode.
C H E C K Due to the structure of this printer, you cannot replace only one
Installation of the ink tank is not appropriate, OFF: ILS is detected. P O IN T tank. Therefore, replacement of the tanks should be made
so ILS cannot be detected correctly. ON: ILS is not detected correctly. according to the combinations below.
If ON is displayed, re-install the corresponding • BK and M
ink tank.
• Y and C
2.6.2 Wrong ink mixture error 6. Lower the lock levers.
If wrong color ink is filled in an ink tank during filling ink, carry out the procedure 7. Start the service program and select Resolution of mixing ink error from
below. ADJUSTMENT (Sequence).
REQUIRED TOOL Select the corresponding color rows, and press the [Run] button to carry out the
 Cleaning cartridges (CL14) (2 to 4 pcs) ink eject. (Page 332)
 New ink tanks (2 to 4 pcs) 9. Select Activation of Cleaning Cartridge.

Select the corresponding color rows, and press the [Run] button to validate the
 New chip unit (for 2 to 4 colors. See below for which colors should be prepared.) cleaning cartridge. (See P.331)
P O IN T tank. Therefore, replacement of the tanks should be made 11. Install the cleaning cartridges. (Page 207)
according to the combinations below.
• BK and M
• Y and C 13. Turn on the printer.


Select the corresponding color rows, and press the [Run] button to fill the cleaning
liquid. (Page 333)
17. Remove the cleaning cartridges.
Select the corresponding color rows, and press the [Run] button to eject the
cleaning liquid. (Page 332)
Select the corresponding color rows and Ink tank, and press the [Run] button to Figure 2-1. [Time stamp of the resolution date (Mixing ink error)] screen
validate the ink tanks. (Page 329)
25. Install the chip units, and then pour ink into the ink tanks.
Select the corresponding color rows, and press the [Run] button to perform the
initial ink charge. (Page 334)
nozzle check. (Page 311)
31. Select Time stamp of the resolution date (Mixing ink error).
Click [Run] button.

2.7 Trouble on Service Program

This section describes possible troubles on Service Program and their causes and remedies.
Table 2-9. Troubles on Service Program

Are you running the program on the following operating
systems? Run the program on the supported operating
The operating system is not supported.
 Supported OS: Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows systems.
8/8.1
The printer is not connected to the Is there any problem with the connection between the
Connect them properly.
computer properly. printer and computer?
Service Program does not start If the program still does not start, the program files
There is something wrong with the Try with another computer. Does the program start
may be broken. Download the set of program files
program file. normally?
again.
Did you get the program through the official channel?
Registration information of the program Download the program file including security files
Check it with the license agreement displayed at the start-
is wrong. through the official channel.
up screen.
More than one printers are connected to Is there any printer connected to the USB port on the Disconnect the printer which is not necessary for
the computer. computer other than the one for adjustment? the adjustment.
 The printer is turned off.
1. Is the printer powered on? 1. Turn the printer on.
 The printer is in a status that cannot
The printer does not react to the program 2. Is there any error occurring on the printer? 2. Correct the printer errors.
accept the program command.
command.
After the USB ID is changed, the 1. Is the printer powered on?
Select the printer (USB port) correctly.
printer has not been reselected. 2. Is there any error occurring on the printer?
The printer is connected with a USB
MAC address cannot be set. --- Connect the printer with a network cable.
cable.
The selected adjustment does not
“Media is feeding” error require printing, but paper is loaded on --- Remove the paper from the printer.
the printer.
TROUBLE SHOOTING Trouble on Service Program 74

2.8 Trouble on NVRAM Viewer

This section describes possible troubles on NVRAM Viewer and their causes and remedies.
Table 2-10. Trouble on NVRAM Viewer

The contents and the items displayed in the
The Service Program you are running is
NVRAM Viewer do not match with each Are you running the Service Program for this product? Use the proper Service Program for this product.
different one.
other.
History of the error and the counter
Click the “Send as CSV” button on the lower right
History of the error and the counter reset reset are shown only as a CSV file. It
--- NVRAM Viewer screen to output the CSV file.
are not displayed on the NVRAM Viewer. will not be shown in the Viewer,
These histories are recorded in this file.
because they have too many items.
TROUBLE SHOOTING Trouble on NVRAM Viewer 75

CHAPTER
3
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY

SC-F9200 Series Revision B
3.1 Overview 3.1.1 Precautions

Before starting the disassembly or reassembly of the product, read the following
This chapter describes procedures for disassembling the main components of SC-
precautions given under the headings “WARNING” and “CAUTION”.
F9200 Series.
Be sure to follow the procedure described in this chapter when disassembling the unit. W A R N IN G  When the Front Cover is opened, the CR Motor and the PF
Unless otherwise specified, disassembled units or components can be reassembled by Motor are stopped by the safety-interlock mechanism. When
reversing the disassembly procedure. you need to work with the safety-interlock disabled, be
extremely careful to ensure your safety, and make sure to turn
 WARNING the safety-interlock back on when finished.
Procedures which, if not strictly observed, could result in personal injury are  This printer is equipped with a lithium battery. Observe the
described under the heading “WARNING”. following cautions in the handling of the battery.
 CAUTION • When replacing the battery, replace it only with a specified
“CAUTION” signals a precaution which, if ignored, could result in damage to type of battery. Using a different type of battery may cause
equipment. excess heat or explosion. Recommended battery: CR2032
(Sony)
 CHECK POINT
• Dispose of used batteries according to manufacture’s
Important tips for procedures are described under the heading “CHECK POINT”.
instructions and local regulations. Contact your local
 REASSEMBLY government agency for information about battery disposal
If the assembly procedure is different from the reversed disassembly procedure, and recycling.
the correct procedure is described under the heading “REASSEMBLY”. • When disposing of the battery, be sure to securely cover its
(+) end with tape to prevent combustion or explosion.
 ADJUSTMENT
• Do not recharge the battery.
Any adjustments required after reassembly of components or parts are described
under the heading “ADJUSTMENT”. Be sure to perform the specified • Do not use the battery if it is discolored or damaged, or if
adjustments with reference to Chapter 4 “ADJUSTMENT”. any leakage of electrolyte is observed.
• Do not dismantle, solder or heat the battery. Doing so could
 LUBRICATION result in leakage of electrolyte, heat generation, or
“LUBRICATION” signals that the part needs to be lubricated when replacing or explosion.
maintaining it after disassembling. • Do not heat the battery or dispose of it in fire.
• If the electrolyte leaked from the battery contacts with
your skin or gets into your eyes, wash it off with clean
water and see a physician immediately.
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY Overview 77

W A R N IN G  The power switch for this printer is installed on the secondary C A U T IO N  Locate the printer on a stable and flat surface.
side of the power circuit; therefore, the power is always  Use only recommended tools for disassembly, assembly or
supplied unless the power cable is unplugged. To prevent adjustment of the printer.
electric shock and circuit damage during servicing, make sure  Apply lubricants and adhesives as specified.
to follow the instructions below.  Be careful not to soil the printer or the floor with the leaked ink
• Before removing a circuit board, make sure to unplug the when removing the ink-path-related components or parts.
power cable from the AC outlet. Then press the power Spread a sheet of paper or cloth on the floor in advance.
button on the operating panel to confirm that the LEDs go  Do not touch electrical circuit boards with bare hands as the
on and off. This operation discharges the residual charge in elements on the board are so sensitive that they can be easily
the printer. damaged by static electricity. If you have to handle the boards
• Make sure not to place the removed circuit boards on the with bare hands, use static electricity discharge equipment such
metal and such directly. as anti-static wrist straps.
 Always wear gloves for disassembly and reassembly to avoid  When the printer has to be operated with the covers removed,
injury from sharp metal edges. take extra care not to get your fingers or clothes caught in
 If ink gets in your eye, flush the eye with fresh water and see a moving parts.
doctor immediately.  When you have to remove any parts or components that are
 Never touch the ink or wasted ink with bare hands. If ink comes provided as after-service-parts but are not described in this
into contact with your skin, wash it off with soap and water chapter, carefully observe how they are installed and make
immediately. If irritation occurs, contact a physician. sure to remember it before removing them.
 When replacing the Main Board, Power Supply Board, or  Disassembling the frame and the PF shaft of the printer is
Power harnesses and such, make sure to visually check if any prohibited because they are assembled with precise
harness is caught in between or any wrong connection exists. measurements in 1/100 mm unit at the factory.

3.1.2 Cautions After Assembling 3.1.3 Orientation Definition

 The ink-path-related components or parts should be firmly and The terms used for indicating the orientation/direction throughout this chapter are as
C A U T IO N
securely reinstalled on the printer to prevent the ink from follows.
leakage.
 When reassembling the printer, make sure to connect the Up
connectors of the electric components or parts correctly and
securely. Use extreme care when connecting FFCs (flexible flat
cables). Improper connection of the FFCs, such as inserting
them diagonally into the connectors, could cause short-
circuiting and lead to breakdown of the electric elements on the
boards. Rear
 When reassembling the printer, make sure to route the FFCs Left
and other cables as specified in this chapter. Failure to do so
may cause an unexpected contact of the cables with sharp metal
edges, or lead to lower the noise immunity.
 When you removed any parts (especially cables) that are
secured with acetate tape or two-sided tape, be sure to reinstall
and secure them with the tape as exactly the same as they were.
Right
Front
Down
Figure 3-1. Orientation Definition

3.1.4 Recommended Tools Table 3-1. Tools

Name Description Target Part
To protect this product from damage, use the tools indicated in the following table.
For the tools required to perform the adjustment, refer to “Tools/Consumables for Precision Screwdriver Nothing in particular  PF Roller Center Support
Adjustments” in Chapter 4. Long nose pliers Nothing in particular  PF Roller Center Support
Table 3-1. Tools

Name Description Target Part
4 cm or longer shaft length (The
 Print Head
Phillips screwdriver, No. 1 one with a magnet is
 Some encoders/sensors
recommended)
28 cm or longer shaft length (The
one with a magnet is Parts in general
recommended)
Phillips screwdriver, No. 2
Stubby driver with 4 cm or shorter
 APG Unit
shaft length (The one with a
 Ink Tank/Cartridge
magnet is recommended)
Short type with a 20-mm or shorter
Ratchet screwdriver  Driven Roller Gear
head
Tweezers Nothing in particular Parts in general
C-ring pliers To remove C-rings (φ25). Roll Paper Holder
To secure the cable/harness, or for Parts in general (Use this tape
Acetate tape the protection against the sharp when it is removed or when
edge replacing the part)
 Ink Tube
 Ink Holder
To prevent staining the printer  Flushing Box
Waste cloth
with ink during operation  Duct CR
 Print Head
 Pump Cap Unit
Recommend the below for insure
accuracy
Rule Scale  SHINWA Round End Stainless Parts in general
Rule : 1m
Item code : 13048(21108)
Recommend the below for insure
L-shaped Offset accuracy  PF Roller Center Support
Screwdriver
 VESSEL No.TD-61

3.2 Parts Diagram
 Left Rear Cover (p. 110)  Left Upper Cover (p. 111)
 Upper Cover (p. 116)
 Left Cover (p. 114)
 Panel Unit (p. 101)

 Left Lower Cover (p. 115)
 Right Upper Cover (p. 103)
 Left Front Cover (p. 113)

 Board Box Cover (p. 117)
 Right Cover (p. 108)
 Lower Ink Holder  Right Lower Cover (p. 109)

(p. 106)
 Right Front Cover (p. 107)
Figure 3-2. Housing
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY Parts Diagram 81

 Front Cover L Sensor (p. 122)

Detects the Open/Closed status of the Front Cover.
 Front Cover R Sensor (p. 120)

Detects the Open/Closed status of the Front Cover.
 R Maintenance Cover Sensor (p. 118)

Detects the Open/Closed status of the Right
Maintenance Cover.
 L Maintenance Cover Sensor (p. 113)

Detects the Open/Closed status of the Left
Maintenance Cover.
Figure 3-3. Housing

 Sub-D Board (p. 132)

Relays the connection between the Main
Board and the Print Head.
 Sub-E Board (p. 133)
Controls heaters.
 Sub Board (p. 131)
Relays the connection between the Main Board and
electric parts/components. See “6.1 Block Wiring  PF Motor Cooling Fan
Diagram (p390)” for specific connections to the (p. 214)
concerning parts/components.
 CR Motor Cooling Fan

(p. 163)
 Sub-M Board (p. 134)  Box Cooling Fan (p. 135)

Relays the connection between the Cools the air inside the Power Supply
Main Board and the CR Motor. Board Box.
 Main Board (p. 123)
• Communicates with the computer.
• Processes received data.
 Main-B Board (p. 124) • Controls the printer mechanism.
Communicates across a network. • Stores the correction values and various counters.
 Power Supply Board Cooling Fan (p. 137)
 PSH Board/PSH-B Board (p. 125)

Generates the DC voltage for this printer from the AC power supply.
Figure 3-4. Electric Circuit Components

 PW Sensor (p. 204)

Detects the width of paper on the
 Duct CR (p. 140) platen. This is a reflective photo
interrupter and detects the difference of
the amount of reflection between paper
(white) and the platen (black).
 IM Sensor (p. 206)

Reads print patterns in the following
adjustments.
• Head Slant Auto Adjustment (PF
direction)
 CR Encoder (p. 166)
Detects the pattern of the CR Scale to control
the position of the CR Unit.
 Print Head 1 (p144)

 CR Scale (p. 157)
 Print Head 2 (p144)
 PG HP Sensor (p. 169)
Detects the origin position of the
platen gap.
 CR Timing Belt (p. 159)
 CR Cover (p. 139)
 CR Unit (p. 200)

 Head FFC (p. 150) (x4)
 APG Motor (p. 167)
 CR Motor (p. 161)  CR HP Sensor (p. 164)  CR FFC (p. 155)  Head Relay FFC (p. 153) (x4)
The motor to drive the CR Unit. Detects the home position of the CR Unit.
Figure 3-5. Carriage Mechanism

 Wiper Cleaner (p. 100)  Wiper (p. 100)

 Ink Tube (p. 196) Wipes off ink attached on the Wiper. Cleans the nozzle surface of the Print Head.
 Pump Cap Unit 1 (p. 170)
Includes the wiper section
and the sucking section,
flushing section and
maintains the Print Head.

Includes the wiper section and the
sucking section, and maintains the
Print Head.
 Ink Holder 1 (p. 183)

Stores ink cartridges and includes the following
 Ink Holder 2 (p. 189) mechanism and parts.
Composed of the parts and mechanism • Pressure mechanism (Sensor/Motor)
equivalent to Ink Holder 1. • Ink Level Sensor
• LED
• Cartridge Cover Sensor
 Ink Tank (p207) • SUB-G Board
Figure 3-6. Ink System Mechanism

 Print Head 1 (p. 144)
 Print Head 2 (p. 144)
Caution: The positions of the IC Holder 1 and

2 are the opposite to the other parts.
Figure 3-7. Ink System Mechanism

 Media Loading Lever (p. 210)
 Media Loading Lever Sensor (p. 211)

Detects the position of the Media Loading Lever.
 Driven Roller Assy (p. 218)
 PF Roller Center Support (p. 227)
 PF Motor (p. 213)

The motor to drive the Feed Roller.
 PF Timing Belt (p. 217)
 Driven Roller Gear (p. 225)
 PE Sensor (p. 224)

Detects the loaded media.
 Suction Fan (p. 221)

Sucks paper to the platen so as to stabilize
the position of paper when printing.
 PF Scale (p. 216)
 PF Encoder (p. 215)

Detects the PF Scale pattern to control the
paper feeding (operation of the PF Motor).
Figure 3-8. Paper Feed Mechanism

 After Heater (p. 233)

Heats paper to dry ink after printing.
 Cooling Fan (p. 235)

Cools the inside of the After Heater Box.
Figure 3-9. Heater Mechanism

 Roll Paper Holder (p. 238)
 Roll Receiver Assy (p. 237)
 Roll Unit (p. 236)
 Sub-F Board (Roll) (p. 239)

 ATC Motor (p. 241)
Relays the connection between the Main Board and the Roll
Feeds forward (normal rotation) and rewinds (reverse Unit. See “6.1 Block Wiring Diagram (p390)” for specific
rotation) the roll paper to generate back tension. connections to the concerning parts/components.
* ATC: Auto Tension Control
Figure 3-10. Roll Unit

 Media Guide Bar (p. 244)
 Reel Motor and Mounting

Plate Assy (p. 249)
Rewinds the media.
 Roll Paper Holder (p. 246)
 Reel Unit (p. 245)
 Sub-F Board (Reel) (p. 247)

Relays the connection between the Main Board and the
Reel Unit. See “6.1 Block Wiring Diagram (p390)” for
specific connections to the concerning parts/components.
Figure 3-11. Reel Unit

 Drying Fan Cover (p. 254)
 Drying Fan Power Supply Board (p. 256)

Generates the DC voltage for the Drying Fan Unit from the AC power supply.
 Sub-I Board (p. 255)

Relays the connection between the Main Board and the Drying
Fan Unit. See “6.1 Block Wiring Diagram (p390)” for specific
connections to the concerning parts/components.
 Drying Fan Unit (p. 252)
 Drying Fan (p. 257)

Drys up the printed media.
Figure 3-12. Additional Drying Fan Unit (Option)

3.3 Disassembly Flowchart

CONSUMABLES/ACCESSORIES
Start
“3.4.1.1 Unlocking the CR Unit”

(p98) “3.4.2.1 Wiper” (p100) “3.4.2.2 Wiper Cleaner” (p100)
HOUSING
Start
“3.4.6.1 Media Loading Lever” “3.4.3.13 Board Box Cover” (p117) “3.4.3.1 Panel Unit” (p101) “3.4.5.24 Ink Tank/Cartridge” “3.4.3.7 Left Rear Cover” (p110)
(p210) (p207)
“3.4.3.1 Panel Unit” (p101) “3.4.3.1 Panel Unit” (p101) “3.4.3.3 Lower Ink Holder” (p106) “3.4.3.8 Left Upper Cover” (p111)
“3.4.3.2 Right Upper Cover” “3.4.3.2 Right Upper Cover” “3.4.3.9 Left Front Cover/L “3.4.3.10 Left Cover” (p114)
Maintenance Cover Sensor” (p113)
“3.4.5.24 Ink Tank/Cartridge” “3.4.3.13 Board Box Cover” (p117) “3.4.3.5 Right Cover” (p108) “3.4.3.7 Left Rear Cover” (p110) “3.4.3.10 Left Cover” (p114) “3.4.3.16 Front Cover L Sensor”
(p207) (p122)
“3.4.3.3 Lower Ink Holder” (p106) “3.4.3.14 R Maintenance Cover “3.4.3.15 Front Cover R Sensor” “3.4.3.8 Left Upper Cover” (p111) “3.4.3.11 Left Lower Cover” (p115)
Sensor” (p118) (p120)
“3.4.3.4 Right Front Cover” (p107) “3.4.3.12 Upper Cover” (p116)
“3.4.3.5 Right Cover” (p108)
“3.4.3.6 Right Lower Cover”

(p109)
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY Disassembly Flowchart 92

ELECTRIC CIRCUIT COMPONENTS
Start
“3.4.6.1 Media Loading Lever” “3.4.7.1 After Heater” (p233) “3.4.1.1 Unlocking the CR Unit” “3.4.3.13 Board Box Cover” (p117)
(p210) (p98)
“3.4.3.1 Panel Unit” (p101) “3.4.3.2 Right Upper Cover” “3.4.4.6 Sub-E Board” (p133) “3.4.3.7 Left Rear Cover” (p110) “3.4.4.3 PSH Board/PSH-B “3.4.4.9 Power Supply Board
“3.4.4.2 Main-B Board” (p124) Board” (p125) Cooling Fan” (p137)
“3.4.3.2 Right Upper Cover” “3.4.3.5 Right Cover” (p108) “3.4.3.13 Board Box Cover” (p117) “3.4.3.8 Left Upper Cover” (p111) “3.4.4.1 Main Board” (p123)
“3.4.3.7 Left Rear Cover” (p110) “3.4.4.7 Sub-M Board” (p134) “3.4.4.8 Box Cooling Fan” (p135) “3.4.5.1 CR Cover” (p139)
“3.4.3.8 Left Upper Cover” (p111) “3.4.4.4 Sub Board” (p131)
“3.4.3.12 Upper Cover” (p116)
“3.4.4.5 Sub-D Board” (p132)

CARRIAGE MECHANISM
Start
“3.4.6.1 Media Loading Lever” “3.4.1.1 Unlocking the CR Unit”

(p210) (p98)
“3.4.3.1 Panel Unit” (p101) “3.4.3.2 Right Upper Cover” “3.4.6.1 Media Loading Lever” “3.4.2.2 Wiper Cleaner” (p100) “3.4.6.1 Media Loading Lever” “3.4.3.7 Left Rear Cover” (p110) “3.4.5.7 CR Scale” (p157)
(p210) (p210)
“3.4.3.2 Right Upper Cover” “3.4.5.13 APG Motor” (p167) “3.4.3.2 Right Upper Cover” “3.4.6.1 Media Loading Lever” “3.4.3.2 Right Upper Cover” “3.4.3.8 Left Upper Cover” (p111)
(p210)
“3.4.3.7 Left Rear Cover” (p110) “3.4.5.10 CR Motor Cooling Fan” “3.4.5.11 CR HP Sensor” (p164) “3.4.3.2 Right Upper Cover” “3.4.3.7 Left Rear Cover” (p110) “3.4.5.1 CR Cover” (p139)
(p163)
“3.4.3.8 Left Upper Cover” (p111) “3.4.3.5 Right Cover” (p108) “3.4.3.8 Left Upper Cover” (p111) “3.4.5.2 Duct CR” (p140) “3.4.5.22 PW Sensor” (p204)
“3.4.3.12 Upper Cover” (p116) “3.4.3.7 Left Rear Cover” (p110) “3.4.3.10 Left Cover” (p114) “3.4.5.3 Print Head” (p144) “3.4.5.23 IM Sensor” (p206)
“3.4.5.1 CR Cover” (p139) “3.4.3.13 Board Box Cover” (p117) “3.4.3.8 Left Upper Cover” (p111) “3.4.5.13 APG Motor” (p167)
“3.4.5.2 Duct CR” (p140) “3.4.5.5 Head Relay FFC” (p153) “3.4.3.10 Left Cover” (p114) “3.4.5.9 CR Motor” (p161)
“3.4.5.3 Print Head” (p144) “3.4.5.13 APG Motor” (p167) “3.4.5.7 CR Scale” (p157)
“3.4.5.4 Head FFC” (p150) “3.4.5.9 CR Motor” (p161) “3.4.5.20 CR Unit” (p200)
“3.4.3.13 Board Box Cover” (p117) “3.4.5.1 CR Cover” (p139) “3.4.5.12 CR Encoder” (p166) “3.4.5.8 CR Timing Belt” (p159) “3.4.5.14 PG HP Sensor” (p169)
“3.4.5.6 CR FFC” (p155) “3.4.5.2 Duct CR” (p140)
“3.4.5.3 Print Head” (p144)

INK SYSTEM MECHANISM
Start
“3.4.5.24 Ink Tank/Cartridge” “3.4.1.1 Unlocking the CR Unit”

(p207) (p98)
“3.4.6.1 Media Loading Lever” “3.4.6.1 Media Loading Lever”

(p210) (p210)
“3.4.3.1 Panel Unit” (p101) “3.4.3.1 Panel Unit” (p101)
“3.4.3.2 Right Upper Cover” “3.4.3.2 Right Upper Cover”
“3.4.3.3 Lower Ink Holder” (p106) “3.4.3.7 Left Rear Cover” (p110) “3.4.3.5 Right Cover” (p108)
“3.4.5.15 Pump Cap Unit 1” (p170)

“3.4.3.4 Right Front Cover” (p107) “3.4.3.8 Left Upper Cover” (p111)
“3.4.5.16 Pump Cap Unit 2” (p177)
“3.4.3.5 Right Cover” (p108) “3.4.3.12 Upper Cover” (p116)
“3.4.3.13 Board Box Cover” (p117) “3.4.5.1 CR Cover” (p139)
“3.4.5.17 Ink Holder 1” (p183)

“3.4.5.19 Ink Tube” (p196)
“3.4.5.18 Ink Holder 2” (p189)

PAPER FEED MECHANISM / HEATER MECHANISM
Start
“3.4.6.1 Media Loading Lever” “3.4.3.7 Left Rear Cover” (p110) “3.4.6.2 Media Loading Lever “3.4.6.8 Driven Roller Assy” “3.4.7.1 After Heater” (p233) “3.4.6.10 PE Sensor” (p224)
(p210) Sensor” (p211) (p218)
“3.4.3.8 Left Upper Cover” (p111) “3.4.3.3 Lower Ink Holder” (p106)
“3.4.7.2 Cooling Fan” (p235) “3.4.7.1 After Heater” (p233) “3.4.6.12 PF Roller Center
Support” (p227)
“3.4.3.10 Left Cover” (p114) “3.4.6.9 Suction Fan” (p221) “3.4.3.3 Lower Ink Holder” (p106)
“3.4.6.3 PF Motor” (p213) “3.4.6.5 PF Encoder” (p215) “3.4.6.7 PF Timing Belt” (p217) “3.4.6.4 PF Motor Cooling Fan” “3.4.7.2 Cooling Fan” (p235)
(p214)
“3.4.6.6 PF Scale” (p216)
ROLL UNIT
Start
“3.4.8.1 Roll Unit” (p236) “3.4.8.2 Roll Receiver Assy” (p237) “3.4.8.3 Roll Paper Holder” (p238)
“3.4.8.4 Sub-F Board (Roll)” “3.4.8.5 ATC Motor” (p241)

(p239)

REEL UNIT
スタート
“3.4.9.2 Reel Unit” (p245) “3.4.9.3 Roll Paper Holder” (p246) “3.4.9.1 Media Guide Bar” (p244)
“3.4.9.4 Sub-F Board (Reel)” “3.4.9.5 Reel Motor and Mounting

(p247)
ADDITIONAL DRYING FAN UNIT
Start
“3.4.10.1 Drying Fan Unit” (p252)
“3.4.10.2 Drying Fan Cover”

(p254)
“3.4.10.3 Sub-I Board” (p255) “3.4.10.4 Drying Fan Power “3.4.10.5 Drying Fan” (p257)
Supply Board” (p256)

3.4 Disassembly and Assembly Procedure  Manual
1. Remove the Right Maintenance Cover.

This section describes procedures for disassembling the components allowed to be
disassembled. Unless otherwise specified, disassembled units or components can be 2. Remove the screw, and remove the cover.
reassembled by reversing the disassembly procedure. A) Silver M3x8 P-tite screw with captive washer: 1 pcs
3. Insert a screwdriver into the hole shown as “Insert driver (A)” in the figure.
3.4.1 Preparation for Servicing
4. While viewing the CR Lock Lever status from the front of the printer, turn the
3.4.1.1 Unlocking the CR Unit screwdriver counterclockwise until the CR Lock Lever moves to the CR unlocked
position.
C A U T IO N When you have unlocked the CR Unit and finished your
5. The CR Lock Lever is lowered. Check that the lever reaches the CR unlock
reassembly work, move the CR Unit (Print Head) over the platen
and turn the printer on to let it perform the initialization sequence. position, and stop turning the white shaft.
(By this sequence, the CR Unit is locked and Print Head is capped.)
If the initialization is performed on or over the Cap, the Print Head C A U T IO N Do not turn the screwdriver clockwise.
may be damaged.
C H E C K  When the CR is unlocked, it clicks.

P O IN T  Use a screwdriver with a 280 mm or longer shaft.
6. Insert a screwdriver into the hole shown as “Insert driver (B)” in the figure.
7. Move the CR Lock Lever to the CR unlocked position in the same way as step 4.
C A U T IO N Make sure to first unlock the carriage from the “Insert driver (A)”
hole. If you insert a screwdriver into the (B) hole first, it may result
in damaging the tubes inside the printer. Accessing from (A)
unlocks pump cap 2, and accessing from (B) unlocks pump cap 1.
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY Disassembly and Assembly Procedure 98

C A U T IO N
- Right side - No clock rotation!
Cover
Insert driver (B)
Insert driver (A)
CR Lock Lever
CR unlocked CR locked
(The Lever is lowered) (The lever is raised)
Figure 3-13. Unlocking the CR Unit

3.4.2 Consumables/Accessories 3.4.2.2 Wiper Cleaner

1. Turn the printer on.
3.4.2.1 Wiper
2. Press the [Menu] button, select Head Maintenance, and press the [OK] button.
1. Turn the printer on. The CR Unit moves to the left end.
2. Press the [Menu] button, select Head Maintenance, and press the [OK] button. 3. Open the Right Maintenance Cover.
The CR Unit moves to the left end.
4. Push the handle of the Wiper Cleaner to disengage the hook, and remove the
3. Open the Right Maintenance Cover.
Wiper Cleaner in the direction of the arrow.
4. Hold the Wiper with your hand and tilt it leftward to remove it.
Right Maintenance Cover
Wiper
Wiper Cleaner
Handle
Hook
Figure 3-14. Removing the Wiper Figure 3-15. Removing the Wiper Cleaner

3.4.3 Housing
3.4.3.1 Panel Unit
Right Upper Cover Tabs
2. Open the Front Cover. A
A
3. Remove the four screws that secure the Panel Unit.
Panel Unit Assy
A) Silver M4x10 P-tite screw with washer: 2 pcs
B) Silver M4x12 P-tite screw with washer: 2 pcs
4. Pull the left lower portion of the Panel Unit Assy toward you and remove it.
5. Disconnect the FFC from the connector of the Panel Board.
 Insert the two tabs of the Panel Unit into the two holes on the
Right Upper Cover.
 Insert the positioning hole of the Panel Unit over the dowel on
the main body. Front Cover
B
Step 4
Dowel FFC
Connector
Figure 3-16. Removing the Panel Unit Assy

6. Disconnect the FFC from the connector of the Panel Board.

7. Disengage the two hooks and separate the Panel Unit from the Panel Unit Assy.
FFC
Connector
Panel Unit
Panel Unit
Figure 3-18. Disassembled Panel Unit
Hooks
Figure 3-17. Removing the Panel Unit

3.4.3.2 Right Upper Cover 4. Remove the four screws, and remove the Board Right Frame.
1. Remove the Media Loading Lever. (p210) A) Silver M3x6 screw: 4 pcs
2. Remove the Panel Unit. (p101)

- Right side -
3. Push the Media Loading Lever Frame toward the rear of the printer to move the
lever to its release position.
A
Media Loading Lever Frame
A
Board Right Frame
Figure 3-19. Moving the Media Loading Lever Frame

Figure 3-20. Removing the Board Right Frame

5. Remove the seven screws that secure the Board Box, and slide the Board Box in
- Right rear side -
the direction of the arrow.
B) Silver M4x10 screw with washer: 6 pcs
C) Silver M3x6 screw: 1 pcs
C
- Right side - B
B
B
B
Board Box
Slide the box until this screw appears.
Figure 3-21. Sliding the Board Box
Figure 3-22. Sliding the Board Box

6. Remove the five screws that secure the Right Upper Cover.
- Right rear side - Right Upper Cover
D) Silver M4x12 P-tite screw with washer: 1 pcs
E) Silver M3x10 P-tite screw with washer: 1 pcs G
F) Silver M3x8 S-tite screw with washer: 1 pcs G

F
G) Silver M4x10 S-tite screw with washer: 2 pcs
E
D
Figure 3-24. Removing the Right Upper Cover
Figure 3-23. Removing the Right Upper Cover

3.4.3.3 Lower Ink Holder

1. Remove the Ink Tank. (p207)
2. Remove the two screws, and remove the Tray Support Frame.
Front
A)Silver M3x8 S-tite screw with built-in spring washer: 2 pcs
3. Remove the six screws, and remove the Lower Ink Holder. B
B)Silver M3x8 Cup S-tite screw: 6 pcs

B
B
A
B
A
Lower Ink Holder
Tray Support Frame
Figure 3-25. Removing the Lower Ink Holder

3.4.3.4 Right Front Cover

1. Remove the Media Loading Lever. (p210)
2. Remove the Panel Unit. (p101) - Right side -
R Maintenance
3. Remove the Right Upper Cover. (p103) Cover Sensor
Positioning hole and dowel
5. Remove the Lower Ink Holder. (p106)
6. Remove the screw, and remove the R Maintenance Cover Sensor.
B
A) Silver M3x10 P-tite screw with washer: 1 pcs A
Right Cover
7. Remove the six screws that secure the Right Front Cover. B
B) Silver M4x10 S-tite screw with washer: 5 pcs

C) Silver M4x12 S-tite screw with washer: 1 pcs
B Positioning hole and dowel
8. Disengage the upper portion of the Right Front Cover from the dowels on the main
body frame, and remove the Right Front Cover. C
 Insert the two tabs of the Right Front Cover into the two Tabs
positioning holes on the Right Cover.
B
 Align the two dowels of the frame with the two positioning
holes on the Right Front Cover.
Right Front Cover B
Figure 3-26. Removing the Right Front Cover

3.4.3.5 Right Cover

- Right side -
3. Remove the Right Upper Cover. (p103)
4. Remove the three screws, and remove the Right Cover.
B) Silver M4x12 S-tite screw with washer: 2 pcs
Right Cover
Right Front Cover B
Insert the two tabs of the Right Front Cover into the two
positioning holes on the Right Cover.
Tabs
Figure 3-27. Removing the Right Cover

3.4.3.6 Right Lower Cover

- Right side -
A
6. Remove the Right Front Cover. (p107)
A
7. Remove the Right Cover. (p108)
Right Lower Cover
8. Remove the three screws, and remove the Right Lower Cover sliding it toward the
rear of the printer.
A
Figure 3-28. Removing the Right Lower Cover

3.4.3.7 Left Rear Cover

- Left rear side -
Left Upper Cover
1. Remove the screw, and remove the Left Rear Cover in the direction of the arrow.
A) Silver M4x10 S-tite screw with washer: 1 pcs
Insert the three tabs of the Left Rear Cover into the three
positioning holes on the Left Upper Cover.
Tabs
Left Rear Cover
Figure 3-29. Removing the Left Rear Cover

3.4.3.8 Left Upper Cover 5. Open the Front Cover.
1. Remove the Left Rear Cover. (p110) 6. Open the Left Maintenance Cover.
2. Loosen the three screws (A) of the Left Rear Lower Cover. 7. Remove the four screws that secure the Left Upper Cover.
3. Remove the seven screws that secure the Left Rear Lower Cover. D) Silver M4x10 S-tite screw with washer: 2 pcs
B) Silver M4x12 P-tite screw with washer: 3 pcs E) Silver M4x12 P-tite screw with washer: 1 pcs
C) Silver M4x10 S-tite screw with washer: 4 pcs F) Silver M4x8 S-tite screw: 1 pcs
4. Remove the Left Rear Lower Cover in the direction of the arrow.
- Left rear side -
- Left rear side -
D
C
C
B
D
Left Rear Lower Cover

C
- Left front side -
A
A C
A
Figure 3-30. Removing the Left Rear Lower Cover

F
Figure 3-31. Left Upper Cover Fixing Screws

8. Holding the Front Cover upright, remove the Left Upper Cover pulling out its joint
part in the direction of the arrow.
Front Cover
Joint part
Left Upper Cover
Figure 3-32. Removing the Left Upper Cover

3.4.3.9 Left Front Cover/L Maintenance Cover Sensor 4. Remove the six screws that secure the Left Front Cover.
1. Remove the Left Rear Cover. (p110) B) Silver M4x10 S-tite screw with washer: 5 pcs
2. Remove the Left Upper Cover. (p111) C) Silver M4x12 P-tite screw with washer: 1 pcs
3. Remove the screw, and remove the L Maintenance Cover Sensor. At the next step, be careful not to pull the Left Front Cover too
C A U T IO N
A) Silver M3x10 P-tite screw with washer: 1 pcs much as the cable of the L Maintenance Cover Sensor is connected
to the relay connector.
5. Slide the Left Front Cover toward the front of the printer.
B 6. Disconnect the cable of the L Maintenance Cover Sensor from the relay connector.
C  Insert the two tabs of the Left Front Cover into the two
A
L Maintenance positioning holes on the Left Cover.
Cover Sensor  Insert the two dowels of the frame into the two positioning
B holes on the Left Front Cover.
B
Tabs
L Maintenance
Cover Sensor
Dowels
B
Left Front Cover
Figure 3-33. Left Front Cover/L Maintenance Cover Sensor Fixing Screws
Relay Connector
Figure 3-34. Removing the Left Front Cover

3.4.3.10 Left Cover Left Cover

- Left side -
1. Remove the Left Rear Cover. (p110)
C
2. Remove the Left Upper Cover. (p111)
3. Remove the three screws and slide the Left Cover toward the rear to remove it.
A
B) Silver M3x8 P-tite screw with washer: 1 pcs
Insert the two tabs of the Left Front Cover into the two positioning
holes on the Left Cover. Tabs
B Left Front Cover
Figure 3-35. Removing the Left Cover

3.4.3.11 Left Lower Cover

- Left side -
2. Remove the Left Upper Cover. (p111) Tab
3. Remove the Left Cover. (p114)
4. Remove the two screws, and remove the Left Lower Cover sliding it toward the A
rear of the printer.
Install the Left Lower Cover so that its tab comes on the main body
frame.
Left Lower Cover
Figure 3-36. Removing the Left Lower Cover

3.4.3.12 Upper Cover

- Rear side -
A A A A A
6. Remove the 13 screws, and remove the Upper Cover.
A) Silver M4x10 S-tite screw with washer: 5 pcs B
B B
B) Silver M4x8 S-tite screw with built-in washer: 8 pcs B
Align the positioning hole and the cutout of the Upper Cover with Upper Cover
the two dowels of the frame.
B
B
B B
Positioning hole
and dowel
Cutout and dowel
Figure 3-37. Removing the Upper Cover

3.4.3.13 Board Box Cover

- Right rear side -
1. Remove the eight screws that secure the Board Box Cover. A
A
A) Silver M3x6 screw: 8 pcs
A
2. Lift the Board Box Cover to remove it.
A
Board Box Cover A
Figure 3-38. Removing the Board Box Cover

3.4.3.14 R Maintenance Cover Sensor

1. Remove the Media Loading Lever. (p210) - Right upper side -
FFC Clamp
2. Remove the Panel Unit. (p101) R Maintenance Cover Sensor Cable
3. Remove the Right Upper Cover. (p103) FFC Clamps
4. Remove the Board Box Cover. (p117)

5. Disconnect the cable from the connector (CN272) on the Main Board.
6. Release the cable from the five clamps.
Clamps
7. Release the cable from the three FFC clamps.
Clamp
- Right rear side -

Clamp
Clamp
CN272
Main Board
Figure 3-39. Releasing the Cable

8. Remove the screw that secures the R Maintenance Cover Sensor.

- Right front side -
A) Silver M3x8 P-tite screw with built-in washer: 1 pcs
9. Pull out the cable through the three holes on the frame. Holes
10. Release the cable from the cable guide of the Right Front Cover, and remove the R
Maintenance Cover Sensor.
 When installing the R Maintenance Cover Sensor, properly

engage its two dowels and one hook with the three positioning
holes on the Right Front Cover. Hole
 Route the sensor cable through the cable guide correctly. Cable Guide
A
Dowel
Right Front Cover Hook

R Maintenance Cover
Sensor Cable
Dowel
R Maintenance Cover Sensor
Figure 3-40. Removing the R Maintenance Cover Sensor

3.4.3.15 Front Cover R Sensor

1. Remove the Media Loading Lever. (p210) - Right upper side -
FFC Clamp Front Cover R Sensor Cable
3. Remove the Right Upper Cover. (p103) FFC Clamps
6. Release the cable from the five clamps.
Clamps
7. Release the cable from the three FFC clamps.
Clamp
- Right rear side -

Clamp
Main Board
Clamp
CN271

8. Remove the screw that secures the mounting plate.

A) Silver M3x8 S-tite screw with built-in washer: 1 pcs
9. Lift the mounting plate to disengage the hook and remove the Front Cover R
Sensor together with the mounting plate.
 When installing the mounting plate, insert its positioning hole

over the dowel on the main body frame.
 Route the sensor cable through the cable guide correctly.
Positioning holes
and dowels
10. Remove the two screws, and remove the Front Cover R Sensor from the mounting
plate.
B) Silver M3x8 P-tite screw with washer: 2 pcs A
11. Pull out the cable through the holes on the frame, and remove the Front Cover R
Sensor. Front Cover R Sensor Mounting plate
Figure 3-42. Removing the Mounting Plate
Holes
Hook
Front Cover R Sensor
Figure 3-43. Removing the Front Cover R Sensor

3.4.3.16 Front Cover L Sensor 6. Remove the two screws that secure the Front Cover L Sensor.
1. Remove the Left Rear Cover. (p110) A) Silver M3x8 P-tite screw with washer: 2 pcs
2. Remove the Left Upper Cover. (p111) 7. Pull out the cable through the hole on the frame, and remove the Front Cover L
Sensor.
3. Remove the Left Front Cover. (p113)
4. Disconnect the cable from the relay connector.
5. Release the cable from the clamp.
Hole
Clamp
Relay connector
A
Front Cover L Sensor
Figure 3-45. Removing the Front Cover L Sensor
Route the sensor cable through the cable guide correctly.

3.4.4 Electric Circuit Components 4. Disconnect all cables and FFCs from the Main Board.
5. Remove the eight screws, and remove the Main Board.
3.4.4.1 Main Board
B) Silver M3x6 screw: 7 pcs
A D J U S T M E N T When replacing/removing this part, refer to “4.1.2 Adjustment C) Silver M3x6 screw (USB fixing screw): 1 pcs
R E Q U IR E D Items and the Order by Repaired Part” (p260) and make sure to
perform the specified operations including required adjustment.
- Right rear side - Main Board

1. Remove the Board Box Cover. (p117) B B
B
2. Disconnect the cables from the connectors (CN5, CN15) on the Main Board.
3. Remove the four screws, and remove the Main-B Board together with the
mounting plate.
- Right rear side - CN5 CN15

Main-B Board B B
A
A
C
B
B
CN204
CN202 CN270
Figure 3-47. Removing the Main Board
A A
Figure 3-46. Removing the Mounting Plate

3.4.4.2 Main-B Board

- Right rear side -
A D J U S T M E N T When replacing/removing this part, refer to “4.1.2 Adjustment

CN701
CN700
A

A
2. Disconnect the cables from the connectors (CN700, CN701) on the Main-B Board.
3. Remove the four screws, and remove the Main-B Board.
A
A
Main-B Board
Figure 3-48. Removing the Main-B Board

3.4.4.3 PSH Board/PSH-B Board 3. Remove the two screws, and remove the shield plate.
perform the specified operations including required adjustment. - Right side -
Always replace the two Power Supply Boards (PSH Board and B
C A U T IO N
PSH-B Board) at the same time.
Shield plate

2. Remove the four screws and remove the Board Right Frame.
B
- Right side - Power Supply
Board Box
Figure 3-50. Removing the shield plate
Board Right Frame
Figure 3-49. Removing the Board Right Frame

4. Disconnect the cables from the connectors (CN700/CN701/CN40) on the Main 6. Disconnect the connector of the Reel Unit.
Board.
7. Release the cable from the two clamps.
5. Release the cables disconnected from CN700 and CN701 and CN40 from the
8. Remove the five screws, and remove the Right Rear Cover.
clamp and pull them out of the Power Supply Board Box through the cutout.
Main Board D) Silver M3x6 screw: 1 pcs
CN40 - Right rear side -

C
CN700 CN701
Clamp
D
Right Rear Cover

Reel Unit connector
Clamps
Power Supply
Board Box
Figure 3-51. Releasing the cables C

C
Figure 3-52. Removing the Right Rear Cover

9. Disconnect and release the cables from relay connectors and from the two clamps. 10. Remove the five screws that secure the Power Supply Board Box.
E) Silver M4x10 S-tite screw with washer: 2 pcs
F) Silver M3x6 screw: 3 pcs
Clamp
11. Slide the Power Supply Board Box in the direction of the arrow, and remove it
toward the rear of the printer.
- Right rear side -
Power Supply
Relay connectors Clamp Board Box
F F
Figure 3-53. Releasing the Cables
E E
Figure 3-54. Removing the Power Supply Board Box

12. Release the cable from the clamp. 14. Release the cables from the two clamps of the Power Supply Board Box Cover.
13. Disconnect the cable from the connector (CN51) on the PSH Board. 15. Remove the five screws, and remove the PSH Box Cover.
G) Silver M3x6 screw: 5 pcs
Clamp
G
PSH Board
G
CN51
G Clamps
G
PSH Box Cover
Figure 3-55. Removing the Power Box Cover
Figure 3-56. Removing the PSH Box Cover

16. Disconnect the cable from the connector (CN1) on the PSH Board. 18. Remove the four screws, and remove the Shield plate (See Figure3-57).
17. Remove the six screws, and remove the PSH Board. I) Silver M3x6 screw: 4 pcs
H) Silver M3x6 screw: 6 pcs
I
Shield plate
H I
H H
H H
H
PSH Board CN1
Figure 3-57. Removing the PSH Board
Figure 3-58. Shield Plate Fixing Screws

C H E C K Leave the cables connected to the Shield plate, and move them out
P O IN T of the way to remove the PSH Board B at the next step.
19. Disconnect the cables from the connectors (CN1, CN2, and CN51) on the PSH-B
Board.
20. Remove the nine screws, and remove the PSH-B Board.
J) Silver M3x6 screw: 9 pcs
PSH-B Board
J J J J
CN51
CN1
J
J J J
CN2 Shield plate
Figure 3-59. Removing the PSH-B Board

3.4.4.4 Sub Board

- Upper side of the CR Unit -
1. Unlock the CR Unit. (p98)
3. Remove the Left Upper Cover. (p111) A Sub Board
4. Remove the CR Cover. (p139)
5. Disconnect all cables and FFCs from the Sub Board.
6. Remove the four screws, and remove the Sub Board. A
A
A) Silver M3x8 P-tite screw: 4 pcs
Figure 3-60. Removing the Sub Board

3.4.4.5 Sub-D Board 8. Disconnect all FFCs from the Sub-D Board.
1. Remove the Media Loading Lever. (p210) 9. Remove the four screws, and remove the Sub-D Board.
2. Remove the Panel Unit. (p101) A) Silver M3x8 S-tite screw: 4 pcs
3. Remove the Right Upper Cover. (p103) When installing the Sub-D Board, make sure to install it in the
4. Remove the Left Rear Cover. (p110) correct orientation as shown in Figure3-62.

6. Remove the Upper Cover. (p116)
7. Remove the pieces of acetate tape, and release the cover from the two hooks on the
frame.
Cover
Acetate tape Hook
A
Sub-D Board
Sub-D Board
Hook
A
Acetate tape
Rear Side
Figure 3-61. Removing the Cover A
Figure 3-62. Removing the Sub-D Board

3.4.4.6 Sub-E Board 3. Disconnect all cables from the Sub-E Board.
1. Remove the After Heater. (p233) 4. Remove the seven screws, and remove the Sub-E Board.
2. Remove the three screws, and remove the Sub-E Board Cover. B) Silver M3x8 S-tite screw: 7 pcs
A) Silver M3x8 S-tite screw: 3 pcs

Sub-E Board
When installing the Sub-E Board Cover, be careful not to let the
B B B
cables get caught between the Sub-E Board Cover and the main
body.
Sub-E Board Cover
A
B B B B
Figure 3-64. Removing the Sub-E Board
Figure 3-63. Removing the Sub-E Board Cover

3.4.4.7 Sub-M Board 5. Disconnect all cables connected to the Sub-M Board.
1. Remove the Media Loading Lever. (p210) 6. Remove the four screws, and remove the Sub-M Board.
2. Remove the Right Upper Cover. (p103) B) Silver M3x6 screw: 4 pcs

B B
4. Remove the two screws, and remove the Sub-M Board Cover.
A) Silver M3x8: 2 pcs
When installing the Sub-M Board Cover, insert the two dowels of
the frame into the two positioning holes on the Sub-M Board
Cover. Sub-M Board
- Right side -
A
Sub-M Board Cover

B B
Positioning hole
and dowel
Figure 3-66. Removing the Sub-M Board
A Positioning hole
and dowel
Figure 3-65. Removing the Sub-M Board Cover

3.4.4.8 Box Cooling Fan 6. Remove the sponge that secures the FFC.
C H E C K When replacing the Box Cooling Fan, make sure to also replace the When attaching the sponge, route the CR FFC and the Head Relay
P O IN T duct. FFC separately as shown.
Head Relay FFC

- Right rear side -

Main Board
CR FFC
Box Cooling
Fan
Cable
Clamps
CN408

7. Insert a screwdriver into the duct to remove the two screws, and remove the Box
 The duct provided as an ASP needs to be built as shown before
Cooling Fan. installing it to the printer.
When installing the Box Cooling Fan, be careful not to let the cable
get caught between the fan and the plate. (Figure 3-67)
Box Cooling Fan
Duct Provided like this Build it like this

A
 When installing the Box Cooling Fan, attach it and the screws
Driver
to the duct in advance.
Duct Box Cooling Fan
Sponge
Figure 3-68. Removing the Box Cooling Fan

Screws

3.4.4.9 Power Supply Board Cooling Fan 4. Remove the four screws, and remove the Fan Cover.
1. Remove the Board Box Cover. (p117) A)Silver M3x6 Bind machine screw: 4 pcs
3. Release the cable from the clamp and wire saddle.
Fan Cover
A
Main Board
A
Clamp
CN40
Wire saddle
A
A
Figure 3-70. Removing the Fan Cover
Power Supply Board

Cooling Fan
Cable
Figure 3-69. Releasing the cable

5. Remove the two screws, and remove the Power Supply Board Cooling Fan.
B)Silver M3x30 Bind machine screw: 2 pcs
Power Supply Board

Cooling Fan
Figure 3-71. Removing the Power Supply Board Cooling Fan

3.4.5 Carriage Mechanism/Ink System Mechanism 6. Release the portion of the CR Cover engaged with the CR Unit from the unit,
disengage the two tabs and remove the CR Cover.
3.4.5.1 CR Cover
4. Move the CR Unit to the left end.
5. Remove the three screws, and remove the CR Cover.
Tabs
CR Cover
Engaged portion
Figure 3-73. Removing the CR Cover
Figure 3-72. CR Cover Fixing Screws

3.4.5.2 Duct CR 8. Select Auto CR unlock & move CR to full column side.
A D J U S T M E N T When replacing/removing this part, refer to “4.1.2 Adjustment The CR lock is released and the CR Unit moves to the full side, then the printer
R E Q U IR E D Items and the Order by Repaired Part” (p260) and make sure to turns off automatically.
REPLACEMENT
REQUIRED TOOL 1. Remove the Left Rear Cover. (p110)
 Ink Cartridge for service (4 pcs) 2. Remove the Left Upper Cover. (p111)
 USB cable 3. Remove the CR Cover. (p139)
 Service program 4. Remove the clamp.
 Communication driver 5. Remove the two screws that secure the Ink Path Holder Assy.
A) Silver M3x10 screw with washer: 2 pcs
PREPARATION BEFORE REPLACEMENT
C A U T IO N When the Ink Path Joint is removed at the following step, ink may
1. Start the printer in the Serviceman Mode. drip off from the tube. Prepare a waste cloth or the like in advance
Turn on the printer while pressing [Menu] + [Back] + [OK]. and be careful not to contaminate the surroundings.
2. Start the service program and select When replace Duct CR from
6. Disengage the FFC from the hooks and hold up the Ink Path Holder Assy.
3. Select Duct CR Counter.
Press the [Run] button to reset the counter. (p293) C H E C K Pulling the Ink Path Holder Assy toward the rear as much as
P O IN T possible, disconnect the FFC. Be careful not to damage the FFC.
6. Select Tube inner pressure reduction.
Press the [Run] button to reduce the pressure in the tube. (p308)
Select All channels and Ink Cartridge for service, and press the [Run] button to
validate the ink cartridges for service. (p329)

7. Remove the four screws that secure the Ink Path Joint and remove it.
Ink Path Holder Assy FFC B) Silver M3x10 screw with washer: 4 pcs
8. Remove the Joint Rubbers two each from the two Ink Path Joints.
A
 Before attaching the Joint Rubbers, let them get wet with
cleaning liquid (CL14).
 Secure the screws that secure the Ink Supply Tube with
tightening torque about 0.29 ± 0.05 Nm.
 Confirm there are no foreign objects attached on the Joint
Rubbers.
 If the Joint Rubbers are deformed, restore it to its original
A
shape manually.
Hooks
Ink Path Holder Assy
B
B
Clamp B
B
Figure 3-74. Holding Up the Ink Path Holder Assy
Joint Rubbers
Figure 3-75. Removing the Ink Path Joint

9. Remove the six screws that secure the Duct CR

C A U T IO N Before attaching the seal rubber on the back of the Duct CR, make
C) Silver M3x10 screw with washer sure to wet it with cleaning fluid (CL14) and confirm there is no
foreign material attached on the surface.
10. Lift the Duct CR to remove it from the CR Unit.
Seal rubber Back side
Duct CR
C
C
C
C
C
Duct CR
Figure 3-76. Removing the Duct CR

11. Install the Duct CR and the other parts in the reverse order of the disassembly.
Secure the screws that secure the Ink Supply Tube with tightening
torque about 0.39 ± 0.05 Nm.

Before installing the new Duct CR, be careful of the following AFTER REPLACEMENT
points.
 Loosen the two each screws of the joints, and remove the tubes. 1. Install the eight ink cartridges for service. (p207)
 Since ink still remains in the removed tube, make sure to 2. Lower the lock levers.
dispose of it according to local regulations.
3. Turn the printer on.
4. Select Cleaning.
Select CL3 and all channels and press the [Run] button to perform CL3.
Joint
Duct CR
Joint Select Nozzle Check Pattern Print, and press the [Run] button to perform the
nozzle check. (p311)
Screws validate the ink tanks. (p329)
Screws
Tube 8. Remove the cartridge, and install the user’s ink tank.
Tube
11. Confirm that there are no errors.

3.4.5.3 Print Head 5. Select Switch between Ink cartridges and Ink tanks. Select All channels and
Ink Cartridge for service and press the [Run] button to make Ink Cartridge for
A D J U S T M E N T When replacing/removing this part, refer to “4.1.2 Adjustment service available.
perform the specified operations including required adjustment. This operation should be carried out after replacing the print head
C H E C K
P O IN T so as not to use the user's ink.
C A U T IO N  Be careful not to touch the nozzle surface of the Print Head.

 When using the functions of the service program, check that
the printer doesn't do any operations such as initialization.
 The PRINT HEAD can be replaced without “Tube inner
pressure reduction”. (thanks to the Duct CR’s self sealing
valve, no need to do “Tube inner pressure reduction”.)
REQUIRED TOOL
 Ink Cartridge for service

 Premium Glossy Photo Paper (250) 24 inch length or longer
(used in adjustment)
 Thickness gauge (used in adjustment)

Figure 3-77. [Switch between Ink cartridges and Ink tanks] screen
3. Reset the Waste Ink Bottle Counter.
4. Select When replace print head from ADJUSTMENT (Sequence).

6. Turn off the printer. 5. Remove the clamp.

7. Remove the ink tank, and install the ink cartridges for service. (p207) 6. Remove the two screws that secure the Ink Path Holder Assy.
8. Lower the lock levers. A) Silver M3x10 screw with washer: 2 pcs
C A U T IO N When the Ink Path Joint is removed at the following step, ink may
Turn on the printer while pressing [Menu] + [Back] + [OK]. drip off from the tube. Prepare a waste cloth or the like in advance
and be careful not to contaminate the surroundings.
REPLACEMENT
1. Select Auto CR unlock & move CR to full column side. 7. Disengage the FFC from the hooks and hold up the Ink Path Holder Assy.
The CR lock is released and the CR Unit moves to the full side, then the printer C H E C K Pulling the Ink Path Holder Assy toward the rear as much as
turns off automatically. P O IN T possible, disconnect the FFC. Be careful not to damage the FFC.
Ink Path Holder Assy FFC
Hooks
Figure 3-78. [Auto CR unlock & move CR to full column side] screen
Clamp
Figure 3-79. Holding Up the Ink Path Holder Assy

8. Remove the six screws that secure the Duct CR 10. Attach the hooks of the Duct CR to the frame as shown.
B) Silver M3x10 screw with washer
9. Lift the Duct CR to remove it from the CR Unit.
B
B
B
B Attach the hooks
B
Figure 3-81. Temporarily Placing the Duct CR

Duct CR
Figure 3-80. Removing the Duct CR

11. Remove the FFC clamp. AFTER REPLACEMENT

12. Remove the three screws, and remove the Print Head.
C) Silver M3x8 screw (Bit No.1): each 3 pcs Turn on the printer while pressing [Menu] + [Back] + [OK].
13. Disconnect the Head FFCs from the Print Head.
2. Select Printer Head Counter.
Press the [Run] button to reset the counter.
Make sure to connect the Head FFCs straight and all the way
seated in the connector.
FFC clamp
Head FFCs Head FFCs
C
C Figure 3-83. [Printer Head Counter] screen
Print Head 2
C
Print Head 1
Figure 3-82. Removing the Print Head

14. Install the Print Head and the other parts in the reverse order of the disassembly.

3. Select Head ID Input. 8. Select Cleaning.

Input the head rank ID and press the [Write] button. (p309) Select CL3 and all channels and press the [Run] button to perform CL3.
Figure 3-84. [Head ID Input] screen Figure 3-85. [Cleaning] screen

4. Turn off the printer. (Make sure to turn off the printer to enable the head ID 9. Run the nozzle check from the control panel or from the service program (p311).
setting.)
10. Perform the Head Inclination Manual Adjustment (CR direction). (p314)
11. Perform the Head Slant Auto Adjustment (PF direction). (p319)
6. Select [0 RIP Settings] from the control panel.
Media Setup Select Media 0 RIP Settings
13. Perform the PG adjustment. (p306)
7. Load a media for adjustment (Premium Glossy Photo Paper (250) 24 inch length
or longer). 14. Turn on the printer.
15. Perform the Manual Adjustment for Data Shift. (p321)
16. Perform the Manual Uni-d Adjustment for Between 2pcs heads. (p323)
17. Perform the Manual Uni-D Adjustment. (p325)
18. Perform the Manual Bi-D Adjustment. (p327)


Select All channels and Ink Tank and press the [Run] button to validate the ink
tanks.
Figure 3-86. [Switch between Ink cartridges and Ink tanks] screen
21. Remove the cartridge, and install the user’s ink tank. (p207)
23. Turn on the printer and confirm that there are no errors.

3.4.5.4 Head FFC 11. Release the Head FFC from the Ink Path Holder Assy.

Ink Path Holder Assy - Rear side of the CR Unit-
8. Remove the Duct CR. (p140)
9. Remove the Print Head. (p144)
10. Disengage the two hooks, and remove the FFC Holder.
Head FFC
- Rear side of the CR Unit-
Figure 3-88. Released Head FFC
FFC Holder
Hooks
Head FFC
Figure 3-87. Removing the FFC Holder

12. Release the Head FFC from the FFC Holders. 13. Remove the two pieces of acetate tape.
14. Remove the two pieces of acetate tape, and release the cover from the two hooks
FFC Holders of the frame.
Hooks 15. Disconnect the Head FFC from the connectors (CN404, CN405, CN406, CN407)
Hooks on the Sub-D Board, and remove the Head FFC.
Head FFC
Acetate tape
Head FFC Hook Cover
Sub-D Board
Hook
Acetate tape
CN404 CN406
Figure 3-89. Releasing the Head FFC
CN405 CN407
Acetate tape
Figure 3-90. Removing the Head FFC

When routing the Head FFC through the Ink Path Holder Assy,
make sure to let the FFC run under the hooks as shown below.
- Rear side -
Hook
- Front side -
Lap the FFCs and

then fold them.
Hook

3.4.5.5 Head Relay FFC 11. Disconnect the Head Relay FFCs from the connectors (CN400, CN401, CN402,
CN403) on the Main Board.
12. Pull out the Head Relay FFCs from the main body.
FFC Holder
8. Remove the Cover. (See Step 14 in “3.4.5.4 Head FFC” (P. 150))
9. Disconnect the Head Relay FFCs from the connectors (CN400, CN401, CN402,
CN403) on the Sub-D Board.
10. Remove the acetate tape, and release the Head Relay FFCs from the FFC clamp.
CN403
CN402
Head Relay FFC Acetate tape CN401
CN400
Main Board
Head Relay FFCs
CN400
CN401
CN402 Figure 3-92. Removing the Head Relay FFC

CN403
Sub-D Board
Figure 3-91. Removing the Head Relay FFC

 When attaching the Head Relay FFCs, make sure to let them
through the FFC Holder.
 Lap the FFCs and then fold them together.
CN402 CN403
CN400
CN401

3.4.5.6 CR FFC 14. Release the CR FFC from the FFC Holders.

CR FFC
FFC Holder
Figure 3-94. Releasing the CR FFC
10. Remove the Head FFC. (p150)
12. Disconnect the CR FFC from the connector on the Sub Board.
13. Disconnect the CR FFC from the Ink Path Holder Assy.
Ink Path Holder Assy

Sub Board
CR FFC
Figure 3-93. Releasing the CR FFC

15. Disconnect the CR FFC from the connector (CN100) on the Main Board.
16. Pull out the CR FFC from the main body. FFC Holder
When attaching the CR FFC, make sure to let it through the FFC
Holders.
CN100 CR FFC
Main Board
Figure 3-95. Removing the CR FFC

3.4.5.7 CR Scale - Left

Left Side
side - - Right side -
A D J U S T M E N T When replacing/removing this part, refer to “4.1.2 Adjustment CR Scale

C A U T IO N Do not contaminate the surface of the CR Scale with ink,

fingerprints, skin oil, or any other dirt. And be extremely careful
not to scratch or damage the surface by letting it come in contact
Hook
with the main unit frames or any other things. Doing so may result Groove Tension spring Hook
in malfunction of the CR Unit.
Figure 3-96. Removing the CR Scale
1. Unlock the CR Unit. (p98) 8. Release the CR Scale from each hook of the four CR Scale Holders.

CR Scale Holder
3. Open the Left Maintenance Cover. CR Scale
4. Open the Front Cover.
Hook
5. On the left side of the printer, remove the tension spring.
7. On the right side of the printer, disengage the CR Scale from the hook on the
frame.
Front Cover CR Scale Holders
When installing the CR Scale, confirm the following.
 Attach one side with “L” print to the left side of the printer.
 Attach one side with “R” print to the right side of the printer.
Figure 3-97. Removing the CR Scale

9. Pull out the CR Scale from the CR Scale.

 Make sure to attach the CR Scale to the CR Scale Holder as  If protection films are applied on both sides of the new CR
shown. Scale, peel them off before installation.
CR Scale Holder CR Scale

Rouge the scale
behind these portions
CR Scale
Protection
film
 Make sure the CR Scale can run through the slit of the CR
Encoder.
CR Encoder s
CR Scale

3.4.5.8 CR Timing Belt

Pulley Cover Pulley Shaft
A D J U S T M E N T When replacing/removing this part, refer to “4.1.2 Adjustment A
R E Q U IR E D Items and the Order by Repaired Part” (p260) and make sure to Plastic washer
Pulley

B
2. Remove the Wiper Cleaner. (p100)
CR Timing Belt
Pulley Holder
5. Remove the Right Cover. (p108) - Back side - Pulley Shaft

9. Remove the APG Unit. (p167) Plastic washer
10. Remove the CR Motor. (p161)
Figure 3-98. Disassembling the Pulley Holder
14. Remove the CR Scale. (p157)
15. Remove the CR Unit. (p200)
16. Remove the two screws, and remove the pulley cover.
B) Silver M3x12 screw with washer: 1 pcs
C A U T IO N In the next step, the two plastic washers at the both ends of the
pulley shaft will come off. Be careful not to lose them.
17. Remove the pulley, shaft, and belt together from the pulley holder.

18. Remove the CR Timing Belt from the belt holder on the back side of the CR Unit.
- Back side of the CR Unit -
Belt Holder
Attach the CR Timing Belt to the CR Unit so that the joint clips on
the belt locate within the range shown below.
CR Timing Belt
Joint clips
Figure 3-99. Removing the CR Timing Belt

3.4.5.9 CR Motor
- Left side -
R E Q U IR E D Items and the Order by Repaired Part” (p260) and make sure to A
perform the specified operations including required adjustment. A Pulley Holder

B
Figure 3-100. Loosening the CR Timing Belt Tension
7. Remove the APG Unit. (p167)
8. Loosen the two screws (A) that secure the pulley holder.
C H E C K Before loosening the tension at the next step, mark the position of
P O IN T the pulley holder to make the required adjustment easier.
9. Loosen the screw (B) to loosen the tension of the CR Timing Belt.

10. Move the CR Unit until to a position over the platen.

- Right side -
11. Remove the CR Timing Belt from the pinion gear of the CR Motor.
CR Motor Cable
12. Release the CR Motor Cable from the clamp. CR Timing Belt
13. Disconnect the cable from the relay connector. Clamp
14. Remove the two screws and the plate, and remove the CR Motor.
Relay
C) Silver M4x10 screw: 2 pcs connector
When installing the CR Motor, make sure to install it in the correct

C
orientation as shown in Figure3-101.
Pinion gear CR Motor
Plate
Figure 3-101. Removing the CR Motor

3.4.5.10 CR Motor Cooling Fan

CR Motor
2. Remove the Right Upper Cover. (p103) Cooling Fan
3. Remove the two screws that secure the CR Motor Cooling Fan. A
A)Silver M4x30 Bind machine screw: 2 pcs

5. Disconnect the cable from the relay connector. Cable
A
6. Remove the CR Motor Cooling Fan.
Relay connector
Clamps
Figure 3-102. Removing the CR Motor Cooling Fan

3.4.5.11 CR HP Sensor 6. Disconnect the cable from the CR HP Sensor

.
C H E C K Regarding to SC-F9200 series, there are 2 types of the printers; - Rear side -
P O IN T One is the printer which have films to extend life and the Other is
the printer which don’t have films not to extend life.
Make sure that how many labels the printer has by opening Left
Upper Cover like .
 Printers which have films to extend life:There are 2 labels. CR HP Sensor
 Printer which don’t have films not to extend life:There are 1 label.
Hooks
Cable
Printers which have films to Printers which don’t have films not
extend life:there are 2 labels to extend life:there are 1 label.
Figure 3-104. Removing the CR HP Sensor

Figure 3-103. How to confirm the printer type for SC-F9200 series

4. Move the CR Unit until to a position over the platen.
C A U T IO N At the next step, be careful not to damage the hooks of the CR HP

Sensor as they are very thin.
5. Disengage the hooks, and remove the CR HP Sensor.

C H E C K Regarding to SC-F9200 series which have films to extend life, Pass

P O IN T the cable of sensor into clamp like Figure 3-105.
 Printers which have films to extend life:There are 2 labels.
 Printer which don’t have films not to extend life:There are 1 label.
Clamp
Clamp
Cable
Figure 3-105. How to wire CR HP sensor

3.4.5.12 CR Encoder
- Back Side of the CR Unit -
CR Encoder

A A
FFC
Encoder Cover
12. Remove the Duct CR. (p140) Figure 3-106. Removing the CR Encoder
16. Remove the two screws, and remove the CR Encoder and Encoder Cover.
A) Silver M2.5x8 P-tite screw: 2 pcs
17. Disconnect the FFC from the CR Encoder.
When installing the CR Encoder, screw it together with the

Encoder Cover.

3.4.5.13 APG Motor

- Right side -
A D J U S T M E N T When replacing/removing this part, refer to “4.1.2 Adjustment APG Unit
perform the specified operations including required adjustment. A

3. Remove the three screws that secure the APG Unit.
A
A
C H E C K For the screw marked with a red circle in Figure3-107, use a stubby
P O IN T driver to remove it.
Figure 3-107. APG Unit Fixing Screws

Insert the positioning hole of the APG Unit over the rib of the
frame.
Positioning hole and rib
APG Unit
Positioning hole and rib

4. Disconnect the cable from the connector of the APG Motor, and remove the APG 5. Remove the two screws, and remove the APG Motor.
Unit.
B) Silver M2x4 (Bit No.1): 2 pcs
Be careful not to damage the encoder and scale of the APG Motor. Make sure to install the APG Motor in the correct orientation
checking the connector position.
APG Motor APG Motor

B
Encoder
APG Unit
Scale
Cable
Connector
Connector
Figure 3-108. Removing the APG Unit
Figure 3-109. Removing the APG Motor

3.4.5.14 PG HP Sensor
1. Unlock the CR Unit. (p98) - Back Side of the CR Unit -

Incline plate
4. Remove the Right Upper Cover. (p103) PG HP Sensor

9. Remove the APG Unit. (p167) Cable
10. Remove the CR Motor. (p161) PG Gear
11. Remove the CR Cover. (p139) Hooks

14. Remove the CR Scale. (p157) Figure 3-110. Removing the PG HP Sensor

16. Turn the PG gear until the slit of the incline plate faces the sensing portion of the
PG HP Sensor.
17. Disengage the hooks, and remove the PG HP Sensor.
18. Disconnect the cable from the PG HP Sensor.

3.4.5.15 Pump Cap Unit 1 Leave the relay connectors at the main body side to reuse them.
C H E C K
When replacing/removing this part, refer to “4.1.2 Adjustment P O IN T
A D J U S T M E N T
R E Q U IR E D Relay Connector
Items and the Order by Repaired Part” (p260) and make sure to

7. Move the CR Unit to a position over the platen.
8. Disconnect the cables from the three relay connectors (No.36, No.37, and No.79).
No.36
No.37
No.79
* “No.36 L”, “No.37 L”, and “No.79 L” are

indicated on the connectors at the main
body side.
Figure 3-111. Disconnecting from the Relay Connectors

9. Remove the three screws, and remove the CR Stopper.

C)Silver M3x8 screw: 3 pcs
10. Remove the three screws that secure the Pump Cap Unit 1.
D)Silver M3x8 S-tite screw with built-in washer: 3 pcs
11. Pull the Pump Cap Unit 1 frontward to disengage the hook, and remove the Pump
Cap Unit 1 avoiding contact with the CR shaft or any other parts.
Hook
 Install the Pump Cap Unit 1 while aligning its screw head with
the hole on the frame. If they do not match, the current
attachment position is wrong.
 Align the hook on the Pump Cap Unit 1 with the hole on the
frame shown in the figure below.
CR shaft
Screw
Hook
Hole D
Hole
D C
C
Pump Cap Unit 1 CR Stopper
Figure 3-112. Removing the Pump Cap Unit 1

12. Pull out the Pump Cap Unit 1.

13. Remove the Tube Clamp, and remove the Waste Ink Tube.
When attaching the Waste Ink Tube, be careful of the following

points.
 Route the Waste Ink Tube through the inner side than the
Pump Tube.
 Orient the lever part of the Tube Clamp referring below figure.
Tube Clamp
Pump Tube
Lever part
Waste Ink Tube
 Route the Waste Ink Tube through the two guides.
Waste Ink Tube
Guide
Guide

Figure 3-113. Removing the Waste Ink Tube
Tube Clamp
Waste Ink Tube
Tube Clamp
Flushing Box Pump Cap Unit 1 Pump Cap Unit 2

15. Remove the Waste Ink Tank.

C H E C K When replacing the Waste Ink Tube, follow the procedure below.
P O IN T 16. Remove the Stopper.
Stopper
14. Remove the smaller clamp from the frame.
Waste Ink Tank
Smaller clamp Waste Ink Tube
Figure 3-115. Removing the Waste Ink Tube (2)


17. Remove the two clamps that secure the Guide Frame. 20. Release the Waste Ink Tube.
18. Remove the Guide Frame. 21. Remove the Waste Ink Tube from the Joint Tank.
19. Remove the Joint Tank from the Tube Protection Plate. 22. Pull out the Waste Ink Tube from the hole of the frame.
23. Pull the Waste Ink Tube from the larger clamp.

Waste Ink Tube points.
Clamp  Route the tube through the larger clamp. (Figure 3-117)
 Route the tube through the hole on the frame. (Figure 3-117)
 Attach the smaller clamp on the frame. (Figure 3-114)
 Do not bend the tube or route it like an arch as shown below.
Guide Frame Doing so may cause waste ink flow backward.
Waste Ink Tube

Clamp
Joint Tank
Tube Protection Plate
Do not Bend.

Waste Ink Tube
Do not be an arch.

Larger clamp
Hole
Waste Ink Tube
Joint Tank

3.4.5.16 Pump Cap Unit 2 8. Remove the screw, and remove the cable cover.
When installing the cable cover, be careful not to let the cable get
caught between the cover and frame.

Cable Cover
Figure 3-118. Removing the Cable Cover

9. Open the clamp. 11. Remove the three screws that secure the Pump Cap Unit 2.
10. Disconnect the cable from the three relay connectors (No.36, No.37, and No.79) B) Silver M3x8 S-tite screw with captive washer: 3 pcs
and release the cables. 12. Pull the Pump Cap Unit 2 frontward to disengage the hook, and remove the Pump
Cap Unit 2 in the right direction avoiding contact with the CR shaft or any other
parts.
 Install the Pump Cap Unit 2 while aligning its screw head with
the hole on the frame. If they do not match, the current
attachment position is wrong.
Clamp
No.36  Align the hook on the Pump Cap Unit 2 with the hole on the
No.37 frame shown in the figure below.
No.79
Screw
Hook
Figure 3-119. Removing the Relay connector
C H E C K Leave the relay connectors at the main body side to reuse them.
Hole
P O IN T
Hole
Relay Connector

13. Release the Waste Ink Tube from the hook and the guide on the bottom of the
Pump Cap Unit 2.
14. Remove the Tube Clamp, and remove the Waste Ink Tube.
 Make sure the Waste Ink Pad is not peeled.

 Route the Waste Ink Tube through the guide.
 Attach the Tube Clamp on the inner side than the Waste Ink
Hook Pad.
Tube Clamp
Waste Ink Pad
NG OK
CR shaft
B
B
Pump Cap Unit 2
Figure 3-120. Removing the Pump Cap Unit 2

Tube Clamp C H E C K When replacing the Waste Ink Tube, follow the procedure below.
Waste Ink Pad P O IN T
Hook
Waste Ink Tube
15. Remove the Waste Ink Tank.

16. Remove the Stopper.
Stopper
Waste Ink Tank

Guide
Pump Cap Unit 2
Figure 3-121. Removing the Waste Ink Tube

17. Remove the two clamps that secure the Guide Frame. 20. Release the Waste Ink Tube.
18. Remove the Guide Frame. 21. Remove the Waste Ink Tube from the Joint Tank.
19. Remove the Joint Tank from the Tube Protection Plate. 22. Pull out the Waste Ink Tube from the hole of the frame.
23. Pull the Waste Ink Tube from the larger clamp.

Waste Ink Tube points.
Clamp  Route the tube through the larger clamp. (Figure 3-124)
 Route the tube through the hole on the frame. (Figure 3-124)
 Do not bend the tube or route it like an arch as shown below.
Doing so may cause waste ink flow backward.
Guide Frame
Waste Ink Tube
Clamp
Joint Tank
Tube Protection Plate Do not Bend.
Figure 3-123. Removing the Waste Ink Tube (2) Waste Ink Tube
Do not be an arch.

Larger clamp
Hole
Waste Ink Tube
Joint Tank

3.4.5.17 Ink Holder 1 11. Start the printer in the Serviceman Mode.
R E Q U IR E D Items and the Order by Repaired Part” (p260) and make sure to 12. Select Ink Eject.
perform the specified operations including required adjustment. Select Single channel -> Ink Holder 1 (Home) -> Cyan/Yellow, Magenta/
Black, and press the [Run] button to run the ink eject. (p332)
REQUIRED TOOL
REPLACEMENT
 Ink Cartridge for service (4 pcs)
 USB cable 1. Remove the Media Loading Lever. (p210)
 Service program 2. Remove the Panel Unit. (p101)
 Communication driver 3. Remove the Right Upper Cover. (p103)
PREPARATION BEFORE REPLACEMENT 4. Remove the Ink Tank. (p207)

Turn on the printer while pressing [Menu] + [Back] + [OK]. 6. Remove the Right Front Cover. (p107)
2. Start the service program and select When replace ink holder from 7. Remove the Right Cover. (p108)
3. Select Ink Holder Counter.
Press the [Run] button to reset the counter. (p293) 9. Remove the Power Supply Board Box. (See from Step 2 to Step 11 in
“3.4.4.3 PSH Board/PSH-B Board” (Page 125))
5. Turn on the printer. 10. Remove the cable cover. (See Step 8 in “3.4.5.16 Pump Cap Unit 2” (Page
177))
11. Open the three clamps.
Select Single channel -> Ink Holder 1 (Home) -> Cyan/Yellow, Magenta/ 12. On the front side, release the cable from the two relay connectors (No.1
Black and Ink Cartridge for service, and press the [Run] button to validate the and No.21).
ink cartridges for service. (p329)
9. Remove all the ink tanks. (p207)
10. Lower all the lock levers.

13. On the rear side, release the cable from the three relay connectors (No.42, No.55
and No.65). (The cables are bundled with a piece of black tape.)
Clamp
No.42
No.55
Tape No.65
No.1
No.21
C H E C K Leave the relay connectors at the main body side to reuse them.
P O IN T Figure 3-126. Released Cables
Relay Connector

14. Disconnect the FFC from the rear of the IC Holder. 15. Remove the screw that secure the Joint.
.
C)Silver M3x6 S-tite screw with built-in washer: 1 pcs
C A U T IO N  When the joint is removed in the next step, ink may drip off
from the tube. Prepare a waste cloth or the like in advance and
be careful not to contaminate the surroundings.
 When removing/attaching the screw that secures the joint, hold
the mounting plate with your hand during the work to prevent
the plate from being deformed. If the plate becomes deformed,
flatten it as it was.
16. Remove the two screws, and separate the upper joint and lower joint.
D)Silver M3x10 screw: 2 pcs
.
FFC
Joint
D D
Figure 3-127. Disconnecting the FFC
Mounting plate
Figure 3-128. Removing the Joint

 Secure the screws that secure the Ink Supply Tube with Before installing the new Ink Holder 1, be careful of the following
tightening torque about 0.29 ± 0.05 Nm. points.
 Attach the Joint as shown in the figure below.  Remove the packaging bag from the Ink Holder 1.
 Loosen the two each screws of the joints, and remove the tubes.
Ink Holder 1 (Home) Ink Holder 2 (Full)
 Since ink still remains in the removed tube, make sure to
Red mark
Packaging bag Ink Holder 1

Red mark
Tube
17. Remove the four screws that secure the Ink Holder 1.
E)Silver M4x10 S-tite screw with built-in washer: 4 pcs
Joints and
At the next step, be sure to remove the Ink Holder slowly and screws
C A U T IO N
carefully not to damage the Ink Tubes and cables with the sharp
metal edges of frames.
18. Remove the Ink Holder 1 pulling out the Ink Tubes and cables.
When installing the Ink Holder 1, pay attention to the followings.

 Remove the four tubes from the ink supply needles.
 Do not fold the ink tubes.
 Be careful not to let the ink tubes and the cable get caught
Tubes
between the Ink Holder and the frame of main body.
Tubes
 Rubbers.
shape manually.

Rear of IC Holder
E
E
Top of IC Holder
Figure 3-130. IC Holder
AFTER REPLACEMENT
E E 1. Install the four ink cartridges for service. (p207)

Select Single channel -> Ink Holder 1 (Home) -> Cyan/Yellow, Magenta/
Black, and press the [Run] button to perform the initial ink charge. (p334)
IC Holder 1
7. Perform cleaning if necessary. (p313)
Figure 3-129. Removing the IC Holder 1


Select Single channel -> Ink Holder 1 (Home) -> Cyan/Yellow, Magenta/
Black and Ink Tank, and press the [Run] button to validate the ink tanks. (p329)
10. Remove the four ink cartridges for service. (p207)
11. Install the ink tanks. (p207)

3.4.5.18 Ink Holder 2 11. Start the printer in the Serviceman Mode.
R E Q U IR E D Items and the Order by Repaired Part” (p260) and make sure to 12. Select Ink Eject.
perform the specified operations including required adjustment. Select Single channel -> Ink Holder 2 (Full) -> Cyan/Yellow, Magenta/ Black,
and press the [Run] button to run the ink eject. (p332)
REQUIRED TOOL
REPLACEMENT
 USB cable 1. Remove the Media Loading Lever. (p210)
 Service program 2. Remove the Panel Unit. (p101)
 Communication driver 3. Remove the Right Upper Cover. (p103)

1. Start the printer in the Serviceman Mode. 6. Remove the Right Front Cover. (p107)
2. Start the service program and select When replace ink holder from
9. Remove the Power Supply Board Box. (See from Step 2 to Step 11 in
3. Select Ink Holder Counter.
“3.4.4.3 PSH Board/PSH-B Board” (Page 125))
Press the [Run] button to reset the counter. (p293)
10. Remove the cable cover. (See Step 8 in “3.4.5.16 Pump Cap Unit 2” (Page 177))
11. Open the three clamps.
12. On the front side, release the cable from the two relay connectors (No.6 and
No.26).
Select Single channel -> Ink Holder 2 (Full) -> Cyan/Yellow, Magenta/ Black
and Ink Cartridge for service, and press the [Run] button to validate the ink
cartridges for service. (p329)

Clamps
No.6 Relay cables are still connected

No.26
Figure 3-132. After Releasing the Cables
C H E C K Regarding to SC-F9200 series which have films to extend the life,

P O IN T remove the double-stick tape which fixes the film before
performing Step 13.
 Leave the relay connectors at the main body side to reuse them. (Refer to “3.4.5.11 CR HP Sensor” (p164) to make sure which type
C H E C K
is matched.)
P O IN T
Relay Connector Zoom in
double-stick tape
 Leave the relay cable at the main body side to reuse them.
(Figure 3-132)

13. Disconnect the cables at the rear side from the three relay connectors (No.44,
No.60, and No.66), and release them from the two clamps. (The cables are bundled Clamps
with a piece of black tape.)
Tape
No.44
No.60
No.66

Regarding to SC-F9200 sries which have films to extend life, attach
the double-stick tape to fixe the film.
14. Disconnect the FFC from the rear of the IC Holder.

16. Remove the screw that secure the Joint.

.
F)Silver M3x6 S-tite screw with built-in washer: 1 pcs
C A U T IO N  When the joint is removed in the next step, ink may drip off
from the tube. Prepare a waste cloth or the like in advance and
be careful not to contaminate the surroundings.
 When removing/attaching the screw that secures the joint, hold
the mounting plate with your hand during the work to prevent
the plate from being deformed. If the plate becomes deformed,
flatten it as it was.
17. Remove the two screws, and separate the upper joint and lower joint.
FFC
G)Silver M3x10 screw: 2 pcs
.
Figure 3-135. Disconnecting the FFC

Joint
15. Remove the double-sided tape and remove the sheet downward.
.
G G
Double-sided tape
F
Sheet
Mounting plate
Figure 3-137. Removing the Joint
Figure 3-136. Removing the Sheet

 Secure the screws that secure the Ink Supply Tube with Before installing the new Ink Holder 2, be careful of the following
tightening torque about 0.29 ± 0.05 Nm. points.
 Attach the Joint as shown in the figure below.  Remove the packaging bag from the Ink Holder 2.
 Loosen the two each screws of the joints, and remove the tubes.
 Since ink still remains in the removed tube, make sure to
Red mark
Packaging bag Ink Holder 2

Red mark
Tube
18. Remove the four screws that secure the Ink Holder 2.
H)Silver M4x10 S-tite screw with built-in washer: 4 pcs
Joints and
At the next step, be sure to remove the IC Holder slowly and screws
C A U T IO N
carefully not to damage the Ink Tubes and cables with the sharp
metal edges of frames.
19. Remove the IC Holder 2 pulling out the Ink Tubes and cables.
When installing the Ink Holder 2, pay attention to the followings.

 Remove the four tubes from the ink supply needles.
 Do not fold the ink tubes.
 Be careful not to let the ink tubes and the cable get caught
Tubes
between the Ink Holder and the frame of main body.
Tubes
 Rubbers.
shape manually.

Rear of IC Holder
H
H
Top of IC Holder
Figure 3-139. IC Holder
AFTER REPLACEMENT
H H
1. Install the four ink cartridges for service. (p207)
and Ink Cartridge for service, and press the [Run] button to perform the initial
ink charge. (p334)
IC Holder 2
Figure 3-138. Removing the IC Holder 2 7. Perform cleaning if necessary. (p313)


and Ink Tank, and press the [Run] button to validate the ink tanks. (p329)
10. Remove the four ink cartridges for service. (p207)

3.4.5.19 Ink Tube 12. Select Ink Eject.

Select All channels, and press the [Run] button to run the ink eject. (p332)
R E Q U IR E D Items and the Order by Repaired Part” (p260) and make sure to 13. Turn off the printer.
REPLACEMENT

REQUIRED TOOL
 USB cable
 Service program
 Communication driver
PREPARATION BEFORE REPLACEMENT 7. Remove the CR Cover. (p139)
8. Remove the screws that secure the Ink Path Holder Assy. (See Step 5 in “3.4.5.2
Duct CR” (P. 140))
9. Remove the Ink Path Joint from the Ink Tubes Path. (See Step 6 in “3.4.5.2 Duct
2. Start the service program and select When replace ink holder from
ADJUSTMENT (Sequence). CR” (P. 140))
3. Select Ink Tube Counter. 10. Remove the screw one each on the two Ink Tube Holders, and remove the holders.
Press the [Run] button to reset the counter. (p293) A) Silver M3x8 P-tite screw: 2 pcs
validate the ink cartridges for service. (p329)

- Rear side - A C A U T IO N When the joint is removed in the next step, ink may drip off from
the tube. Prepare a waste cloth or the like in advance and be careful
not to contaminate the surroundings.
11. Remove the four screws, and separate the Upper Joint and Lower Joint.
Ink Tube
B
B
Figure 3-140. Removing the Ink Tube Holder
B
Ink Tube Holder

Upper Joint
Upper Joint
Figure 3-142. Removing the Ink Tubes
 Attach the Joint as shown in the figure below.
Red mark
Figure 3-141. Ink Tube Holder
Red mark

 When installing the Ink Tubes, confirm that there is no torsion Before installing the new Ink Tube, be careful of the following
of the Ink Tubes. (See Figure3-142) points.
 When installing the joint, insert the dowel into the positioning  Loosen the two each screws of the joints, and remove the tubes.
hole.  Since ink still remains in the removed tube, make sure to
 Secure the screws that secure the Ink Supply Tube with dispose of it according to local regulations.
tightening torque about 0.29 ± 0.05 Nm.
Rubbers. Joints and screws Ink Tube
 If the Joint Rubbers are deformed, restore it to its original Tube
shape manually.
Joints and screws
Tube
Positioning hole
and dowel

AFTER REPLACEMENT
1. Install the eight ink cartridges for service. (p207)

Select All channels, and press the [Run] button to perform the initial ink charge.
(p334)
7. Perform cleaning if necessary. (p313)
Select All channels and Ink Tank, and press the [Run] button to validate the ink
tanks. (p329)
10. Remove the eight ink cartridges for service. (p207)

3.4.5.20 CR Unit
R E Q U IR E D Items and the Order by Repaired Part” (p260) and make sure to CR Timing Belt Holder B
B

CR Timing Belts
4. Remove the Right Upper Cover. (p103) A
15. Remove the three screws, and remove the Pulley Holder.
Pulley Holder
A) Black M3x22 screw with washer: 1 pcs
B) Silver M3x6 S-tite screw with built-in washer: 2 pcs Figure 3-143. Removing the Pulley Holder

16. Disconnect the CR FFC from the connector (CN100) on the Sub Board. 18. Remove the six screws, and remove the two CR Stopper.
17. Remove the FFC clamp that secures the Head FFCs. C) Silver M3x8 screw: 6 pcs
19. Remove the screw, and remove the CR Scale Mounting Plate.
D)Silver M3x6 Cup S-tite screw: 1 pcs
Sub Board
C A U T IO N Never remove or loosen the screw shown below.
CR Scale Mounting Plate
CN100
D
C A U T IO N
Never remove!
CR FFC
FFC Clamp
Figure 3-144. Removing the Ink Path Holder Assy
C C
C
C
CR Stopper
CR Stopper C
Figure 3-145. Removing the CR Stopper

C A U T IO N Before performing the next step, check that the Wiper is at its Lubrication When replacing the CR Unit, remove the CR Slider following the
standby position. procedure below and lubricate it. For instructions on the
lubrication, see “5.6 Lubrication” (p387).
1. Remove the Silver M2.5x8 P-tite screw that secures the PG
Lever.
20. Remove the CR Unit by sliding it in the direction of the arrow. 2. Move the PG Lever in the direction of the arrow as far as it will
go, pull out the lever.
CR Unit
Screw
PG Lever
3. Disengage the hook and remove the CR Slider.

Figure 3-146. Removing the CR Unit
CR Slider

3.4.5.21 Oil Pad Holder
C H E C K The procedure below is for disassembling the Oil Pad Holder at the
P O IN T right. Use the same procedure for disassembling the left one.

4. Disengage the hook, and remove the Oil Pad Holder.
CR Unit
Hook
Oil Pad Holder
Figure 3-147. Removing the Oil Pad Holder
Lubrication When replaced with a new part, make sure to lubricate the new one
referring to“5.6 Lubrication” (p387).

3.4.5.22 PW Sensor
- Left Side of the CR Unit -
perform the specified operations including required adjustment. CR Unit
Hooks
C H E C K When replacing the PW Sensor, make sure to replace the IM

P O IN T Sensor, too. A

Positioning holes
4. Remove the CR Cover. (p139) and dowels Sensor Cover
5. Move the CR Unit to the left end. Figure 3-148. Removing the Sensor Cover
6. Remove the screw that secures the Sensor Cover.
Insert the two dowels of the Sensor Cover into the two positioning
holes on the CR Unit.
7. Disengage the two hooks, and remove the Sensor Cover.

8. Disconnect the FFC from the PW Sensor, and remove the PW Sensor.
- Bottom of the CR Unit -
PW Sensor
FFC
Figure 3-149. Removing the PW Sensor
Position the PW Sensor so that its sensing portion and connector

are located as shown.
- Bottom of the CR Unit -
Connector
Sensing Portion
Sensor Cover

3.4.5.23 IM Sensor Before installing the IM Sensor to the CR Unit, insert its protruded
portion into the groove of the Sensor Cover.
perform the specified operations including required adjustment. IM Sensor
C H E C K When replacing the IM Sensor, make sure to replace the PW

P O IN T Sensor, too.

Sensor Cover Should be engaged like this
6. Remove the Sensor Cover. (See Step 6 to Step 7 in “3.4.5.22 PW Sensor” (P.
204)) - Bottom of the CR Unit -
7. Disconnect the FFC from the connector of the IM Sensor, and remove the IM
Sensor.
FFC IM Sensor
Figure 3-150. Removing the IM Sensor

3.4.5.24 Ink Tank/Cartridge 2. Loosen the four screws, and lower the two Ink Tank Front Adjust Plate.
This section describes the removing procedure for the ink tank and the installation B)Silver M3x8 S-tite screw with built-in spring washer: 4 pcs
procedure for cartridges. There are two types of cartridges; cleaning cartridges and ink
cartridges for service.
C A U T IO N When using the ink tanks, cleaning cartridges, and ink cartridges
for service, they should be validated by using software (Service
Program). (See P. 329 or P. 331.)
REMOVING THE INK TANKS B B B B
1. Remove the four screws, and remove the Heat Shield Assy.
A)Silver M3x6 Cup S-tite screw: 4 pcs
Ink Tank Front Ink Tank Front

Adjust Plate Adjust Plate
Figure 3-152. Lower the Ink Tank Front Adjust Plate

Heat Shield Assy
Figure 3-151. Removing the Heat Shield Assy

3. Remove the eight screws (one each) that secure the Ink Tank using the stubby
driver. Lock lever
C)Silver M3x8 S-tite screw with built-in spring washer: 8pcs
Ink Tank
Ink Tank Ink Tank
C C C C C C C C
Figure 3-153. Ink Tank Fixing Screw

4. Lift the lock levers.
5. Remove the ink tanks.
Figure 3-154. Removing the Ink Tank

INSTALLING THE CARTRIDGES
1. Loosen the four screws inside the ink holder.

A)Silver M3x20 S-tite screw with built-in washer: 8 pcs
C A U T IO N Just loosen the screws, but do not remove them. Hook

(plate)
2. Confirm the hooks (plates) shown below are evenly lowered.
When attaching the ink tank, make sure to push up the eight hooks
(plates) for fixing the ink tank.
Side view
Front Ink Holder
A A
Figure 3-155. Plates

3. Install the cartridges.

3.4.6 Paper Feed Mechanism

3.4.6.1 Media Loading Lever
1. Move the Media Loading Lever to the front side, and set it to the “Hold” position.
Media Loading Lever
2. Remove the two screws, and remove the Media Loading Lever.
Figure 3-156. Removing the Media Loading Lever

3.4.6.2 Media Loading Lever Sensor 4. Remove the six screws that secure the Rear Cover.
1. Move the Media Loading Lever to the rear side, and set it to the release position. C) Silver M3x8 S-tite screw with built-in washer: 6 pcs
2. Disconnect the connector of the Reel Unit.

Rear Cover
3. Remove the five screws, and remove the Right Rear Cover.
C C
A) Silver M4x10 S-tite screw with washer: 4 pcs C C C
C
B
Right Rear Cover
Reel Unit
Connector Figure 3-158. Removing the Rear Cover
A 5. Disconnect the connector from the Media Loading Lever Sensor.
Connector Media Loading Lever Sensor

C A U T IO N Be careful of
the direction
of connector.
upper
A
A
lower
Figure 3-157. Removing the Right Rear Cover
Figure 3-159. Connector of the Media Loading Lever Sensor

6. Remove the two screws, and remove the cover.

D) Silver M3x8 S-tite screw with built-in washer: 2 pcs
Cover
Figure 3-160. Removing the Cover
7. Disengage the hook, and remove the Media Loading Lever Sensor.
Media Loading Lever Sensor
Figure 3-161. Removing the Media Loading Lever Sensor

3.4.6.3 PF Motor 6. Loosen the two screws (A) that secure the PF Motor Mounting Plate.
A D J U S T M E N T When replacing/removing this part, refer to “4.1.2 Adjustment Before tightening the screw A, move the PF Motor Mounting Plate
R E Q U IR E D Items and the Order by Repaired Part” (p260) and make sure to frontward and rearward several times, and make sure that the
perform the specified operations including required adjustment. plate moves smoothly and tension of the tension spring is applied
properly.
1. Remove the Left Rear Cover. (p110) 7. While pressing the mounting plate in the direction of the arrow, loosen the tension
2. Remove the Left Upper Cover. (p111) of the PF Timing Belt, and remove the belt from the pinion gear of the PF Motor.
3. Remove the Left Cover. (p114) 8. Remove the two screws, and remove the PF Motor.
4. Disconnect the PF Motor Cables from the relay connector. E) Silver M3x6 screw with built-in washer: 2 pcs
5. Release the PF Motor Cables from the two clamps.

PF Timing Belt
Tension Spring
- Rear side -
PF Motor
Relay Connector
PF Motor Cable PF Motor A
PF Motor B
Mounting Plate
Clamps
Pinion gear

Figure 3-163. Removing the PF Motor

3.4.6.4 PF Motor Cooling Fan

4. Release the cable from the two clamps and wire saddle. PF Motor Cooling Fan

6. Remove the two screws, and remove the PF Motor Cooling Fan. Relay connector
Clamps
A)Silver M4x30 Bind machine screw: 2 pcs
Cable
Wire saddle
Figure 3-164. Removing the PF Motor Cooling Fan

3.4.6.5 PF Encoder
1. Remove the Left Rear Cover. (p110) FFC
4. Disconnect the FFC from the connector of the PF Encoder.
5. Remove the screw, and remove the PF Encoder. PF Encoder
A) Silver M2.5x6 (Bit No.1) P-tite screw: 1 pcs
When installing the PF Encoder, be sure the PF Encoder and the

PF Scale are not in contact with each other.
A
PF Scale
Figure 3-165. Removing the PF Encoder

3.4.6.6 PF Scale
PF Scale

4. Remove the PF Encoder. (p217)
5. Remove the PF Scale.
ASP PF Scale is not provided with double-sided tape (The tape is

provided separately). Make sure to first attach the tape to the wheel
of the main body, and then attach the PF Scale.
Figure 3-166. Removing the PF Scale

3.4.6.7 PF Timing Belt

R E Q U IR E D Items and the Order by Repaired Part” (p260) and make sure to PF Timing Belt
A
FFC
PF Encoder
4. Loosen the two screws (A) that secure the PF Motor Mounting Plate.
Before tightening the screw A, move the PF Motor Mounting Plate

frontward and rearward several times, and make sure that the
plate moves smoothly and tension of the tension spring is applied
properly.
A
PF Encoder Holder
5. While pressing the mounting plate in the direction of the arrow, loosen the tension Pinion gear
PF Motor Mounting Plate
of the PF Timing Belt, and remove the belt from the pinion gear of the PF Motor. Route the cable
6. Disconnect the FFC from the PF Encoder, and release the FFC from the PF
Encoder Holder.
Figure 3-167. Removing the PF Timing Belt
Make sure to route the FFC through the pins of the PF Encoder
Holder.
7. Remove the PF Timing Belt.

3.4.6.8 Driven Roller Assy 3. Put paper at the position of remove Driven Roller Assy.
C A U T IO N  Do not scratch the PF Roller with the shaft of the Driven Roller
Assy.
 Do not touch the Driven Rollers with bare hands. C A U T IO N
Put paper between
Platen and Driven
Roller Assy, so as
1. Move the Media Loading Lever to the rear side, and set it to the release position. not to damage Platen
or lose parts.
Driven Roller Assy Platen
Front Cover
Media Loading Lever
Paper
Figure 3-169. Paper position
Figure 3-168. Removing the Driven Roller Assy (1)

4. Insert a screwdriver from the rear of the printer and raise the Driven Roller Holder
 Install the Driven Roller Assy in the following procedure.
to make the reassembly work easier.
1. Move the Media Loading Lever to the rear side, and set it to the
5. Push the Driven Roller Assy in the direction of the arrow, and remove it from the release position.
shaft bearing of the Driven Roller Holder. 2. Put paper at the position of remove (installing) Driven Roller
Assy.
3. Put the Driven Roller above Driven Roller Holder as following
picture.
C A U T IO N 1. Put the Driven

Roller to make
sure the interval of
rollers of it may
become even.
2. If the place of
Driven Roller Assy
is not steady,
please use tweezers
etc.
Driven Roller Holder
Driven Roller Assy

Driven Roller Assy
Driven Roller
4. Move the Media Loading Lever to the front side, and set it to
the Hold position.
PF Roller
Figure 3-170. Removing the Driven Roller Assy (2)

5. Push the Driven Roller Holder below, and install the Driven
Roller Assy steadily.
Driven Roller Assy

3.4.6.9 Suction Fan 5. Remove the nine screws that secure the Front Frame.
R E Q U IR E D Items and the Order by Repaired Part” (p260) and make sure to 6. Lift the Front Frame to disengage the two ribs.
C H E C K To disengage the hooks, lift the Front Frame holding the handle, or
P O IN T lift it by raising the bottom of the frame.
1. Remove the After Heater. (p233)
2. Remove the Cooling Fan. (p235) Front Frame
3. Release the cables from the six clamps. Handle

4. Disconnect the cables from the connectors (CN500 and CN502) on the Sub-E
Board.
Clamps
Hook
CN500 Clamp
Clamps
CN502
7. Taking care not to let the Front Frame get contact with the main body, remove the
Front Frame in the direction of the arrow.
When attaching the Front Frame, take extra care not to let the
cables get caught between the Front Frame and main body.
Sub-E Board


9. Release the cable from the clamp.
Front Frame C H E C K To prevent the screw of the Suction Fan from dropping inside the
Hook P O IN T frame, remove the screw with rolled A4 paper put through the hole
A of the frame.
Hook
A
A
A
10. Pass the rolled A4 paper through the hole on the frame.
A
A 11. Insert the screwdriver through the rolled A4 paper to remove the two screws, and
remove the Suction Fan.
A
A
Install the Suction Fan with its duct part in contact with the dowel
of the frame.
A
Duct part Suction Fan
Figure 3-172. Removing the Front Frame
Dowel

Suction Fan
B Relay Connectors
Cable Clamp
Screwdriver
Rolled A4 paper
Suction Fans
- Bottom side-
Holes
Frame
Rolled A4 paper
Figure 3-173. Removing the Suction Fan

3.4.6.10 PE Sensor 4. Remove the PE Sensor from the PE Sensor Holder, and disconnect the FFC.

R E Q U IR E D PE Sensor Holder
Items and the Order by Repaired Part” (p260) and make sure to
1. Remove the Loading Guide. (See Step 7 in “3.4.6.12 PF Roller Center FFC
Support” (P. 227))
2. Remove the screw, and remove the PE Sensor Holder.
C A U T IO N When removing/attaching the screw, be careful not to scratch the

FFC.
PE Sensor
3. Slide the PE Sensor Holder in the direction of the arrow to disengage the two
hooks. Figure 3-175. Removing the PE Sensor
The area around the PE Sensor is shaded with acetate tape. Make
sure to restore the tape you peeled when disassembling back to the
PE Sensor Holder
original condition.
Hooks
Figure 3-174. Removing the PE Sensor Holder

3.4.6.11 Driven Roller Gear  Remove the screw shown below using a ratchet screwdriver
C H E C K
1. Perform Step 1 to Step 6 of “3.4.6.2 Media Loading Lever Sensor” (p211). P O IN T with a 20-mm or shorter head.
2. Remove the six screws and remove the shaft.

Ratchet screwdriver
A A A A A A
Shaft A
 If remove the shaft, from right side as picture.
Shaft
Driven Roller holder
Figure 3-176. Removing the shaft
Driven Roller holder

3. Remove the Driven Roller Gear from the Shaft.

3. Tighten the screw of Shaft to the figure below.
B) Silver M3x8 pan head sems screw: 1 pcs
 Install the Shaft in the following procedure.
1. Move the Media Loading Lever to the front side, and set it to
the Hold position.
2. Install the Driven Roller Gear while aligning its phase
according to the figure below.
<Phase alignment>
Align the concave section of the
Driven Roller Gear with the first
tooth of the black gear.
Concave
The number of Driven Roller Holder
Driven Roller Gear
2 3 4 1
4. Check the release and hold to move Media Loading Lever after
tighten 6pcs screws.

3.4.6.12 PF Roller Center Support Do not touch the CR Scale.

C A U T IO N
C H E C K To shorten the repair time, Step 1 to Step 5 can be omitted.
P O IN T (However, if the steps above are omitted, the inside of the printer
becomes darker, so the work may be difficult.)
3. Remove the six screws that secure the After Heater.
1. Open the Front Cover. B) Silver M3x8 S-tite screw: 6 pcs

4. Shift the After Heater forward and make a space between Platen and After Heater.
C A U T IO N When removing the screws, make sure to pinch the precision
screwdriver with long nose pliers.
Long nose pliers Precision Screwdriver
Rib A
A
2. Remove the forty screws and remove the Rib on the Platen. Rib Upper
A
A
A) Silver M2.6x6 flat head screw: 40 pcs
C H E C K  Remove the screw of Rib by precision screwdriver. A A Lower

P O IN T  Referring to following “Removing position of Rib” when
remove the screw of Rib.
Figure 3-177. Removing the Rib

1, 4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 23 7
1, 4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 23 7

5. Remove the fourteen screws, and remove the Platen. (Remove the seven screws on
After Heater the inner side using a stubby screwdriver.)
Platen
C) Silver M3x30 S-tite screw: 14 pcs
B
B When installing the Platen, make sure to tighten the screws while
B
B
Space pressing the Platen toward the rear. Otherwise, the gap between
the Platen and After Heater will be too narrow, so the Media
B Holding Plate cannot be moved.
B After Heater
After Heater Media Holding Plate
Figure 3-178. Make a space
Space
Platen

6. Remove the six screws, and remove the Rear Cover.

C D) Silver M3x8 S-tite screw: 6 pcs
C C
7. Remove the two screws, and remove the Loading Guide.
C C E) Silver M3x8 S-tite screw: 2 pcs
C C
C C D
D D D
C C D
C Platen D
C
Rear Cover
Platen
Figure 3-180. Removing the Rear Cover
Figure 3-179. Removing the Platen

E
Loading Guide
Figure 3-181. Removing the Loading Guide

8. Remove the screw, and remove the PE sensor Holder Frame from main frame. 9. Remove the two screws that secure the PF Roller Center Support using the ratchet
screwdriver.
F) Silver M3x8 S-tite screw: 1pcs
G) Silver M3x8 S-tite screw: 2 pcs
A D J U S T M E N T When removing this part, refer to “4.1.2 Adjustment Items and the
R E Q U IR E D Order by Repaired Part” (p260) and make sure to perform the  Replace the PF Roller Center Support one by one. If you
C H E C K
specified operations including required adjustment. P O IN T replace the five PF Roller Center Supports at once, the PF
Roller will warp.
 To prevent the removed screw from dropping in the Suction
Fan, cover the fan with a sheet of paper.
Paper
Suction Fan
Attach the PF Roller Center Support as follows.

F
1. Insert the PF Roller Center Support into the space below the
PF Roller from the rear side while taking care not to damage
the PF Roller with the edge marked with a red circle.
PE sensor Holder Frame Front
PF Roller
Figure 3-182. Removing the PE sensor Holder Frame
PF Roller Center Support

2. Secure the two screws with the ratchet screwdriver. (Figure 10. Remove the hook from main frame by Flat-bladed Screwdriver, slide the PF Roller
3-183) Center Support to the left, and disconnect it from main frame.
3. Tighten the two screws fully with an L-shaped Offset
Screwdriver.
L-shaped Offset Screwdriver Hook

Screw Screw
Flat-bladed Screwdriver PF Roller Center Support
Figure 3-184. Removing the PF Roller Center Support 2

G G
Ratchet screwdriver

11. Raise the PF Roller by hand, and remove the PF Roller Center Support as shown
below figure.
 When installing the Platen, make sure the cushion is attached

correctly.
Platen
Cushion
OK NG
 Remove the PF Roller Center Support one by one. Because to

prevent bending of PF Roller.

3.4.7 Heater Mechanism

3.4.7.1 After Heater
Front Cover
R E Q U IR E D Items and the Order by Repaired Part” (p260) and make sure to A
A

A
2. Remove the six screws that secure the After Heater.
A) Silver M3x8 S-tite screw: 6 pcs A
After Heater
Figure 3-186. After Heater Fixing Screws

3. Remove the After Heater in the direction of the arrow, and hook it with the third
protrusion from the top on the Front Frame. Front Frame
4. Release the cables from the clamp.
Protrusion (3rd)
5. Disconnect the cables from the three relay connectors, and remove the After Heater.
When installing the After Heater, be careful not to let the cables get
caught in between the heater and the main body. After Heater
Relay Connectors
Clamp
Protrusion
Protrusion
After Heater
Figure 3-187. Removing the After Heater

3.4.7.2 Cooling Fan

1. Remove the After Heater. (p233)
- Right side -
2. Remove the Heat Shield Assy. (p207)
3. Remove the Lower Ink Holder. (p106) Holes
4. Remove the Sub-E Board Cover. (See Step 2 in “3.4.4.6 Sub-E Board” (P.
133))
5. Disconnect the cable of the Cooling Fan from the connector (CN518) on the Sub-E
Board.
6. Release the cable of the Cooling Fan from the two clamps. Clamps
7. Insert the stubby screwdriver through the holes on the frame at the Cooling Fan
side to remove the two screws that secure the Cooling Fan, and remove the
Cooling Fan.
A
A
Cooling Fan
CN518
Sub-E Board
Figure 3-188. Removing the Cooling Fan

3.4.8 Roll Unit

- Outside - Dowels and
3.4.8.1 Roll Unit positioning groove
1. Remove the nine screws, and remove the Roll Unit.

A) Special screw: 9 pcs A
A
When installing the Roll Unit, confirm the following.
A A
 On the right side of the Roll Unit, insert the dowels on the A
frame into the positioning grooves on the Roll Unit. A
 On the left side of the Roll Unit, insert the dowel on the frame
- Inside - Dowels and positioning groove
into the positioning hole on the Roll Unit.
A
A Positioning
hole and dowel
- Rear side -
Roll Unit
Figure 3-189. Removing the Roll Unit

3.4.8.2 Roll Receiver Assy

1. Lift the Roll Receiver Assy to disengage the two hooks, and remove the Roll
Receiver Assy.
Hooks - Rear side -
Roll Receiver Assy
Figure 3-190. Removing the Roll Receiver Assy

3.4.8.3 Roll Paper Holder

Roll Paper Holder Plate
1. Remove the C-ring (φ25). A
2. Remove the screw, and remove the plate. C-ring

3. Remove the screw that secures the Roll Paper Holder.
B) Special screw: 1 pcs
Before installing the Roll Paper Holder on the left, install the B
holder and the spring as shown in the figure below.
- Left side -
Holder
Roll Paper Holder

Spring
R Roll Unit
L Roll Unit
Lubrication When replaced with a new part, make sure to lubricate the new one Figure 3-191. Removing the Roll Paper Holder
referring to“5.6 Lubrication” (p387).

3.4.8.4 Sub-F Board (Roll)

1. Remove the Roll Paper Holder of the Right Roll Unit. (p238)
Cable
2. Disengage the hook, and remove the cover. Right Roll Side Cover CN600
3. Disconnect the cable from the connector (CN600) on the Sub-F Board.
4. Remove the four screws that secure the Right Roll Cover. (See Figure 3-193.)
Sub-F Board
5. Remove the two screws, and remove the Right Roll Side Cover. (See Figure
3-192.) B
B
B) Silver M3x8 S-tite screw with built-in washer: 2 pcs
6. Slightly lift the Right Roll Cover, and remove the Right Roll Side Cover Cover Hook
Insert the two ribs of the Right Roll Cover into the two positioning Right Roll Unit
holes on the frame.
Right Roll Cover
Right Roll Cover
Ribs
A
A A
Figure 3-193. Removing the Right Roll Side Cover

7. Disconnect all cables from the connectors on the Sub-F Board.

Sub-F Board
8. Remove the four screws, and remove the Sub-F Board.
C) Silver M3x8 S-tite screw: 4 pcs C
C
When installing the Sub-F Board, make sure to attach it in the
correct orientation as shown in Figure3-194.
Figure 3-194. Removing the Sub-F Board

3.4.8.5 ATC Motor Perform the next step while holding the Compound Gear with your
C A U T IO N
hand to prevent it from falling.
6. Remove the three screws that secure the Right Roll Side Frame.
1. Remove the Roll Paper Holder of the Right Roll Unit. (p238) A) M3x8 S-tite screw: 3 pcs
2. Remove the Right Roll Side Cover. 7. Slide the Right Roll Side Frame in the direction of the arrow to remove it.
(See Step 2 to Step 5 in “3.4.8.4 Sub-F Board (Roll)” (P. 239))
3. Disconnect the cable from the connector (CN606) on the Sub-F Board. Compound Gear
4. Release the cable from the clamp, and remove the Right Roll Cover.
5. Disconnect the cable from the connector of the ATC Motor.
ATC Motor Connector

Right Roll Side Frame
Right Roll Clamp A

Cover A
ATC Motor
Sub-F Board Sub-F Board
CN606
Figure 3-196. Removing the Right Roll Side Frame
Figure 3-195. Removing the Right Roll Cover

8. Remove the two Compound Gears.
C A U T IO N Be careful not to damage the encoder and scale of the ATC Motor
Compound Gears
in the next step.
ATC Motor
Scale
Encoder
Figure 3-197. Removing the Compound Gears
9. Remove the two screws, and remove the ATC Motor. ATC Motor
Make sure to install the ATC Motor in the correct orientation B

B
Connector
Figure 3-198. Removing the ATC Motor

When installing the Right Roll Side Frame, confirm the following.
 Set the two shafts of the Right Roll Side Frame into the two
positioning holes on the frame.
Positioning holes
Shafts
 Install the two Compound Gears as shown in the figure below.
Compound Gears

3.4.9 Reel Unit

Left side
3.4.9.1 Media Guide Bar
1. Remove the four screws, and remove the Media Guide Bar.
A
A) Special screw: 4 pcs
A
Media Guide Bar
Figure 3-199. Removing the Media Guide Bar

3.4.9.2 Reel Unit

- Outside - Dowel and positioning groove
1. Remove the nine screws, and remove the Reel Unit.
Positioning hole and dowel A
A
When installing the Reel Unit, confirm the following. A
A
 On the left side of the Reel Unit, insert the dowel of the frame
into the positioning hole on the Reel Unit.
A
 On the right side of the Reel Unit, insert the dowels of the frame - Inside - Dowel and positioning groove
into the positioning grooves of the Reel Unit. A
A A
Reel Unit
Figure 3-200. Removing the Reel Unit (SC-F7100 Series)

3.4.9.3 Roll Paper Holder

Roll Paper Holder Plate
1. Remove the C-ring (φ25). A
2. Remove the screw, and remove the plate. C-ring

3. Remove the screw that secures the Roll Paper Holder.
B) Special screw: 1 pcs
Before installing the Roll Paper Holder on the left, install the B
holder and the spring as shown in the figure below.
- Left side -
Holder
Spring Roll Paper Holder
Left Reel Unit
Right Reel Unit
Figure 3-201. Removing the Roll Paper Holder

Lubrication When replaced with a new part, make sure to lubricate the new one
referring to “5.6 Lubrication” (p387).

3.4.9.4 Sub-F Board (Reel)

CN600 Cable
1. Remove the Roll Paper Holder of the Right Reel Unit. (p246)
2. Disengage the hook, and remove the cover.
4. Remove the four screws. (See Figure 3-203.)
Sub-F Board
5. Remove the two screws that secure the Right Reel Side Cover. (See Figure Right Reel
Side Cover
3-202.)
B) Silver M3x8 S-tite screw with built-in washer: 2 pcs B
B
6. Slightly lift the Right Reel Cover, and remove the Right Reel Side Cover. Cover
Secure with the Hook
Tighten the screw that secures the Right Reel Side Cover together Right Reel Unit
grounding wire.
with the grounding wire.
Right Reel Cover
Figure 3-203. Removing the Right Reel Side Cover

7. Disconnect all cables from the connectors on the Sub-F Board.

8. Remove the four screws, and remove the Sub-F Board. Sub-F Board
C)Silver M3x8 S-tite screw: 4 pcs

C C
 When installing the Sub-F Board, make sure to attach it in the
correct orientation as shown in Figure3-204.
 Insert the two tabs of the Right Reel Cover into the two
Right Reel Cover
C C
Figure 3-204. Removing the Sub-F Board
Tabs

3.4.9.5 Reel Motor and Mounting Plate Assy Perform the next step while holding the Compound Gears with
C A U T IO N
your hand to prevent it from falling.
6. Remove the three screws that secure the Right Reel Side Frame.
1. Remove the Roll Paper Holder of the Right Reel Unit. (p246)
2. Remove the Right Reel Side Cover.
7. Slide the Right Reel Side Frame in the direction of the arrow to remove it.
(See Step 2 to Step 5 in “3.4.9.4 Sub-F Board (Reel)” (P. 247))
Compound
4. Release the cable from the clamp, and remove the Right Reel Cover. Gear
5. Disconnect the cable from the connector of the Reel Motor.
Reel Motor
Right Reel Side Frame

Right Reel Clamp
Cover
A
A
Reel Motor
Connector
A
Sub-F (Reel) Board
CN606
Sub-F (Reel) Board
Figure 3-206. Removing the Right Reel Side Frame

Figure 3-205. Removing the Right Reel Cover

8. Remove the two Compound Gears.

Make sure to install the Reel Motor in the correct orientation
Compound Gears
Reel Motor
Connector
Figure 3-207. Removing the Compound Gears Gear and Mounting Plate should be replaced at the same time with
9. Remove the two screws, and remove the Reel Motor. Mounting Plate Assy.
Gear
Mounting
Plate
Figure 3-208. Mounting Plate Assy

When installing the Right Reel Side Frame, confirm the following.
Reel Motor
 Set the two shafts of the Right Reel Side Frame into the two
B
Right Reel Side Frame
Shafts
Figure 3-209. Removing the Reel Motor Positioning holes
 Install the two Compound Gears as shown in the figure below.
Compound Right Reel

Gear Side Frame

3.4.10 Additional Drying Fan Unit

3.4.10.1 Drying Fan Unit
- Rear side -
1. Disconnect the cable of the Drying Fan Unit.
2. Release the cable of the Drying Fan Unit from the two clamps.
Cable
Clamps
Figure 3-210. Removing the Drying Fan Unit

3. Release the cable and power cable of the Drying Fan Unit from the clamp.
4. Disconnect the power cable of the Drying Fan Unit. Power Cable
Clamps
5. Remove the two screws that secure the Drying Fan Unit.
6. Remove the Drying Fan Unit in the direction of the arrow.
Drying Fan Unit Cable
- Bottom -
Figure 3-211. Removing the Drying Fan Unit (front side)

3.4.10.2 Drying Fan Cover

A A
1. Remove the Drying Fan Unit. (p252)
A
2. Remove the 12 screws, and remove the Drying Fan Cover.
Drying Fan Cover
A) Silver M3x8 S-tite screw with built-in washer: 12 pcs A A
A
A
A
A
Figure 3-212. Removing the Drying Fan Cover

3.4.10.3 Sub-I Board

2. Remove the Drying Fan Cover. (p254)
3. Disconnect all cables from the connectors on the Sub-I Board. Sub-I Board
A
4. Remove the four screws, and remove the Sub-I Board.
A
Make sure to install the SUB-I Board in the correct orientation
A
Figure 3-213. Removing the Sub-I Board

3.4.10.4 Drying Fan Power Supply Board

Relay Connector
2. Remove the Drying Fan Cover. (p254)
3. Disconnect the relay connector.
4. Disconnect the cable from the connector (CN2) on the Power Supply Board. A
5. Remove the four screws, and remove the Power Supply Board.
Power Supply Board
CN2
Figure 3-214. Removing the Power Supply Board

3.4.10.5 Drying Fan

2. Remove the Drying Fan Cover. (p254) Drying Fan
3. Disconnect the cables of the Drying Fan from the relay connector.
4. Release the cables from the clamp. Relay Connector
A
Route the cables as shown below.

A
Clamp
Drying Fan Unit
5. Remove the two screws, and remove the Drying Fan.

Cable
Make sure to install the Drying Fan in the correct orientation

checking the cable position.
Figure 3-215. Removing the Drying Fan

CHAPTER
4
ADJUSTMENT

4.1 Overview
This chapter describes the Service Program software utility and the adjustment
procedures required after repairing or replacing certain parts.
4.1.1 Precautions
Always observe the following cautions whenever making an adjustment on the printer.
C A U T IO N  Always refer to “Adjustment Items and the Order by Repaired

Part” (p.260) and make sure to perform all the adjustments
listed in the table in the given order.
 Always read and follow the precautions given in each section
that explains each adjustment. Ignoring the precautions can
result in malfunction of the printer.
ADJUSTMENT Overview 259

4.1.2 Adjustment Items and the Order by Repaired Part

The following table shows the required adjustments by repaired or replaced part and
the order in which the adjustments must be performed.
NOTE 1: The adjustments required for the Main Board differs depending on whether the NVRAM on the old board can be backed up or not.
2: When the firmware update is required, first check the version of firmware currently installed on the printer, then update the firmware if necessary.
Check the version of firmware which is released on April/2016 or later if customers need to use Charge & Reservation.
3: PGPP: Premium Glossy Photo Paper (250)
Table 4-1. Adjustment items and the order by repaired part
Replaced or Repaired Service
Class Required Operations Jig Media Replaced Reattached Page
(Reattached) Part/Unit Program
Replacement 1 Replacement --- √ √ p. 161
2 Turn the power on in Serviceman mode. --- √ ---
3 Reset the motor counter. √ √ --- p. 293
4 Turn the power off. --- √ ---
5 Turn the power on in normal mode. --- √ √
CR Motor After
6 CR Belt Tension Check √ Tensimeter U-507 √ √ p. 297
replacement
CR related 7 CR Motor Measurement & Automatic Adjustment √ √ √ p. 356
parts/units 8 CR Active Damper Adjustment (Automatic) √ √ √ p. 305
9 Manual Uni-d adjustment √ PGPP √ √ p. 325
10 Manual Bi-d adjustment √ PGPP √ √ p. 327
2 Turn the power on in Serviceman mode. --- √ √
CR Scale After
3 Reset the CR Encoder Scale counter. √ √ --- p. 293
replacement
4 CR Scale Check √ √ √ p. 304


4 APG function check √ √ √ p. 301
CR Timing Belt After 5 CR Scale Check √ √ √ p. 304
replacement 6 CR Active Damper Adjustment (Automatic) √ √ √ p. 305
7 CR Motor Measurement & Automatic Adjustment √ √ √ p. 356
CR related 5 CR Scale Check √ √ √ p. 304
parts/units 6 CR Active Damper Adjustment (Automatic) √ √ √ p. 305
CR Unit (CR Assy) After
replacement
8 Head inclination manual adjustment (CR direction) √ PGPP √ √ p. 314
9 Head slant auto adjustment (PF direction) √ PGPP √ √ p. 319
10 PG Adjustment --- Thickness gauge √ √ p. 306
APG Motor Assy After
replacement
PW Sensor After 2 Turn the power on in Serviceman mode. --- √ √
replacement 3 Reset the sensor counter. √ √ --- p. 293


IM Sensor After 2 Turn the power on in Serviceman mode. --- √ √
replacement 3 Ink Mark Sensor Check & Auto Adjustment √ √ --- p. 303
CR related
5 CR Scale Check √ √ √ p. 304
parts/units
6 CR Active Damper Adjustment (Automatic) √ √ √ p. 305
CR Encoder After
replacement
9 Head slant manual adjustment (PF direction) √ PGPP √ √ p. 319
10 Manual Uni-d adjustment √ PGPP p.325
11 Manual Bi-d adjustment √ PGPP p.327
12 Reset the encoder counter. √ √ --- p. 293
1 Turn the power on in normal mode. --- √ ---
2 Dispose of waste ink. --- √ ---
3 Reset the waste ink counter --- √ ---
Before 4 Activate the ink cartridges for service. √ √ --- p. 329

Head related
replacement 5 Turn the power off. --- √ ---
Print Head
parts/units 6 Remove the ink tanks. --- √ --- p. 207
7 Install the ink cartridges for service. --- √ --- p. 207
9 Auto CR unlock & move CR to full column side √ √ √
Replacement
10 Replacement --- √ √ p. 144


12 Reset the Print Head Counter. √ √ --- p. 293
13 Head ID Input √ √ --- p.309
16 Setting [0 RIP Settings] --- √ √ p. 148
17 Load the media. --- PGPP √ √
18 Cleaning (CL3 twice + CL1 once) √ √ √ p. 313
19 Nozzle Check √ PGPP √ √ p. 311
21 Ink Mark Sensor Check & Auto Adjustment √ PGPP √ --- p. 303
22 Head slant auto adjustment (PF direction) √ PGPP √ √ p.319
Head related After
Print Head 23 Turn the power off. --- √ √
parts/units replacement
24 PG Adjustment --- Thickness gauge √ √ p.306
26 Manual Adjustment for Data Shift √ PGPP √ √ p. 321
27 Manual Uni-d Adjustment for Between 2pcs heads √ PGPP √ √ p.323
28 Manual Uni-d adjustment √ PGPP √ √ p.325
29 Manual Bi-d adjustment √ PGPP √ √ p.327
30 Activate the ink tanks. √ √ √ p. 329
31 Turn the power off. --- √ √
32 Remove the ink cartridges for service. --- √ √ p. 207
33 Install the ink tanks. --- √ √ p. 207
35 Make sure the error never recurs. --- √ √


p. 170,
Replacement 1 Replacement --- √ √
p. 177
Pump Cap Unit 2 Turn the power on in Serviceman mode. --- √ √
After
3 Reset the unit counter. √ √ --- p. 293
replacement
4 Main Unit Measurement & Automatic Adjustment √ √ √ p. 356
2 Reset the Ink Holder counter. √ √ --- p. 293
5 Dispose of waste ink. --- √ √
Ink supply
related parts/ 6 Reset the waste ink counter. √ √ √ p. 293
units
Before 7 Activate the ink cartridges for service. √ √ √ p. 329
Ink Holder
replacement 8 Turn the power off. --- √ √
9 Remove the ink tanks. --- √ √ p. 207
10 Lower the lock levers. --- √ √
12 Reset the waste ink bottle counter. --- √ √
13 Ink eject √ √ √ p. 332
p. 183,
Replacement 15 Replacement --- √ √
p. 189


16 Install the ink cartridges for service. --- √ √ p. 207
19 Reset the waste ink counter. √ √ √ p. 293
20 Initial ink charge √ √ √ p. 334
21 Nozzle Check √ PGPP √ √ p. 311
Ink supply
After
related parts/ Ink Holder 22 Cleaning (CL1 or CL2) √ √ √ p.313
replacement
units


2 Reset the tube counter. √ √ --- p. 293
Before
7 Activate the ink cartridges for service. √ √ √ p. 329
replacement
9 Remove the ink tanks. --- √ √ p. 207
10 Lower the lock levers. --- √ √
12 Reset the waste ink bottle counter. --- √ √
13 Ink eject √ √ √ p. 332
Ink supply 14 Auto CR unlock & move CR to full column side √ √ √
related parts/ Ink Tube Replacement
units 15 Replacement --- √ √ p. 196
16 Install the ink cartridges for service. --- √ √ p. 207
20 Initial ink charge √ √ √ p. 334
21 Nozzle Check √ PGPP √ √ p.311
After
22 Cleaning (CL1 or CL2) √ √ √ p.313
replacement


2 Reset the duct CR counter. √ √ --- p. 293
Before 3 Turn the power off. --- √ ---
replacement 4 Turn the power on in Serviceman mode. --- √ √
5 Tube inner pressure reduction √ √ √ p.308
6 Activate the ink cartridges for service. √ √ √ p. 329
7 Auto CR unlock & move CR to full column side √ √ √
Replacement
8 Replacement --- √ √ p. 140
Ink supply 9 Install the ink cartridges for service. --- √ √ p. 207
related parts/ Duct CR
units 10 Turn the power on in normal mode. --- √ √
11 Cleaning (CL3 twice + CL1 once) √ √ √ p.313
After 13 Activate the ink tanks. √ √ √ p. 329
replacement 14 Turn the power off. --- √ √
PF Motor After
4 PF Belt Tension check √ Tensimeter U-507 √ √ p. 338
replacement
5 PF Motor Measurement & Automatic Adjustment √ √ √ p. 356
Paper feed 6 Manual Adjustment for Media Feeding √ PGPP √ √ p. 341
related parts/
units
PF Scale After 2 Turn the power on in Serviceman mode. --- √ √
replacement 3 PC Scale Check √ √ √ p. 340
After
PF Belt 1 PF Belt Tension check √ Tensimeter U-507 √ √ p. 338
replacement
After
PE Sensor 1 Rear AD Adjustment --- Standard Sheet √ √ p. 358
replacement


Suction Fan After 2 Turn the power on in Serviceman mode. --- √ √
replacement 3 Suction Fan Adjustment √ PGPP √ √ p. 352
Reel Motor After 2 Turn the power on in Serviceman mode. --- √ ---
Paper feed replacement 3 Reset the motor counter. √ √ --- p. 293
related parts/
units Replacement 1 Replacement --- √ √ p. 249
Mounting Plate Assy After 2 Turn the power on in Serviceman mode. --- √ ---
replacement 3 Reset the motor counter. √ √ --- p. 293
Roll (ATC) Motor After 2 Turn the power on in Serviceman mode. --- √ ---
replacement 3 Reset the motor counter. √ √ --- p. 293
Replacement 1 p. 233
Heater related
Heater After 2 Turn the power on in Firmware update mode. --- √ √
parts/units
replacement 3 Heater function check √ √ √ p. 353


1 Raise up the slider’s levers. --- √ ---
Before 2 Remove Slider & chip unit --- √ ---

replacement 3 Turn the power on in Serviceman mode. --- √ ---
4 NV-RAM backup √ √ --- p. 282
6 Turn the power on in Firmware update mode. --- √ ---
7 Model Selection (at service program) √ √ ---
8 Update the firmware.(automatically power off) √ √ --- p. 291
10 NVRAM Clear OK --- √ ---
11 Select HDK/nB on Control Panel --- √ ---
Board related Main Board
parts/units (NVRAM backup OK) 12 Main Board initial setting. (automatically power off) √ √ --- p. 342
13 Install slider and chip unit --- √ ---
After 14 Lower the slider’s levers --- √ ---
replacement
15 Turn the power on in FIrmware update mode --- √ ---
16 NV-RAM restore √ √ --- p. 282
17 Turn the power off --- √ ---
20 RTC & USB ID Input √ √ --- p. 343
21 Reset the Main Board exchange counter. √ √ --- p. 346
Verify that the date/time settings are correct on the control
22 --- √ ---
panel.


Before 1 Print Cover Open --- √ ---

replacement 2 Remove Slider & chip unit --- √ ---
4 Turn the power on in Firmware update mode. --- √ ---
6 Update the firmware.(automatically power off) √ √ --- p. 291
8 NVRAM Clear OK --- √ ---
9 Select HDK/nB on Control Panel --- √ ---
10 Change flag (nB <--> HDK) √ √ --- p. 335
11 Main Board initial setting. (automatically power off) √ √ --- p. 342
12 Install old CSIC chip & slider --- √
13 Lower slider’s levers
14 Turn the power on in Serviceman mode
Board related Main Board Check result of transferring data from CSIC chip to Main
parts/units (NVRAM backup NG)
15 √ p. 347
Board
After 16 Rear AD Adjustment --- √ --- p. 358
replacement
17 Head ID Input √ √ --- p.309
19 RTC & USB ID Input √ √ --- p. 343
21 MAC Address Input √ √ --- p. 344
22 Rear AD Adjustment --- √ --- p. 358
23 Turn off the initial ink charge flag. √ √ --- p. 296
24 Serial Number Input √ √ --- p. 345
25 Turn the power off --- √ ---
26 Turn the power on in normal mode --- √ ---
27 Check the firmware version on the control panel. --- √ ---
28 Flag for extending life --- √ ---


30 Turn the power on in normal mode --- √ ---
31 Check the firmware version on the control panel. --- √ ---
32 Manual Adjustment for Data shift √ PGPP √ √ p.321
33 Manual Uni-d Adjustment for Between 2 pcs Heads. √ PGPP √ √ p.323
34 Manual Uni-d adjustment √ PGPP √ √ p.325
Main Board After 35 Manual Bi-d adjustment √ PGPP √ --- p.327
(NVRAM backup NG) replacement 36 PF Motor Measurement & Automatic Adjustment √ √ --- p. 356
37 Pump Motor Measurement & Automatic Adjustment √ √ --- p. 356
38 CR Active Damper Adjustment (Automatic) √ √ --- p. 305
39 CR Motor Measurement & Automatic Adjustment √ √ --- p. 356
Board related
41 Reset the Main Board exchange counter. √ √ --- p. 346
parts/units
Main B Board
After 3 Update the firmware. √ √ --- p. 291
(Network Board)
replacement 4 Turn the power on in Serviceman mode. --- √ ---
5 MAC Address Input √ √ --- p. 344
3 CR Motor Measurement & Automatic Adjustment √ √ --- p. 356
Power Supply Board After
4 PF Motor Measurement & Automatic Adjustment √ √ --- p. 356
replacement
5 Main Unit Measurement & Automatic Adjustment √ √ --- p. 356
6 Make the replacement date & time setting. √ √ --- p. 346

4.1.3 Adjustment Items

The following table describes the general outline of the adjustments.
Table 4-2. Adjustment Items

Service
Class Adjustment Items Overview Symptoms that the Adjustment is Needed Printer Mode Jig Media Page
Program
When the belt tension is out of standards, the
following symptoms may occur.
 Belt tension is high:
The life of the belt will be shortened. High
load applied to the carriage causes frequent
wait control over the carriage movements to
Apply a specified tension to the CR timing belt.
prevent overheating. If the tension is too high,
Measure the tension of the belt using the sonic Normal Tensimeter
CR Belt Tension Check the shaft of the motor leans and the brush in √ p.297
tensimeter to check if it is within standards. If mode U-507
the motor becomes worn, and will result in CR
not, adjust the tension.
overload error (113A).
 Belt tension is low:
The belt teeth slip and the carriage swings.
CR related The correction by the active damper does not
work and the bands (vertical bands) occur near
the side edges of paper.
Rotate the APG motor to change the PG, and see When the PG is not switched properly responding
Normal
APG function check if the PG is correctly set to its home position to the print setting, low image quality or CL √ p.301
mode
(TYP). operation abnormality may occur.
If this adjustment is not made, print quality
Manual Uni-D Reduce misalignment of ink droplets fired to Normal
problems such as misaligned lines, grainy image, √ PGPP p. 325
Adjustment paper during unidirectional printing. mode
banding may occur.
Manual Bi-D Reduce misalignment of ink droplets fired to Normal
problems such as misaligned lines, grainy image, √ PGPP p. 327
Adjustment paper during bidirectional printing. mode
banding may occur.


Service
Program
Check the CR Scale for any abnormality such as
When the CR Scale is not read properly, the Normal
CR Scale Check damage or dirt and check if the scale can be √ p.304
carriage will not operate normally. mode
properly read by the encoder.
Calibrate the active damper.
* Active damper is a function to reduce the Because the motor vibration/carriage vibration
CR Active Damper Normal
carriage vibration which causes vertical bands on cannot be reduced, vertical bands may appear on √ p.305
Adjustment (Automatic) mode
prints by outputting waveforms which have prints.
phases opposite to the motor vibration.
If this adjustment is not made, the estimation of
The CR Motor is designed to stop when the the motor temperature cannot be made properly
amount of heat generation (motor temperature) and may cause the following symptoms.
during motor operation reaches a predetermined
 Even though there is no problem with the
limit. The amount of heat generation is estimated
motor temperature, the printer pauses during
CR Motor Measurement based on the electrical characteristics of the Normal
printing because it judges that the motor is in √ p.356
CR related & Automatic Adjustment motor, which vary by motor and power supply of mode
high-temperature state.
the printer. Therefore, to get the motor control to
 Despite the motor is in a high-temperature
work properly, the electrical characteristics
values of the motor need to be measured and state, a lower motor temperature is estimated
stored in the memory on the Main Board. and the printer does not stop. This may cause
the printer to malfunction.
When the PG is out of standards, the following
symptoms may occur.
 Gap is too wide:
Unstable ink droplet paths or misaligned dots
Adjust the platen gap of the CR Unit using the Normal Thickness
PG adjustment occur, and it causes low printing quality such --- p.306
thickness gauge. mode gauge
as banding, printing misalignment, or grainy
image.
 Gap is too narrow:
The head rubs paper.


Service
Program
Reduce the pressure in the ink flow paths. Doing
Tube inner pressure this prevents ink leakage that can occur when Normal
--- √ p.308
reduction removing the Print Head or other ink related mode
parts/units.
If the new ID is not registered after replacing the
head, the head ID of the older head is used and
Register the head rank ID to the printer using the the proper drive voltage cannot be set. The
Service Program or check the currently registered following symptoms may occur.
head rank ID. Head rank ID is information
 Since the amount of ink droplets is not proper, Normal
Head ID Input needed to drive the Print Head with proper √ p.309
the color and density abnormalities are found mode
voltages so that proper amount of ink droplets are
on prints.
fired. The ID is assigned to each head and listed
 Since the amount of ink droplets turns to be
on the label on the head.
unstable, dot missing or misaligned dots occur
while printing or flushing.
When the Nozzle Check is not executed and the
Head
nozzle is clogging, the following symptoms may
related
occur.
Print the pattern on which the nozzle discharging
 The adjustment pattern is not printed properly Normal
Nozzle Check condition can be checked from the Service √ p.311
and it causes a trouble for the automatic and mode
Program.
visual check/adjustment.
 The automatic adjustments may fail or end
with an error.
When the cleaning is not executed, the following
symptoms may occur.
 Nozzle clogging is not solved and the printing
cannot be executed properly.
Specify the power and the color from the Service Normal
Cleaning  Ink droplets are not fired and nothing is √ p.313
Program and execute the head cleaning. mode
printed after the Print Head is replaced to a
new one. (Executing Initial ink charge may
solve this problem but it takes time and
consumes lots of ink.)


Service
Program
Correct inclination of the Print Head in the CR
Head inclination manual direction. Print an adjustment pattern, and
problems such as misaligned lines, grainy image, Normal
adjustment visually check the pattern to see if the adjustment √ PGPP p.314
banding, or color unevenness may occur in the mode
(CR direction) is needed. To correct the head inclination, turn
scale of Print Head surface area.
the cam.
Correct slant of the Print Head in the PF If this adjustment is not made, the gap between
direction. An adjustment pattern is printed and the Print Head surface and paper is kept uneven
Head slant auto the IM Sensor scans the pattern. Based on the (e.g.: the gap at the front side is wider than that at
Normal
adjustment scanned result, a number of steps to move the the rear side), and causes irregularity in size and √ PGPP p.319
mode
(PF direction) lever for the adjustment is displayed. Move the position of printed dots. This may be observed as
lever the number of steps to correct the head print quality problems such as grainy image,
slant. banding, or color unevenness.
To make the setting not to use the Head 2 nozzles
Manual Adjustment for Normal
that overlap with the Head 1 nozzles in the sub- --- √ PGPP p.321
Head Data Shift mode
scanning direction.
related
If the variation is not corrected, misaligned
Manual Uni-d Correct the variation of the landing positions
landing positions may cause print quality Normal
Adjustment for Between between the Head1 and Head2 in the CR √ PGPP p.323
problems such as misaligned lines, grainy mode
2pcs heads scanning direction.
images, or banding.
 Check if the Ink Mark Sensor has any trouble/
connection failure.
 Execute IMS Position Auto Correction
(pattern detecting position correction).
If the IMS does not work properly, automatic
Ink Mark Sensor check & Correct the detecting position of the print Normal
adjustments such as Manual Bi-D Adjustment √ PGPP p.303
Auto Adjustment pattern in the sub scan direction and the main mode
cannot be executed normally.
scan direction.
 Run the nozzle check and to confirm whether
the Ink Mark Sensor detects the nozzle
clogging properly.


Service
Program
If ink is not discharged when instructed to do so
Serviceman
Ink eject Discharge ink from the printer. before removing parts or units, ink may leak from √ p.332
mode
the printer and contaminate surroundings.
Clean the ink flow paths to resolve the solidified
ink in the paths and clogging of nozzles of the If the printer is left unused for a long period
Print Head. Or, when leaving the printer unused without doing this after discharging ink, the ink
Ink Supply Normal Cleaning
Tube inner cleaning for a long period, doing this in advance can left in the ink flow paths may get solidified. Once √ p.333
related mode cartridge
prevent ink from getting solidified. Use the the ink becomes solidified, charging new ink may
Cleaning Cartridge for service and the Service become impossible or dot missing may occur.
Program.
If this is not executed after discharging ink, air
Charge ink in the ink flow paths. Execute from Serviceman
Initial ink charge bubbles will remain in the ink tubes and may √ p.334
the Service Program. mode
cause dot missing.


Service
Program
The Pump Cap Motor is designed to stop when If this adjustment is not made, the estimation of
the amount of heat generation (motor the motor temperature cannot be made properly
temperature) during motor operation reaches a and may cause the following symptoms.
predetermined limit. The amount of heat  Even though there is no problem with the
generation is estimated based on the electrical motor temperature, the printer pauses during
Main Unit Measurement Normal
characteristics of the motor, which vary by motor printing because it judges that the motor is in √ p.356
& Automatic Adjustment mode
and power supply of the printer. Therefore, to get high-temperature state.
the motor control to work properly, the electrical  Despite the motor is in a high-temperature
Ink Supply characteristics values of the motor need to be state, a lower motor temperature is estimated
related measured and stored in the memory on the Main and the printer does not stop. This may cause
Board. the printer to malfunction.
Switch between Ink Activates the ink cartridges for service or ink Normal
When cartridges or tanks are not recognized √ p.329
cartridges and Ink tanks tanks. mode
Activation of Cleaning Normal
Activates the cleaning cartridges. When the cleaning cartridges are not recognized √ p.331
cartridges mode
Change flag Switches the mode between high density black Normal
--- √ p.335
(nB <--> HDK) and normal black. mode
When the belt tension is out of standards, the
following symptoms may occur.
 Belt tension is high:
The life of the belt will be shortened. High
load applied to the PF motor causes frequent
Apply a specified tension to the PF timing belt.
Media wait controls during paper feeding to prevent
Measure the tension of the belt using the sonic Normal Tensimeter
Feed PF Belt Tension check overheating. If the tension is too high, the √ p.338
tensimeter to check if it is within standards. If mode U-507
related shaft of the motor leans and the brush in the
not, adjust the tension.
motor becomes worn, and will result in PF
motor overload error (112A).
 Belt tension is low:
The belt teeth slip and paper cannot be fed
properly.


Service
Program
Manual Adjustment for Adjusts the amount of media feeding which If paper feeding accuracy lowers, print quality Normal
√ PGPP p.341
Media Feeding usually varies between the printers. problems such as banding may occur. mode
Check the PF Scale for any abnormality such as When the PF Scale is not read properly, paper
Normal
PF Scale Check damage or dirt and check if the scale can be feeding may become impossible and an error may √ p.340
mode
properly read by the encoder. occur.
If this adjustment is not made, the estimation of
The PF Motor is designed to stop when the the motor temperature cannot be made properly
amount of heat generation (motor temperature) and may cause the following symptoms.
during motor operation reaches a predetermined
 Even though there is no problem with the
limit. The amount of heat generation is estimated
motor temperature, the printer pauses during
PF Motor Measurement based on the electrical characteristics of the Normal
Media printing because it judges that the motor is in √ p.356
& Automatic Adjustment motor, which vary by motor and power supply of mode
Feed high-temperature state.
the printer. Therefore, to get the motor control to
related  Despite the motor is in a high-temperature
work properly, the electrical characteristics
values of the motor need to be measured and state, a lower motor temperature is estimated
stored in the memory on the Main Board. and the printer does not stop. This may cause
the printer to malfunction.
Adjust the detection sensitivity of the PE Sensor
so that it can recognize the paper inserted in the
printer correctly. Let the sensor detect the If the adjustment is not executed, paper
Standard Sheet (translucent media) which is hard recognition failures may occur (e.g. paper empty Serviceman Standard
Rear AD Adjustment √ p.358
to recognize to check the result on the Control error occurs even with paper inserted, some mode Sheet
Panel. (By using the media which is hard to media are not recognized).
recognize, paper can be recognized regardless of
the environmental condition or the media)


Service
Program
Make a backup of data stored in the NVRAM or Serviceman
NVRAM Backup/Restore --- √ p.282
restore the data from a backup. mode
If the adjustment is not executed, a maintenance
Check the current setting of the RTC and the Serviceman
RTC & USB ID Input error (RTC setting error) or USB recognition √ p.343
USB ID. Write the correct information as needed. mode
error occurs.
Read and check the MAC address of the printer. If the address is not input or a wrong address is Serviceman
MAC Address Input √ p.344
Write a new MAC address as needed. set, a network connection trouble occurs. mode
Boards
Related If the serial number is not input or a wrong
Check the serial number currently set to the Serviceman
Serial Number Input number is set, it makes service management √ p.345
printer. Write the correct information as needed. mode
(such as the print/NVRAM) harder.
Main Board Exchange Write the date and time when the Main Board is If this is not made, correct service history is not Normal
√ p.346
Counter replaced to the NVRAM. recorded. mode
Power Supply Unit
Write the date and time when the Power Supply If this is not made, correct service history is not Normal
Replacement Date & √ p.346
Board is replaced to the NVRAM. recorded. mode
Time setting
USB Port and Network Check the USB connection and network Normal
--- √ p.351
Communication Check connection of the printer. mode
Normal
Suction Fan Adjustment Run a operation check of the Suction Fan. --- √ p.352
mode
Normal
Heater function check Run a operation check of the heaters. --- √ p.353
mode
Others Reset the panel settings to their defaults using the
Panel Setting Reset & Job Normal
Control Panel, and reset the user job history using --- √ p.354
History Reset mode
the Service Program.
Check if the LCD on the Control Panel functions Serviceman
LCD operation check --- p.355
normally. mode
Check if the buttons on the Control Panel Serviceman
Buttons operation check --- p.355
function normally. mode

4.1.4 Tools/Consumables for Adjustments  Consumables
The tables below show the tools required for adjusting this printer. Table 4-5. Consumables
Consumable Name Code Target Adjustment
 Hardware Tools
Premium Glossy Photo
--- Most of the adjustments
Table 4-3. Hardware tools Paper (250)
Tool Name Code Target Adjustment BK: 1630421
 CR Belt Tension Adjustment C: 1630422
Sonic tensimeter U-507 1294120
 PF Belt Tension Adjustment Ink cartridge for service M: 1630423 Most of the adjustments
Standard Sheet (JETRAS Y: 1630424
1476228 Operation check of the PE sensor. HDK: 1698175
JP-D300S)
Commercially Cleaning Cartridge (CL14) 1651404 Most of the adjustments
Thickness Gauge PG Adjustment
available
 Head inclination manual adjustment (CR
Commercially direction)
Calibrated Loupe
available  Head slant manual adjustment (PF
direction)
 Software Tools
Table 4-4. Software tools

Software Name Explanation
Service Program Used for almost all of the required adjustments.
Communication Driver To connect with the printer.
Latest version of firmware ---
C A U T IO N Bring back the following brought and used items, then dispose of
them based on the local regulations in your country, please.
 Ink cartridges
 Cleaning cartridges
 Draining cartridges
Especially in case of ink cartridges in Europe, please refer to the

following web site to confirm the regulation in detail.
ECO Info: http://www.epson.eu/weee (available from July 2015)

4.1.5 Service Program Basic Operations

This section describes the basic operations of the Service Program.
C A U T IO N  Save the Service Program on the desktop or directly under the

C drive. If the storage location is deep in the hierarchy, some
program tools may not work correctly.
 If adjust the print adjustment, select the Media Setup menu
and change the Select Media setting to RIP Setting “0” on the
control panel.
 System Requirements
 OS: Windows Vista, 7, 8/8.1
 Interface: USB, Network
C H E C K The network can be used only for the following two adjustments.
P O IN T  MAC Address Input
 USB Port and Network Communication Check
 Startup
1. Install the Communication Driver.
2. Double-click the “servprog.exe”. A screen that asks if you want to carry out Figure 4-1. Service Program
the NVRAM Backup appears.
3. Select Yes to start the NVRAM Backup tool, or select No to display the
Service Program Menu screen.
4. Select the printer you want to adjust from Model Selection, and start the
adjustment.

4.2 NV-RAM BACKUP / NVRAM Viewer

Parameters stored in the NVRAM on the Main Board are read/stored and written onto
the other NVRAM on the Main Board using this menu.
Also, the read parameter information is displayed on the computer screen.
4.2.1 NVRAM Read Procedure

1. Turn the printer ON in the Normal Mode.
2. Click [GET INFO] on the NVRAM Read field to start reading the parameters.
The save dialog box appears when the reading is completed, then specify a file
name and location to save the file.
 To view the NVRAM information:
Click [DISPLAY INFO] to display another screen of the NVRAM Viewer.
Figure 4-2. [NVRAM BACKUP] Screen
ADJUSTMENT NV-RAM BACKUP / NVRAM Viewer 282

4.2.2 NVRAM Viewer Basic Operation DESCRIPTION

The following functions are provided.  Life Parts Operation History
1. Life Parts Operation History
1
2. Utilization History
3. Error History
4. Basic information
PROCEDURE
1. Click [OPEN], and select NVRAM data.

2. Select the tab you want to check.
3. Click [Excel Export] to save the data on the selected tab as a CSV file.
2 3 4 5 6
7
Figure 4-3. [Life Parts Operation History] Screen
1 Total Print Dimension Total printed area. The unit is m2.

2 Items ---
3 Current Value Life count for each part or unit.
4 Limit Displays the life limit of the part if it has.

Displays the percentage of Current Value (4) considering the Limit  Utilization History
5 Situation
(4) as 100%.
 Case 1. Displays future date
The estimated date when the part or unit reached the end of its
service life.
End of Life Estimated  Case 2. Displays past date
6 Date / Actual Date The actual date when the part or unit reached the end of its
(YY/MM/DD) service life.
 Case 3. Displays other data
If Situation is 0% or if the initial ink charge date equals the
date of obtaining NVRAM, displays “-“.
 Case 1. Displays the number
In the condition that the part or unit reached the end of its
Number of Agreed service life, displays the summation that user pressed the
7
Times Agreement by pannel.
 Case 2. Displays “-“
Firmware to extend life is NOT installed.
1 2
Figure 4-4. [Utilization History] Screen
1 Item ---
2 Current Value Displays the current value per item.

 Error History  Basic Information
2
3 4
5
6 7 8
1 2
Figure 4-5. [Error History] Screen Figure 4-6. [Basic Information] Screen
1 Normal Errors History The history of normal errors. 1 Item ---

Displays the types of the most recent six normal errors saved 2 Current Value The current value of the item.
2 Type
in the NVRAM.
3 Error Content Information of the error.
Displays the time stamps of the most recent six normal
4 Time Stamp
errors.
Service Calls Errors
5 The history of service call errors.
History
Displays the types of the most recent six service call errors
6 Type
saved in the NVRAM.
7 Error Content Information of the error.
Displays the time stamps of the most recent six service call
8 Time Stamp
errors.

INFORMATION SAVED TO CSV FILES  Utilization History
Table 4-7. Utilization History

 Life Parts Operation History
Item Description
Table 4-6. List Parts Operation History
Head / Cap Maintenance
Execution times (total) ---
Item Description Executions
Total Print Dimension Total printed area. The unit is m2. Print Head Number of Times Displays the Print Head
PF Roller Center Support broken-down by Temperature temperature when the printer
when Power ON is turned on.
Print Head_1(Full) Number of Shots/Line Operation history (the following Displays the number of sheets
Print Head_2(Home) Number of Shots/Line information is displayed for each of Print Head Print Pages broken
printed by Print Head
the items.) down by temperature
Duct CR Buffer Counter temperature.
 Current Value
Pump Cap Unit 1 Max. Temperature when print
 Limit ---
Pump Cap Unit 2 starts (Print Head)
 Situation
Ink Holder Pump Counter (driving times)  End of Life Estimation (YY/MM/
Temperature Min. Temperature when print
---
DD) starts (Print Head)
Ink Tube
CR passes Print Head Temperature when
CR Motor ---
Power ON (Max.)
Print Head Temperature when
---
C A U T IO N There is no life history of PF Roller Center Support and Ink Tank Power ON (Min.)
(Average: 1.5 years). PV After-Heater broken-down Displays the number of
by Temperature setting (30 - sheets printed by After
The Ink Tank and PF Roller Center Support replaces at the same 55 Deg. C) Heater temperature.
time. Print Head CL1s (Times) ---
Print Head CL2s (Times) ---
Cleanings (Counter to be
reset) Print Head CL3s (Times) ---
Print Head SSCLs (Times)
---
(only for Service Engineer)
Cumulative CL Times (non
rewritable) Print Head CL3s (Times) ---
Print Head SSCLs (Times)
---
(only for Service Engineer)

Table 4-7. Utilization History Table 4-7. Utilization History

Item Description Item Description
Recovered history for Ink Power Saving Mode (Number
---
mixing error (by Panel --- of Times)
Ink mixing error operation) Power ON Time Print Ratio Time of Power Saving Mode ---
Cleaning history for Ink Distance of CR Movements The total travel distance of the
---
mixing error (by Serviceman) (non rewritable) CR Unit.
Consumed Ink Amount Paper Size (Data) ---
---
<Epson Genuine>
Paper Size (Paper Width) ---
Consumed Ink Amount <Non PW Detection (Graph)
--- Print Pages in PW Detector
Genuine> ---
OFF
Ink chip (Black) Replacement
--- APG Motor Replacement Replacement history of the
History
Times APG Motor.
Ink Tank Ink chip (Yellow)
--- ATC (Roll) Motor Replacement history of the
Replacement History
Replacement Times ATC Motor.
Ink chip (Magenta)
--- Replacement history of the CR
Replacement History CR Motor Replacement Times
Motor.
Ink chip (Cyan) Replacement
--- CR Encoder Replacement Replacement history of the CR
History
Times Encoder.
Ink chip Replacement History ---
Replacement history of the CR
Total Power ON Time (min) --- CR Scale Replacement Times
Scale.
Accumulated time that after PW Sensor Replacement Replacement history of the
Heater On Time
heater had been powered. Times PW Sensor.
Total Print Time --- Parts Replacement Date
Replacement history of the Ink
Tube Replacement Times
Continuous Power ON Time Tube.
---
(Max.) Replacement history of the PF
PF Motor Replacement Times
Print Time (Max.) --- Motor.
Power ON Time Print Ratio Displays the number of times Print Head 1 (Full) Replacement history of the
that the printer is turned off by Replacement Times Print Head 1.
Power ON - OFF Times
time period that the product Print Head 2 (Home) Replacement history of the
had been powered. Replacement Times Print Head 2.
Ratio of Print in Power ON - Reel Motor Replacement Replacement history of the
---
OFF hours (Power ON hours) Times Reel Motor.
Power On - OFF Interval ---
Self Sealing Valve 2 Replacement history of the
Power OFF Time (Max.) Replacement Times Duct CR.

Table 4-7. Utilization History  Errors History

Item Description
Table 4-8. Errors History
Ink Holder1 (Home) The number of replacements
Item Description
Replacement Times of the Ink Holder 1.
Normal Errors History Displays the most recent six errors and their time stamps.
Ink Holder2 (Full) The number of replacements
Replacement Times of the Ink Holder 2. Displays the most recent six service call errors and their time
Service Calls Errors History
stamps.
Replacement history of the
Pump Cap Unit1 (Full) Error History Displays the number of occurrences of each service call error.
Pump Cap Unit 1 (Pump
Replacement Times
Motor). Displays the number of occurrences of normal errors and
Parts Replacement Date Number of Errors
Replacement history of the service call errors.
Pump Cap Unit2 (Home)
Pump Cap Unit 1 (Pump
Replacement Times  Basic Information
Motor).
Main Board Replacement Replacement history of the Table 4-9. Basic Information
Times Main Board.
Item Description
Power Supply Unit Replacement history of the
Replacement Times Power Supply Board. Model Product name
CR Motor Printer Serial No. Serial number of the printer.
PF Motor Printer Firmware Version The version of the firmware installed on the printer.
APG Motor Initial Ink Charge Date & Time Date and time when the initial ink charge was done.
Pump Motor (Pump Cap Black (nB/HDK) Displays the selected black ink.
Unit1) (Full) Setting Data Displays the settings made by the control panel menus.
Pump Motor (Pump Cap Displays the number of times
Number of times about Heat
Unit2) (Home) about heat limits of each
Limits of each motor
Pump Motor (Ink Holder1) motor.
(Home)
Pump Motor (Ink Holder2)
(Full)
ATC (Roll) Motor
Reel Motor

4.3 ADJUSTMENTS (Individual)

This mode executes the adjustment required for the repair individually.
PROCEDURE
1. Click [ADJUSTMENTS (Individual)] from the main menu.

2. Select the adjustment item that you want to execute and click [OK].
3. Follow the instructions on the screen to execute the adjustment.
4. Click [Back] to return to the main menu.
Figure 4-7. ADJUSTMENTS (Individual)
ADJUSTMENT ADJUSTMENTS (Individual) 289

4.4 ADJUSTMENTS (Sequence)

This mode displays the required adjustments per replaced part and executes the
adjustments in order.
The Service Program for this printer includes the following items in addition to the
parts replacement.
 Remedy for ink clogging due to a long unused period
 Preparation before leaving the printer unused
 Cancellation of the wrong ink mixture error
 Preparation for transport (before transportation)
 Preparation for installation (after transportation)
PROCEDURE
1. Click [ADJUSTMENTS (Sequence)] from the main menu.

2. Select the name of the replaced part.
3. Select the adjustment item that you want to execute and click [OK].
4. Follow the instructions on the screen to execute the adjustment.
5. Click [Finish] to return to the adjustment item list per part after the adjustment.
6. Click [Back] to return to the main menu.
C H E C K The text of the executed adjustment is colored to be distinguished.

P O IN T The colored text gets back to normal by returning to the main Figure 4-8. ADJUSTMENTS (Sequence)
menu once.
ADJUSTMENT ADJUSTMENTS (Sequence) 290

4.5 Installing Firmware

This section explains how to update the firmware. The firmware of this printer is
written in the Flash ROM on the Main Board. If the Main Board is replaced or the
firmware needs to be updated, follow the procedure below to write the firmware to the
Flash ROM.
Following two kinds of firmware are provided.

 Main firmware
 Network firmware
PROCEDURE
1. Turn both the printer and computer OFF and connect them with a USB cable.
C H E C K All firmwares can be installed to the printer via USB cable

P O IN T connection.
Figure 4-9. FIRMWARE UPDATE TOOL
6. Click [Browse] of the F/W Update list to select the firmware data to be installed.
7. Click [Update] to transfer the firmware data.
C A U T IO N When updating starts, a progress bar is displayed on the Control
3. Turn the printer ON in the F/W update mode. Panel of the printer. Make sure not to turn off the printer until
Turn the power ON while pressing [Media setup] + [Media feed] + updating is complete. Otherwise, the printer may not operate
[Maintenance]. normally.
4. Start the Service Program and click [FIRMWARE UPDATE TOOL] from the
main menu. 8. When writing the firmware is completed, the printer will be rebooted
automatically.
5. Click [Get Information] to check the current F/W version.
9. Click [Exit].
ADJUSTMENT Installing Firmware 291

4.6 Image & Test Print

The following functions are provided.
1. Prints an image file (.PRN file)
2. Transfers the .PRN file
PROCEDURE
1. Click [IMAGE PRINT] from the main menu.

2. Click [Reference] to specify a file to print.
3. Click [Print].
Figure 4-10. [IMAGE PRINT] Screen
C A U T IO N Be sure to write the file name of image file within 80 characters.
ADJUSTMENT Image & Test Print 292

4.7 Counter Reset

Whenever the parts/units which have life counter are replaced, the corresponding life
counter must be reset. This is important to replace those parts/units at the correct
timing.
EXECUTION MODE
Serviceman Mode
PROCEDURE
1. Turn the printer ON in the Serviceman Mode.

Turn the power ON while pressing [Menu] + [Back] + [OK].
2. Start the Service Program and click [FLAG CHANGE & COUNTER RESET]
from the main menu.
3. Choose one of the counter reset menus to be reset.
4. Click [Run] to reset the counter.
5. Click [Finish]. Figure 4-11. [FLAG CHANGE & COUNTER RESET] Screen
6. Restart the printer. Table 4-10. Clear Counter Menu List

Replaced Part/Unit Clear Menu Name
7. With NVRAM Viewer, verify that the counter has been reset to “0”.
CR Motor CR Motor Counter
8. Turn the printer OFF.
PF Motor PF Motor Counter
APG Motor Assy APG Motor Assy Counter
Motors
Reel Motor Reel Motor Counter
Mounting Plate Assy Reel Gear Counter
ATC Motor ATC Motor Counter
Printhead Print Head Counter
Duct CR Selfsealing Valve Counter
Ink Pump Cap Unit Pump Cap Unit Counter
System Ink Holder Ink Holder Counter
Ink tubes Ink tube Counter
Waste ink bottle Waste ink bottle counter
ADJUSTMENT Counter Reset 293

Table 4-10. Clear Counter Menu List

Replaced Part/Unit Clear Menu Name
CR Scale CR Encoder Scale counter
Mecha-
PW Sensor PW Sensor Counter
nism
CR Encoder CR Encoder Sensor Counter
C H E C K The history of the Counter Clear can be checked per counter on the
P O IN T NVRAM Viewer (P. 282).
ADJUSTMENT Counter Reset 294

4.8 References
This function allows you to view the following information (PDF files).
 Control panel menus in the Normal Mode
 Control panel menus in the Serviceman Mode
 Wiring diagrams
PROCEDURE
1. Click [References] from the main menu.

2. Select Panel Menu Map or Wiring Diagrams and click [Open].
Figure 4-12. References
ADJUSTMENT References 295

4.9 Initial Ink Charge Flag

PROCEDURE

2. Start the Service Program and select Initial Ink Charge Flag.
3. Select ON or OFF and click [Run].
Figure 4-13. [Initial Ink Charge Flag] Screen
ADJUSTMENT Initial Ink Charge Flag 296

4.10 CR Related Adjustments
4.10.1 CR Belt Tension Check

REQUIRED TOOLS
 Sonic tensimeter U-507

 Any tools to flip the belt
STANDARD VALUE
 48 ± 2 N
EXECUTION MODE
Normal Mode
Figure 4-14. [CR Belt Tension Check] Screen
PROCEDURE
1. Remove the following parts in advance.

 Left Cover (P. 114)
2. When any paper is loaded, remove it.
3. Turn the printer ON.
4. Start the Service Program and select CR Belt Tension Check.
5. Click [Run].
The CR Unit moves left and right three times, and then moves to the center.
ADJUSTMENT CR Related Adjustments 297

6. Check the CR TIMING BELT while the CR UNIT is running. 7. Loosen the screw A of the driven pulley holder.
 The belt runs in the middle of the driven pulley: 8. Adjust the Driven Pulley slant with the slant adjusting screw. After adjusting the
Finish. Perform the <belt tension measurement> (Step 9). slant, attach the screw A and return to Step 4.
 When the belt moves back and forth between both sides or runs on either side:
 The belt leans to the rear side of the driven pulley:
Go to Step 7.
Rotate the screw in a counterclockwise.
 The belt leans to the front side of the Driven Pulley:
Rotate the screw in a clockwise.
Driven pulley
Slant adjusting
screw
Screw A
Figure 4-16. Screw A and slant adjusting screw
Upper CR TIMING
Driven BELT
pulley

Figure 4-15. Slant Adjustment of Driven Pulley

9. <Belt tension measurement> 11. Press [MEASURE] on the tensimeter and flip the belt with tweezers or a similar
Input the following values to the tensimeter. tool.
 MASS: 1.0 g/m
C A U T IO N  Be sure to measure the tension of the belt on the upper side. If
 WIDTH: 10.0 mm/R you measure the tension of the belt on the lower side, the
measuring value may be inaccurate.
 SPAN: 1170 mm
 Flip the belt as weak as the tensimeter can measure it.
10. Bring the microphone of the tensimeter closer to the position shown in Figure  Be careful not to let the microphone touch the belt when
4-17. flipping the belt.
C H E C K Bring the microphone within 5 mm from the belt but do not let it 12. Measure the belt tension for three times, and check if the average is within the
P O IN T touch the belt. standards.
 Within the standards: Go to Step 13
 Out of the standards: Go to Step 15
13. Click [Finish].
14. Turn the printer OFF to finish the adjustment.

15. Loosen the two screws that secure the driven pulley holder.
Upper timing belt
16. Turn the adjustment screw to adjust the belt tension.
 If larger than standard value: Turn the screw counterclockwise.
 If smaller than standard value: Turn the screw clockwise.
After adjusting the tension, tighten the screws loosened in Step 15, and then back
to Step 10.
C H E C K The tension is changed about 1.58N by turning the adjusting screw

P O IN T for a quarter turn.
Measuring microphone
Driven Pulley Holder

Center
Screws
(Measurement point) CR Unit
Driven Pulley
Figure 4-17. Measuring the belt tension
Tension adjustment
screw (black)
Figure 4-18. Tension adjustment screw

4.10.2 APG Function Check 5. Check that the mark on the top of the APG cam is “++”.
Run the check two times and check the mark.
EXECUTION MODE  “Typ” is on the top: Go to Step 7
Normal Mode  “Typ” is not on the top: Go to Step 6
PROCEDURE
Mark on the top
1. Remove the following parts in advance.

 Right Cover (P. 108)
2. Turn the printer ON. ++
3. Start the Service Program and select APG function check.

4. Click [Run].
The APG mechanism moves.
APG cam
Figure 4-20. Checking the APG cam
Figure 4-19. [APG function check] Screen

6. Since the APG is not switched correctly, execute the following remedy responding
to the symptom.
Symptom Remedy
The CR Unit does not move to the APG Since the CR Unit may not move smoothly,
switch position (home position). lubricate the CR Unit. (P. 200)
The CR Unit moves to the APG switch Since the APG Motor may not operate, check the
position but the APG mechanism does not wiring of the APG Motor. If there is no trouble
operate. for the wiring, replace the APG Motor. (P. 167)
Since the APG mechanism on the CR Unit may
The APG mechanism operates but the APG
not have been installed correctly, replace the CR
is not switched correctly.
Unit. (P. 200)
After taking the above measure, return to Step 4 to check again.

7. Click [Finish].

4.10.3 Ink Mark Sensor Check & Auto Adjustment

PAPER USED
 Size: 24 inch length or longer

 Type: Premium Glossy Photo Paper (250)
EXECUTION MODE
Normal Mode
PROCEDURE
1. Load the paper in the printer.

3. On the control panel, select the Media Setup menu and change the Select Media
setting to RIP Settings “0”. Figure 4-21. [Ink Mark Sensor check & Auto Adjustment] Screen
4. Start the Service Program and select Ink Mark Sensor check & Auto
Adjustment.
5. Click [Run].
The adjustment pattern will be printed.
6. The printed pattern is scanned by the Ink Mark Sensor and the adjustment is made
automatically.
If the adjustment failed, clean the Ink Mark Sensor or replace it. DS:<-2> Dm:<4> Dm’ :<-6> A/D:<207> D/A:<74>
7. Click [Finish].
0 5
Check1 = OK, Check2 = OK

Figure 4-22. Adjustment Pattern

4.10.4 CR Scale Check 4. Since the CR Scale is not scanned correctly, clean the scale using ethanol. If the
scale still cannot be read properly, replace the CR Encoder (P. 166) or the CR
EXECUTION MODE Scale (P. 157). After replacing the part, return to Step 3 to check again.
5. Click [Finish].
Normal Mode
PROCEDURE

2. Start the Service Program and select CR Scale Check.
3. Click [Run]. CR Scale CR Encoder
The CR Unit moves left and right four times, and then the CR Encoder starts to
read the scale.
 The result is OK: Go to Step 5
 The result is NG: Go to Step 4
Figure 4-24. CR Encoder and Scale Check
Figure 4-23. [CR Scale Check] Screen

4.10.5 CR Active Damper Auto Adjustment

EXECUTION MODE
Normal Mode
PROCEDURE

3. Start the Service Program and select CR Active Damper Adjustment
(Automatic).
4. Click [Run] to execute the calibration of the CR active damper.
5. If a completion message appears, click [OK].
6. Click [Finish].
Figure 4-25. [CR Active Damper Adjustment] Screen

4.10.6 PG Adjustment
Right side of Head
C A U T IO N This adjustment adjusts the gap between the Print Head and the
Front Upper Print Head 2
platen. Because the platen expands with heat of the heaters, the Metal pointer
accurate gap cannot be measured immediately after turning off the
printer. Wait until the platen cools down before starting the
adjustment.
REQUIRED TOOL
Thickness gauge Print Head 2 Thickness gauge Print Head 1 Thickness gauge
STANDARD VALUE Metal pointer

Adjustment Plate
 2.65 pass
 2.75 stop
Thickness gauge
PROCEDURE

Thickness gauge
2. Move the Media Loading Lever to the front side, and set it to the Hold position.
Place the thickness gauge while aligning Set the thickness gauge aligning the top
3. Unlock the CR Unit, and move the unit to the center of the platen. (P. 98)
the left end of the gauge with the metal edge with the upper right corners of the
pointer. hollows on the Adjustment Plate.
4. Make sure the PG is ++ (2.6mm).
Figure 4-26. Placing the Thickness Gauge (right side)
5. Place the thickness gauge referring Figure 4-26 and Figure 4-27, and slowly move
the CR unit over the platen.
C A U T IO N Carefully move the CR Unit so that it does not contact with the
nozzle surface of the Print Head.

7. Move the CR Unit to the left end, and remove the CR Cover. (P. 139)
Left side of Head
Upper Print Head 2 8. Loosen the screws that secure the left and right PG adjustment levers.
Front
Metal pointer
Metal pointer 9. Move the PG adjustment levers up and down to change the gap (PG).
10. Tighten the screws to secure the PG adjustment levers, and go back to Step 5, and
repeat the procedure until the height of the CR Unit falls inside the standard range.
PG Adjustment Levers
Thickness gauge Print Head 1 Thickness gauge Print Head 1 Raise the lever to move the CR up
Lower the lever to move the CR down
Metal pointer
Thickness gauge
Suction hole
Thickness gauge
Place the thickness gauge while aligning Set the thickness gauge aligning the top
the left end of the gauge with the metal edge with the upper edge of the suction
pointer. holes. Fixing screws
Figure 4-27. Placing the Thickness Gauge (left side)
6. Measure the height of the CR Unit to see if it is within the standards.

(Measure at the both left and right of the CR Unit. Right and left set position refer
Figure 4-28. PG Adjustment Levers
to Figure 4-26 and Figure 4-27)
 Within the standards: Cap the Print Head and end the adjustment.
 Out of the standards: Go to Step 7.

4.11 Head Related Checks and Adjustments C H E C K After the printer is recovered from the depressurized state, perform
P O IN T CL3 a few times.
4.11.1 Tube Inner Pressure Reduction

EXECUTION MODE
Normal Mode
PROCEDURE

2. Start the Service Program and select Tube inner pressure reduction.
3. Click [Run].
The pressure inside the ink flow paths will be reduced.
Figure 4-29. [Tube inner pressure reduction] Screen

4. Click [Finish].
ADJUSTMENT Head Related Checks and Adjustments 308

4.11.2 Head ID Input C H E C K  For ID, alphabets, numbers, and symbols (*, +, -, %, $, :) are
P O IN T used.
EXECUTION MODE  The characters inside the red box shown below are the Head
Rank ID. The spaces are not included.
Normal Mode
PROCEDURE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1. Write down the Head Rank ID (49 digits) that is printed on the ID label on a new 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Print Head. 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
QR code
31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
49 NA NA NA NA NA
Input
ID Label
Figure 4-30. ID label

2. Assemble the printer.

4. Start the Service Program and select Head ID Input.
5. Enter the 49-digit ID into the edit boxes in the same way as indicated on the label.
(Enter the digits continuously without pressing the Space, Enter, or Tab key.)
Figure 4-31. [Head ID Input] Screen

6. Click [Write].
7. Click [Finish]. The printer is turned off automatically.

4.11.3 Nozzle Check

PAPER USED
 Size: 16 inches length or longer

EXECUTION MODE
Normal Mode
PROCEDURE
1. Load the paper into the printer.

3. Start the Service Program and select Nozzle Check.
Figure 4-32. [Nozzle Check] Screen
4. Select Nozzle Check Pattern Print or Alignment Check Pattern Print, and
click [Run].
The selected check pattern is printed.
5. Examine the patterns for any missing segments, broken lines, or misaligned lines.
6. If any of the above symptoms is observed, run the cleaning and print the pattern
again to see if the problem is solved.
7. Click [Finish].
Figure 4-33. Nozzle check pattern

C (A Line) Vm (B Line) Y (C Line) Bk (D Line)
Bk (G Line) Y (H Line) Vm (I Line) C (J Line)
Figure 4-34. Alignment check pattern

4.11.4 Cleaning
EXECUTION MODE
Normal Mode
PROCEDURE

2. Start the Service Program and select Cleaning.
3. Select one of the cleaning levels and target nozzles, and click [Run].
Cleaning is executed.
4. Click [Finish].
Figure 4-35. [Cleaning] Screen

4.11.5 Head Inclination Manual Adjustment (CR

direction)
PAPER USED

EXECUTION MODE
Normal Mode
PROCEDURE

Figure 4-36. [Head inclination manual adjustment (CR direction)] Screen
3. From the panel menu, select the Media Setup menu, and change the Select Media
to RIP Setting “0”.
4. Start the Service Program and select Head inclination manual adjustment (CR
direction).
5. Click [Run]. The adjustment pattern is printed.

6. Check the pattern shown with the red circle visually. 7. Press the F11 key of the keyboard to unlock the CR unit.
8. Move the CR unit to the left end of the printer.
9. Remove the CR Cover. (P. 139)
10. Loosen the six screws (A, B, C, D, E, F) that secure the Duct CR.
11. Loosen the six screws that secure the Head Holders (three screws each).
 Head 1: G, H, I
Adjustment pattern
(Rough adjustment)
 Head 2: J, K, L
12. Loosen the two screws (Bit No.1) that secures the Head Inclination Adjustment
Cams (one screw each)
 Head 1: M
 Head 2: N
C A U T IO N Be careful not to completely remove the screw that secures the

Adjustment Knob.
13. Turn the Adjustment Knob to correct the head inclination.

See Figure 4-38 for which direction to turn the knob.
OK
Paper feed C A U T IO N Move the Duct CR to the right and to the left a few times before and
direction after rotating the Adjustment Knob. Since the Print Head may be
NG stuck on the CR Unit with ink, the Print Head may not move even
the Adjustment Knob is rotated unless the Duct CR is moved
beforehand.
NG
Misalignment within one-dot’s width is OK.
Figure 4-37. Judgement

14. Tighten the six screws to secure the Head Holders (three screws each). Tighten the
screws in the order shown below.
 Head 1: G --> H --> I
 Head 2: J --> K --> L
15. Tighten the screw to secure the Adjustment Knob.
K 16. Tighten the six screws to secure the Duct CR. (there is no particular order to
J tighten them.)
C
H A
G 17. Attach the CR Cover.
F D 18. Press the F12 key of the keyboard to lock the CR unit.
B
L N 19. Print the pattern and see if the inclination is corrected. If not, repeat the procedure
E until normal pattern is printed.
I
M C H E C K  For which direction to turn the knob, see below.
P O IN T
Duct CR When Cyan lines lie When Cyan lines lie

Paper feed
direction below Black lines, above Black lines,
turn counterclockwise turn clockwise
Plus direction
 The lines move about one-dot’s width when the knob is moved
by five or six notches.
Minus direction
Adjustment Knob
Figure 4-38. Correcting the Head Inclination


21. Check the pattern shown with the red circle and make sure the spaces between the
Paper feed
C lines (nozzle C) and the C lines (nozzle J) are equal. direction
Adjustment pattern
(Fine adjustment) C line (nozzle C)
C line (nozzle J)
Evenly
divided
NG OK NG
Figure 4-39. Judgement
22. Perform the Step7 to Step12.
23. Turn the Adjustment Knob to correct the head inclination (refer to Step13).

C H E C K  For which direction to turn the knob, see below.

P O IN T
C line (nozzle C)
C line (nozzle J)
Paper feed If C line (nozzle C) is If C line (nozzle C) is

direction close to the top edge of close to the bottom edge
the C line (nozzle J) of the C line (nozzle J)
turn clockwise turn counterclockwise
 The lines move about one-dot’s width when the knob is moved
by two notches.
24. Perform the Step14 to Step19.

25. When finished, click [Finish] and turn the printer OFF.

4.11.6 Head Slant Auto Adjustment (PF direction)

PAPER USED

EXECUTION MODE
Normal Mode

Prints the pattern
3. From the panel menu, select the Media Setup menu, and change the Select Media
to RIP Setting “0”.
4. Start the Service Program and select Head slant auto adjustment (PF direction).
6. The printed pattern is scanned by the Ink Mark Sensor and the required adjustment
level (how much the Adjustment Knob should be moved) is displayed.
Reading and judging
7. When the adjustment is necessary, click [OK]. The CR Unit moves to the
adjustment position.
Adjustment is not necessary Adjustment is necessary
Figure 4-40. [Head slant auto adjustment (PF direction)] Screen

8. Remove the CR Cover. (P. 139) 11. Tighten the screw to secure the Adjustment Knob.
9. Loosen the screw that secures the Adjustment Knob. 12. Print the pattern and see if the slant is corrected. If not, repeat the procedure until
normal pattern is printed.
C A U T IO N Be careful not to completely remove the screw that secures the
Adjustment Knob. C H E C K When the result does not fall within the adjustable range if you try
P O IN T it a few times, perform the PG Adjustment (P. 306) first and try
again.
10. Move the Adjustment Knob to correct the head slant.

See Figure 4-41 for which direction to move the knob.
x
13. When finished, click [Finish] and turn the printer OFF.
Rear Front Rear Front

Print He ead
Print H
Adjustment Knob ad
Screw Condition of the head
Paper feed direction
Minus direction Printed pattern
Plus direction
Rear Front Rear Front
Figure 4-41. Correcting the Head Slant Adjustment knob
Print Head
Print Head
Figure 4-42. Adjustment

4.11.7 Manual Adjustment for Data Shift 3. On the control panel, select the Media Setup menu and change the Select Media
setting to RIP Settings “0”.
PURPOSE 4. Start the Service Program and select Manual Adjustment for Data Shift.
To make the setting not to use the Head 2 nozzles that overlap with the Head 1 nozzles 5. Click [Print].
in the sub-scanning direction. Adjustment pattern is printed.
Head 2
Overlapping nozzles
Head 1
Figure 4-43. Manual Adjustment for Data Shift
PAPER USED
Figure 4-44. [Manual Adjustment for Data Shift] Screen
 Size: 24 inch length or longer 6. Select the pattern with the fewest gap.
C H E C K Use even numbers only.
P O IN T
EXECUTION MODE
Normal Mode
7. Click [Run].
PROCEDURE
Save the parameter in printer.
1. Load the paper into the printer. 8. Turn off the printer to finish the adjustment work.

C D E F
C H E C K If there are no appropriate parameter, drow two heads and secure

P O IN T the screw. Then adjust from “4.11.5 Head Inclination Manual
Adjustment (CR direction)” (p314)

4.11.8 Manual Uni-d Adjustment for Between 2pcs heads

PAPER USED

EXECUTION MODE
Normal Mode
ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE

3. On the control panel, select the Media Setup menu and change the Select Media Figure 4-46. [Manual Uni-d Adjustment for Between 2pcs heads] Screen
6. On the control panel, set [1.5] in Platen Gap.
4. Start the Service Program and select Manual Uni-d Adjustment for Between
7. On the control panel, set [0.2mm] in Head Alignment. and then press [OK], the
2pcs heads.
adjustment pattern will be printed.
5. Click [RUN], then the POPUP screen will be appeared.
8. Repeat adjustment until the number of the pattern with least visible lines falls
between 2 through 8.

NG OK NG
Dual Head #1 Dual Head #2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

12. Click [OK] on the POPUP screen of the service program.
C H E C K  By clicking the [OK] button on the program, the adjusted

P O IN T results are also applied to media 1-30.
 The setting value for PG2.5 is automatically calculated.

4.11.9 Manual Uni-D Adjustment

x
PAPER USED

EXECUTION MODE
Normal Mode
ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE

3. On the control panel, select the Media Setup menu and change the Select Media Figure 4-48. [Manual Uni-D adjustment] Screen
setting to RIP Settings “0”. 6. On the control panel, set [1.5] in Platen Gap.
4. Start the Service Program and select Manual Uni-d Adjustment. 7. On the control panel, set [0.2mm] in Head Alignment. and then press [OK], the
5. Click [RUN], then the POPUP screen will be appeared. adjustment pattern will be printed.

NG OK NG
UniD Head1 #1
C1 M1 C2 M2 BK2
400 cps
Head 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
UniD Head1 #1
C1 M1 C2 M2 BK2
330 cps
Head 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
UniD Head2 #1
C1 M1 C2 M2 BK2
400 cps
Head 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
UniD Head2 #2
C1 M1 C2 M2 BK2
330 cps
Head 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9


 The setting value for PG2.0/PG2.5 is automatically calculated.

4.11.10 Manual Bi-D Adjustment

C H E C K Before performing the Manual Bi-D Adjustment, make sure to
P O IN T carry out the Manual Uni-D Adjustment (P. 325).
PAPER USED

EXECUTION MODE
Normal Mode
ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE Figure 4-50. [Manual Bi-D adjustment] Screen

3. On the control panel, select the Media Setup menu and change the Select Media
4. Start the Service Program and select Manual Bi-d Adjustment.
5. Click [RUN], then the POPUP screen will be appeared.


NG OK NG
BiD Head1 #1
PG 1.5 C1 M1 BK1 C2 M2 BK2
400 cps  The setting value for PG2.5 is automatically calculated.

Head 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
BiD Head1 #2
PG 1.5 C1 M1 BK1 C2 M2 BK2
330 cps
Head 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
BiD Head2 #1
PG 1.5 C1 M1 BK1 C2 M2 BK2
400 cps
Head 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
BiD Head2 #2
PG 1.5 C1 M1 BK1 C2 M2 BK2
330 cps
Head 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
BiD Head1 #1
PG 2.0 C1 M1 BK1 C2 M2 BK2
400 cps
Head 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
BiD Head1 #2
PG 2.0 C1 M1 BK1 C2 M2 BK2
330 cps
Head 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
BiD Head2 #1
PG 2.0 C1 M1 BK1 C2 M2 BK2
400 cps
Head 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
BiD Head2 #2
PG 2.0 C1 M1 BK1 C2 M2 BK2
330 cps
Head 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

4.12 Ink Supply Related Checks and Adjustments
4.12.1 Force charge

EXECUTION MODE
Normal Mode
PROCEDURE
C H E C K If firmware has Charge & Reservation, and if reserved chip unit is

P O IN T installed on the slider, you can be Force charge by service program.
(Only if the Reservation chip is New, you can perform this.)

2. Start the Service Program and select Force charge.
3. Select the chanel which you want to Force charge.
4. Click [Run].
ADJUSTMENT Ink Supply Related Checks and Adjustments 329

4.12.2 Switch between Ink Cartridges and Ink Tanks 5. Select the Ink Tank or Ink Cartridge for service.
6. Click [Run].
EXECUTION MODE
C H E C K When switching to Ink tanks from Ink cartridges, Make sure
Normal Mode P O IN T charge status and reservation status are returned to the original
status by comparing the picture or note which you wrote on Step2.
PROCEDURE
1. Turn the printer ON. 7. Turn off the printer.

2. Take a picture of control panel. If you don’t have camera, see the charge
C H E C K To make the settings effective, make sure to turn off the printer.
status(available ink status bar ) and reservation status on the control panel and
P O IN T
write them down.(Refer to Figure 4-52.)
C H E C K If firmware has Charge & Reservation, and when you select the Ink
P O IN T cartridges for service after performing Step3, Charge &
Reservation will be unavailable temporarily.
When returning to Ink tank, and when you select the Ink tanks
after performing Step3, Charge & Reservation will be available
again. Also, Charge status & Reservation status will return to the
original status. (before-cartridge-installation status.)
Take a picture of control panel or take a memo so that you can
check whether the charge status and reservation status are
returned originally.
Charge Status
(available ink status bar )
Without With
Reservation(Gray) Reservation(White)
Figure 4-52. How to check the Reservation status

(Left: There is No-Reservation Right: There is Reservation)
Figure 4-53. [Switch between Ink cartridges and Ink tanks] Screen
3. Start the Service Program and select Switch between Ink cartridges and Ink
tanks.
4. Select from All channels or Single channel. When selecting Single channel, also
select the Ink Holder to be changed (Ink Holder 1 or Ink Holder 2) and the color
to be changed (C/Y or M/Bk).

4.12.3 Activation of Cleaning Cartridge C H E C K To make the settings effective, make sure to turn off the printer.
P O IN T
EXECUTION MODE
Normal Mode
PROCEDURE

2. Take a picture of control panel. If you don’t have camera, see the charge status and
reservation status on the control panel and write them down.(Refer to Figure
4-52.)
C H E C K If firmware has Charge & Reservation, and if you use the Cleaning
P O IN T Cartridges, after performing Step3, Charge & Reservation will be
unavailable temporarily.
When returning to Ink tank, and when you select the Ink tanks
after performing Step3, Charge & Reservation will be available
again. Also, Charge status & Reservation status will return to the
original status. (before-cartridge-installation status.)
Take a picture of control panel or take a memo so that you can
check whether the charge status and reservation status are
returned originally.
3. Start the Service Program and select Activation of Cleaning cartridges. Figure 4-54. [Activation of Cleaning cartridges] Screen
select the Ink Holder to be validated (Ink Holder 1 or Ink Holder 2) and the color
to be validated (C/Y or M/Bk).
5. Click [Run].
C H E C K When switching to Ink Tanks from Ink Cartridges, Make sure

P O IN T Charge status and Reservation status are returned to the original
status by comparing the picture or note which you wrote on Step2.

4.12.4 Ink or Cleaning Liquid eject

P O IN T tank. Therefore, replacement of the tanks should be made
• BK and M
• Y and C
EXECUTION MODE
Serviceman Mode
PROCEDURE

Figure 4-55. [Ink or Cleaning Liquid eject] Screen
3. Remove either of the ink tanks, cleaning cartridges or ink cartridges of the colors
to exchange.
5. Start the Service Program and select Ink or Cleaning Liquid eject.
select the Ink Holder to be ejected (Ink Holder 1 or Ink Holder 2) and the color
to be ejected (C/Y or M/Bk), and click [Run].
C A U T IO N Running the Ink eject function one time is not enough to prevent
ink from leaking when removing the ink tubes. Prepare paper or
cloth to wipe off leaked ink in advance or run the Ink eject function
twice in a row.
7. When finished, click [Finish].


4.12.5 Tube Inner Cleaning

P O IN T tank. Therefore, replacement of the tanks should be made
• BK and M
• Y and C
REQUIRED TOOL
Cleaning Cartridge
EXECUTION MODE
Serviceman Mode
PROCEDURE
Figure 4-56. [Tube inner cleaning] Screen
1. Activate the cleaning cartridges. (P. 331)
2. Remove the ink tanks. (P. 207)
3. Install the cleaning cartridges. (P. 207)
5. Start the Service Program and select Tube inner cleaning.
select the Ink Holder to be cleaned (Ink Holder 1 or Ink Holder 2) and the color
to be cleaned (C/Y or M/Bk), and click [Run].
7. When the cleaning is finished, click [Finish].
9. Activate the ink tanks. (P. 329)
10. Remove the cleaning cartridges. (P. 207)
11. Install the ink tanks. (P. 207)

4.12.6 Initial Ink Charge  When replacing old ink tanks with new ones (such as due to wrong ink mixture
error, ink clogging, transportation, or when leaving the printer unused or when the
end of ink tank’s life is reached.)
P O IN T tank. Therefore, replacement of the tanks should be made 1. Turn the printer ON in the Serviceman Mode.
according to the combinations below. Turn the power ON while pressing [Menu] + [Back] + [OK].
• BK and M
• Y and C 2. Start the Service Program and select Initial ink charge.
3. Install the chip unit for the colors to fill, and pour ink.
EXECUTION MODE
Serviceman Mode select the Ink Holder to be filled (Ink Holder 1 or Ink Holder 2) and the color to
be filled (C/Y or M/Bk), and click [Run] to start the initial ink charge.
PROCEDURE 5. When finished, click [Finish].
 When using cleaning cartridges or ink cartridges for service (such as when 6. Turn off the printer.
replacing the ink tube or ink holder)
1. Activate the cartridges. (P. 331)

2. Remove the ink tank. (P. 207)
3. Install the cartridges. (P. 207)
5. Start the Service Program and select Initial ink charge.
select the Ink Holder to be filled (Ink Holder 1 or Ink Holder 2) and the color to
be filled (C/Y or M/Bk), and click [Run] to start the initial ink charge.
9. Activate the ink tanks. (P. 329)
Figure 4-57. [Initial ink charge] Screen
10. Remove the cartridges. (P. 207)
11. Install the ink tanks. (P. 207)

4.12.7 Change flag (nB <--> HDK)

EXECUTION MODE
Normal Mode
PROCEDURE
C H E C K The following explains how to switch from normal black to HDK

P O IN T and the same way vice versa.
And if you perform Main Board Replacement(Backup NG),
perform only Step3, Step4 and Step5 to fix the Black type.

2. Start the Service Program and select Nozzle Check, and print the nozzle check
pattern. Figure 4-58. [Change flag (nB <--> HDK)] Screen
3. Start the Service Program and select Change flag (nB <--> HDK). 6. Turn off the printer.
4. Select HDK.
C H E C K Unless the power is turned off once, the new setting of Change flag
5. Click [Run]. P O IN T (nB <--> HDK) is not saved in the Main Board.
C H E C K An error occurs because the normal black ink tank is installed, but
P O IN T continue the work.
8. Remove the ink tank, slider, and ink chip for normal black.
9. Install the ink tank, slider, and ink chip for HDK.
10. Fill the ink tank with HDK ink.
12. Reset the Waste Ink Bottle Counter.

13. If magenta ink is less than 70 mm from the bottom of the ink tank, fill the ink tank 14. Start the Service Program and select Push out Ink Charging (M+B).
with magenta ink.
C H E C K It takes approximately 30 minutes to carry out Push out Ink
P O IN T Charging (M+B). (Push out Ink Charging (M+B): 15 minutes,
Cleaning: 15 minutes)
15. Click [Run].
Figure 4-59. [Push out Ink Charging (M+B)] Screen

16. Select Nozzle Check on the Service Program, and print the nozzle check pattern.
17. Compare the nozzle check pattern with the one printed in Step2 and make sure
there is no nozzle clogging.
C H E C K Carry out Nozzle Check to check the color tone change before and
P O IN T after switching over from normal black to HDK.
Printing a printer status sheet will make the check easier.

4.12.8 Ink Tank Replacement 9. Refer to the picture which you took on Step2 and check the reservation status for
each color.
REQUIRED TOOLS  Color which is reserved before replacing tank
Install the old chip unit which you remove on Step4 to reserve.
 New Ink pack and Chip unit that is attached New Ink pack
 Color which is Not reserved before replacing tank
 New Ink Tank
You don’t need to attach the old chip.
EXECUTION MODE 10. Refill the new Ink into new tank.
11. Start the Service Program and select Initial ink charge. (Refer to When
Normal Mode
replacing old ink tanks with new ones in Initial Ink Charge (p.334))
PROCEDURE 12. Turn the printer OFF to complete the adjustment.

2. Take a picture of control panel. If you don’t have camera, see the charge status and
reservation status on the control panel and write them down.(Refer to Figure
4-52.)
4. Remove the old Ink Tank and old chip unit which is attached on the tank.
C H E C K Don’t dispose the old chip unit because you may use it on Step9 to
P O IN T reserve.
5. Install the new Ink Tank.

6. Install the new chip unit is attached New Ink pack.
8. Check the reservation status where you replaced the Ink Tank.
 If the chip is reserved.
Start the Service Program and select Force charge.
(Refer to Force charge (p.329))
 If the chip is Not reserved.
Proceed Step9.(Because reservation chip has been already charged
automatically.)

4.13 Media Feed Related Checks and Adjustments

Tension spring Measuring microphone
4.13.1 PF Belt Tension Check
REQUIRED TOOLS
 Sonic tensimeter U-507

 Any tools to flip the timing belt
Fixing screws
STANDARD VALUE
 11 ± 4 N
EXECUTION MODE
Normal Mode
PF Motor mounting plate
PROCEDURE
Figure 4-60. PF Belt Tension Check
1. Remove the following part in advance.
2. Loosen the two screws that secure the PF Motor mounting plate.
3. Move the mounting plate back and forth three times to soften the PF timing belt.
4. Tighten the two screws to secure the mounting plate.
ADJUSTMENT Media Feed Related Checks and Adjustments 338

5. Turn the printer ON. 10. Press the [MEASURE] button on the tensimeter, and flip the timing belt with
tweezers or a similar tool.
6. Start the Service Program and select PF Belt Tension check.
7. Click [Run]. C A U T IO N  Flip the timing belt as weak as the tensimeter can measure it.
The PF roller rotates 30 revolutions.  Be careful not to let the microphone touch the timing belt when
flipping the belt.
11. Measure the belt tension three times and check if the average is within the
standards.
 Within the standards: Go to Step 12
 Out of the standards: Go to Step 2
12. Click [Finish].
Figure 4-61. [PF Belt Tension check] Screen

8. Input the following information on the belt into the tensimeter.
 MASS: 1.3 g/m
 WIDTH: 6.0 mm/R
 SPAN: 107 mm
9. Bring the microphone of the tensimeter close to the belt as shown in Figure 4-60.
C H E C K The distance between the microphone and the belt surface should
P O IN T be 5 mm or less, but do not let it touch the belt.

4.13.2 PF Scale Check 5. When the PF Scale has rotated 30 revolutions, the check result is displayed.
 The result is OK: Go to Step 7
EXECUTION MODE
 The result is NG: Go to Step 6
Normal Mode 6. Since the PF Scale may be dirty, clean it with ethanol. After cleaning the PF Scale,
perform Step 4 to run the check again.
PROCEDURE If the result is still NG, replace the PF Encoder (P. 215) or the PF Scale (P. 216)
and check again.
1. Remove the following part in advance.
7. Click [Finish].
3. Start the Service Program and select PF Scale Check.
4. Click [Run] to rotate the PF Scale.
Look at the PF Encoder and the PF Scale from straight above, and visually check It is OK if the PF Scale
that the scale does not touch the encoder. (Touching the legs of the white holder is touches the legs of
white holder.
OK.)
PF Encoder
PF Scale
Figure 4-62. [PF Scale Check] Screen Figure 4-63. PF Scale Check

4.13.3 Manual Adjustment for Media Feeding

PAPER USED

EXECUTION MODE
Normal Mode
PROCEDURE

2. Start the Service Program and select Manual Adjustment for Media Feeding.
3. Click [Print]. The adjustment pattern is printed.
Figure 4-64. [Manual Adjustment for Media Feeding] Screen
4. Measure the distance between the + signs on the printed adjustment pattern.
5. Enter the value calculated in Step 4 into the edit box of the Pattern length. (Enter
the value up to the number in the first decimal place. e.g.) “550.0”)
6. Click [Write].
7. Click [Finish].
C H E C K To make the settings effective, make sure to turn off the printer.
P O IN T

4.14 Verificações e ajustes relacionados às placas
4.14.1 Configuração inicial da placa principal

MODO DE EXECUÇÃO
Modo Técnico
PROCEDIMENTO
1. LIGUE a impressora no modo técnico. Ligue a alimentação enquanto

pressiona [Menu] + [Back] + [OK].
2. Inicie o programa de serviço e selecione Configuração inicial da placa
principal.
3. Clique em [Executar].
4. A placa principal será inicializada.
5. Clique em [OK]. Figura 4-65. [Configuração inicial da placa principal ] foto
6. A impressora desligará automaticamente.
C A U T IO N
Se a inicialização falhar, execute esta função novamente.
Se ainda falhar, substitua a placa principal por uma nova.
ADJUSTMENT Boards Related Checks and Adjustments 342

4.14.2 Entrada RTC e USB ID

MODO DE EXECUÇÃO
Modo Técnico
PROCEDIMENTO
1.LIGUE a impressora no modo de técnico de manutenção.

Ligue a alimentação enquanto pressiona [Menu] + [Back] + [OK].
2. Inicie o programa de serviço e selecione RTC & USB ID Input.
3. Verifique a data e a hora exibidas e corrija-as se necessário.
4.Clique em [Write RTC] para definir o RTC.
5.Insira o número de série de 10 dígitos da impressora para gerar um ID
USB.
6.Clique em [Gravar ID USB] para gravar o ID USB.
7.Clique em [Concluir].
8. DESLIGUE a impressora.
9.Ligue a impressora no modo normal. Figura 4-66. [Entrada RTC&USB ID ] Foto
10. No painel de controle, verifique se a configuração foi aplicada corre-
tamente.
Se a configuração estiver incorreta, defina a data e a hora no painel de
controle.
11. Desligue a impressora.
C A U T IO N Se a impressora for DESLIGADA e LIGADA novamente após

alterar o ID USB, o computador (Windows) detecta a porta USB
como uma nova porta e copia automaticamente o driver da
impressora como xxxx (cópia x). Se você precisar realizar outro
ajuste usando esta ferramenta, selecione o driver “cópia x”.

4.14.3 Entrada de endereço MAC 6. Digite o endereço MAC indicado na etiqueta de endereço MAC afixada na parte
traseira da impressora e clique em [Gravar].
MODO DE EXECUÇÃO
Rear of the printer
Modo de técnico (modo parcialmente normal)
PROCEDIMENTO
1.Ligue a impressora no modo normal e apague o endereço IP do painel de cont-

role.
2. DESLIGUE a impressora.
3.Conecte a impressora ao computador com um cabo USB e um cabo de rede.
4.LIGUE a impressora no modo de técnico.
Ligue a alimentação enquanto pressiona [Menu] + [Back] + [OK].
5.Inicie o programa de serviço e selecione a entrada de endereço MAC.
MAC address label
Figura 4-68. Etiqueta de endereço MAC

7. Clique em [Ler] uma vez e verifique se o endereço inserido e o exibido na tela
são iguais.
8. Clique em [Concluir].
9. DESLIGUE a impressora para concluir o ajuste.
Figura 4-67. [Entrada de endereço MAC] Foto

4.14.4 Serial Number Input

EXECUTION MODE
Serviceman Mode
PROCEDURE

2. Start the Service Program and select Serial Number Input.
3. Enter a 10-digit serial number of the printer, and click [Write].
The serial number is written to the NVRAM on the Main Board.
4. When you click [Read], the serial number written on the NVRAM is
automatically read and displayed on the screen.
5. Click [Finish].
Figure 4-69. [Serial Number Input] Screen

4.14.5 Board Replacement Date & Time Setting

EXECUTION MODE
Normal Mode
PROCEDURE

2. Start the Service Program and select Main Board Exchange Counter (or Power
Supply Unit Replacement Date & Time setting).
3. Click [Run]. When a confirmation message is displayed, click [OK].
4. Click [Finish].
Figure 4-70. [Power Supply Unit Replacement Date & Time setting] Screen

4.14.6 Check result of transferring data from CSIC chip C H E C K The condition of running the restore process is to perform the
to Main Board P O IN T following procedures in order. (Check also Mainboad Replacement
in Figure 4-1.)
REQUIRED TOOLS
1. Remove old Chip unit and slider before replacing Main Board.
 New Ink pack and Chip unit that is attached New Ink pack 2. Main Board initial setting (automatically power off)
 New Ink Tank 3. Install slider and chip unit which you removed befor replacing
Main Board
EXECUTION MODE
4. Lower the slider’s levers.
Serviceman Mode 5. Turn the power On in normal mode.
If you perform the procedure correctly, restore process will be
PROCEDURE
failed. And restore process runs only 1 time.
(If you want to run restore process again, install the New Main
C H E C K If firmware has Charge & Reservation function, depending on the
P O IN T
Boad again and perform the procedure correctly. If you don’t have
situation of Reservation, there are 2 cases where you can restore the
new Main Board, you need to perform the procedure from Step5.)
panel status and where you cannot restore the panel status.

 When the panel status can be restored. Turn the power ON while pressing [Menu] + [Back] + [OK].
All colors were Reserved before replacing Main Board.
2. Start the Service Program and select Check result of transferring data from
 When the panel status can be restored partially.
CSIC chip to Main Board.
Some of the colors were Reserved before replacing Main Board
3. Click [Run].
 When the panel status can Not be restored.
All of the colors were Not Reserved before replacing Main Board. 4. Pop-up message will be displayed and check whether the restore was successful or
not for each color.
(For each color, when restore was successful, “OK“ will be displayed and when
restore was not successful, “NG“ will be displayed.)

Figure 4-71. Pop-up message

 Color which is displayed “OK“: Complete the procedure. If all colors are
“OK“, turn the printer OFF to finish the adjustment
 Color which is displayed “NG“: perform the following steps.
5. Refill Ink from a new ink pack until becoming full capacity of the Ink Tank.
6. Install the chip unit which is attached the new ink pack.
7. Inform customer to keep use ink without Reservation until the amount of ink in
Ink Tank is less than 70mm from the base of the Ink Tank .
(Once the amount of ink in Ink Tank is less than 70mm, Reservation works as
usual.)
8. To inform customer which color couldn’t be restored, put circle mark at Step2 on
next page.

EXPLANATION
Due to replacement of Main Board, data was not restored.

Please take below temporary procedure.
Sorry for inconvenience.
1. Regarding color which couldn't be restored, please do not reserve while ink
remains more than 70mm. Keep use ink less than 70mm without reserve.
2. To inform customer that which color couldn’t be restored, put circle mark on
below. If it is not one, please put mark all. And please provide this sheet to
customer with explanation.
 Left Tank : Black Yellow Magenta Cyan
 Right Tank : Black Yellow Magenta Cyan
3. Regarding color which couldn’t be restored, after ink level becomes less than
70mm, replace chip unit to new one. Then, refill ink and erase “Circle Mark” or
put some other mark like “X“ mark. After this procedure, Charge and Reservation
works as usual for this color.
4. After all colors which couldn't be restored are treated above Step3, temporary
procedure is completed. Please discard this sheet.

4.14.7 Flag for extending life

EXECUTION MODE
Normal Mode
PROCEDURE
C H E C K The following procedure must Not be done for the printers below.
P O IN T
 SC-F9200 series which have 1 label at the Left Upper Cover.
(Refer to CR HP Sensor (p164) to find out how to check.)
Regarding to Only SC-F9200 series which have 2 labels at the Left

Upper Cover, you need to perform the following procedure.

2. Start the Service Program and select Flag for extending life.
3. Click [Run]. When a confirmation message is displayed, click [OK].
4. Click [Finish].

4.15 Other Printer Checks and Adjustments
4.15.1 USB Port and Network Communication Check

EXECUTION MODE
Normal Mode
PROCEDURE TO CHECK THE USB CONNECTION STATUS

2. Start the Service Program and select USB Port and Network Communication
Check.
3. Select USB Communication Check.
4. Click [Run].
When the communication is available, the LCD flashes five times. Figure 4-72. [USB Port and Network Communication Check] Screen
5. Click [Finish].
PROCEDURE TO CHECK THE NETWORK CONNECTION STATUS

2. Start the Service Program and select USB Port and Network Communication
Check.
3. Select IP Address Communication Check.
4. Enter the IP address of the printer, and click [Run].
When the network communication is available, the LCD flashes five times.
5. Click [Finish].
ADJUSTMENT Other Printer Checks and Adjustments 351

4.15.2 Suction Fan Adjustment

PAPER USED
 Size: 16 inches or longer

EXECUTION MODE
Normal Mode
PROCEDURE

2. Start the Service Program and select Suction Fan Adjustment.
3. Click [Run] to move the Suction Fan.
Figure 4-73. [Suction Fan Adjustment] Screen
4. Check to see if the fan is operating normally by listening for its operating noise
and visually checking the paper status (see if the paper is attracted properly).
If no attraction force is applied to the paper, or the force is weak, check if the fan is
installed properly. If there is something wrong with the fan, replace it.
5. Click [Finish].

4.15.3 Heater Function Check

EXECUTION MODE
Normal Mode
PROCEDURE

2. Start the Service Program and select Heater Function Check.
3. Click [Run]. The selected heater(s) starts to heat up and reaches a predetermined
temperature after about 5 minutes.
4. Touch the heater(s) and check that it is warm.
If the heater(s) temperature does not reach the predetermined level within 10
minutes, an error is displayed.
Figure 4-74. [Heater Function Check] Screen
C A U T IO N In a cool environment, it may take a longer time to heat up the
heaters. (If the ambient temperature is 10 degrees C, it may take 20
minutes or longer.)
5. Click [Finish].

4.15.4 Panel Setting Reset & Job History Reset

EXECUTION MODE
Normal Mode
PROCEDURE

2. On the control panel of the printer, select Reset All Settings and execute it.
The settings set with the Control Panel are reset to their default.
3. Start the Service Program and select Panel Setting Reset & Job History Reset.
4. Click [Run].
User job history is reset.
5. Click [Finish].
6. Turn the printer OFF to finish the adjustment. Figure 4-75. [Panel Setting Reset & Job History Reset] Screen

4.15.5 Panel LCD Operation Check 4.15.6 Panel Buttons Operation Check
EXECUTION MODE EXECUTION MODE
Serviceman Mode Serviceman Mode
PROCEDURE PROCEDURE
1. Turn the printer ON in the Serviceman Mode. 1. Turn the printer ON in the Serviceman Mode.
Turn the power ON while pressing [Menu] + [Back] + [OK]. Turn the power ON while pressing [Menu] + [Back] + [OK].
2. Select SELF TESTING → Mecha Adjustment → LCD RGB Check. 2. Select SELF TESTING → Mecha Adjustment → Panel Check.
3. Select one of the three colors at a time and press [Right]. 3. Press the button you want to check the function, and check if the button name you
The LCD is filled with solid red, green or blue color. Check if there is no missing pressed matches the name displayed on the panel.
dots. Check the colors in the order of red, green, and then blue.
4. To select the next color, press [Pause/Cancel] or [Left].
Paper Feed
Pause
Paper Settings Maintenance

LCD RGB Check
Red
Green
Blue
MENU
UP
LEFT RIGHT
Figure 4-76. Color LCD display check

BACK Heater
OK DOWN
Figure 4-77. Buttons and Their Names displayed on the Panel

4.15.7 Motor Measurement & Automatic Adjustment

The measurement adjustment can be made for the following motors individually.
 CR Motor
 Pump Motor (Pump Cap Unit 1/2)
 PF Motor
EXECUTION MODE
Normal Mode
PROCEDURE

2. Start the Service Program and select Motor Measurement & Automatic
Adjustment of the target motor.
Figure 4-78. [CR Motor Measurement & Automatic Adjustment] Screen
3. Click [Run].
Measurement and adjustment are performed automatically.
C H E C K For the Pump Motor, select from Pump Cap Unit 1 or Pump Cap
P O IN T Unit2. (Figure 4-79)
C A U T IO N If the adjustment is not finished, replace the motor.
Figure 4-79. [Pump Cap Unit Measurement & Automatic Adjustment] Screen

Figure 4-80. [PF Motor Measurement & Automatic Adjustment] Screen

4.15.8 Rear AD Adjustment  Load the sheet with its matte side upper ..... i
 Set the right side of the Standard Sheet between the 12th and 13th hollows on
REQUIRED TOOL the Adjustment Plates from the right.
 Standard Sheet (JETRAS JP-D300S)  Set the Standard Sheet while aligning the long side with the front end of the
Platen.
EXECUTION MODE
C A U T IO N When executing the following step, do not remove the external
Serviceman Mode covers to acquire proper AD value.
PROCEDURE
1. When any paper is loaded, remove it. 9. Press [OK].

Check that a number is displayed on the Control Panel and record it. If Retry AD
2. Check the all Ink Cartridge Lock Lever are lower position. Adjust is displayed, check if there is a defect (tears/rips, contamination, wrinkles)
3. Turn the printer ON in the Serviceman Mode. on the Standard Sheet, and retry this step.
C A U T IO N If Retry AD Adjust is displayed again, the PE sensor is defective.
4. Select Mecha Adjustment → Rear AD.
Replace the PE sensor with a new one and carry out the adjustment
again.
C H E C K Make sure to carry out the following steps without loading the
P O IN T Standard Sheet.
10. Turn over the sheet, (Load the sheet with its matte side under)..... ii
Again, press [OK].
Check that a number is displayed on the Control Panel and record it. If Retry AD
5. Press [OK] while [Enter] Start is displayed.
Adjust is displayed, check if there is a defect (tears/rips, contamination, wrinkles)
Check if “Retry AD Adjust” is displayed on the Control Panel.
on the Standard Sheet, and retry this step.
C H E C K If “0” is displayed, check if Ink Cartridge Lock Lever is top 11. Compare i with ii, check fulfilling the following condition.
P O IN T position.
Standard: 75~127 and i < ii
C A U T IO N If out of standard, check the matte side of standard sheet, and retry
this step.
6. Open the Front Cover. If out of standard again, replace the PE sensor with a new one.
7. Move the Media Loading Lever to the rear side, and set it to the release position.
8. Insert the Standard Sheet to the position shown in Figure 4-81 and lower the 12. Remove the Standard Sheet, and turn the printer OFF.
Media Loading Lever to press the sheet. Make sure to secure the followings.

Standard Sheet
13th hollow on the 12th hollow on the

Adjustment Plates Adjustment Plates
Set the Standard Sheet while Set the Standard Sheet between the
aligning with the front end of 12th and 13th hollows on the
the Platen. Adjustment Plates from the right.
Figure 4-81. Position of the Standard Sheet

4.15.9 After Heater Position Adjustment Table 4-11. Calculation samples

Amount of
A B C D
REQUIRED TOOLS deformation
616.5 mm 620.0 mm 938.5 mm 938.0 mm -4 mm
 Steel scale (1,000 mm)
617.0 mm 619.5 mm 938.0 mm 938.0 mm -2.5 mm
619.5 mm 619.0 mm 938.0 mm 937.5 mm 0 mm
MEASUREMENT
618.0 mm 618.5 mm 937.0 mm 939.0 mm 1.5 mm
1. Measure the height of the After Heater and Loading Guide from the floor at the 619.5 mm 618.0 mm 937.0 mm 938.5 mm 3 mm
following four points.
3. Perform the adjustment according to the table below.
㻌㻌 After Heater
Table 4-12. After Heater Position Adjustment
Right front Left front
Amount of
Adjustment procedure
deformation
-3 mm or less 1. Install the AH Position Correction Plate. (P. 361)
2. Perform the AH Standard Adjustment on the home side. (P. 362)
A 3. Perform the parallelism adjustment of the Roll Unit / Reel Unit
B referring the Set Up Guide.
-2.9 mm to -2.1 mm 1. Install the AH Position Correction Plate. (P. 361)
2. Perform the AH Position Adjustment on the home side. (P. 364)
Loading Guide Right rear Left rear 3. Perform the parallelism adjustment of the Roll Unit / Reel Unit
referring the Set Up Guide.
-2 mm to 1 mm No adjustment necessary
1.1 mm to 1.9 mm 1. Install the AH Position Correction Plate. (P. 361)
C D 2. Perform the AH Position Adjustment on the full side. (P. 364)
3. Perform the parallelism adjustment of the Roll Unit / Reel Unit

2 mm or more 1. Install the AH Position Correction Plate. (P. 361)
Figure 4-82. Measurement 2. Perform the AH Standard Adjustment on the full side. (P. 362)
2. Obtain the amount of deformation referring to the following. 3. Perform the parallelism adjustment of the Roll Unit / Reel Unit
Amount of deformation = (A-B) - (C-D)
x

INSTALLING THE AH POSITION CORRECTION PLATE 3. Insert the hook on the AH Position Correction Plate into the slit next to the Heater
Frame.
C H E C K This part can be attached in the same way at both the home side 4. Secure the AH Position Correction Plate with the two screws.
P O IN T and the full side.
AH Position Heater
Correction Plate Frame
AH Position
1. Remove the Lower Ink Holder. (P. 106) Correction Plate
2. Remove the two screws.
Home side
Hook
Screw
Screw
Figure 4-84. Installing the AH Position Correction Plate (1)
5. Loosen the adjustment nut.
6. Rotate the adjustment nut to shorten the adjuster approximately 2 to 3 mm away
After Heater from the printer.
adjustment nut Adjuster

Figure 4-83. Removing the screws
Nut
AH Position
Correction Plate 2 mm to 3mm Printer
Figure 4-85. Installing the AH Position Correction Plate (2)

ADJUSTMENT
 AH Standard Adjustment Full side

screw (1) Home side
screw (1)
1. Remove the After Heater. (P. 233)
2. Remove the Sub-E Board Cover. (See Step2 in “3.4.4.6 Sub-E Board” (P. Full side Home side
screw (2) screw (2)
133))
3. Check how many shims are needed referring to the table below.
Table 4-13. Number of shims needed

Home side Home side Full side Full side
Amount of deformation
screw (1) screw (2) screw (1) screw (2)
-6 mm to -4.5 mm 2 4 0 0
-4 mm to -3 mm 1 2 0 0
2 mm to 2.5 mm 0 0 0 1
3 mm to 4 mm 0 0 1 2
4.5 mm to 6 mm 0 0 2 4
x
After Heater
Figure 4-86. The positions to where the shims are to be inserted

6. Attach the shims: two to screw (1) and four to screw (2).
C H E C K The following procedure is described for the case of -5 mm
P O IN T deformation. 7. Tighten the three screws.
Home side
Shim
4. Loosen the three screws at home side.
x
Screw
Screw (1)
Home side
Shim
Screw
Screw (2) Heater Frame
Screw
Figure 4-89. AH Standard Adjustment (3)
8. Install the Sub-E Board Cover.
Screw 9. Install the After Heater.

10. Measure the amount of deformation.
Figure 4-87. AH Standard Adjustment (1)  If the amount is between -2 to -1 mm: End of the adjustment.
5. Lift the bottom of the Heater Frame by 10 mm.  If the amount is between -2.9 to -2.1 mm or between 1.1 mm to 1.9 mm:
Perform the AH Position Adjustment (P. 364).
Heater Frame
Figure 4-88. AH Standard Adjustment (2)

 AH Position Adjustment 4. Loosen the adjustment nut of the adjuster on the full side.
5. Rotate the adjustment nut until the adjuster comes in contact with the printer.
C H E C K The following procedure is described for the case of -3 mm
P O IN T deformation. 6. Secure the adjuster with the nut.
Full side Adjuster

1. Loosen the adjustment nut of the adjuster on the home side. Adjustment nut
2. Rotate the adjustment nut until the adjuster is aligned according to the amount of
Nut
deformation.
Home side
Adjustment nut
One turn of the adjuster raises/lowers Printer
the After Heater by approximately 1.2
mm. Figure 4-92. AH Position Adjustment (3)
Adjuster After Heater
Figure 4-90. AH Position Adjustment (1)

3. Secure the adjuster with the nut.
Home side
Adjuster
Nut
Figure 4-91. AH Position Adjustment (2)

CHAPTER
5
MAINTENANCE

5.1 Overview C A U T IO N  Ensure sufficient work space for servicing.

 Locate the printer on a stable and flat surface.
This chapter provides information on how to maintain the printer in its optimum  When using compressed air products; such as air duster, for
operating condition. cleaning during repair and maintenance, the use of such
products containing flammable gas is prohibited.
Basically, servicing on the printer should be performed on-site. Be sure to strictly
 Be sure to spread a sheet of paper or cloth on the work space
observe the following precautions when servicing to avoid an accident or injury
before removing any ink-path-related parts or components to
causing the user trouble.
keep the space from being soiled with leaked ink.
 The power switch is installed on the secondary side of the  Do not touch electrical circuit boards with bare hands as the
W A R N IN G
power circuit, so power is always supplied to the power supply elements on the board are so sensitive that they can be easily
circuit even when the switch is OFF unless the power cord is damaged by static electricity. If you have to handle the boards
unplugged from the wall power outlet. Unless otherwise stated with bare hands, use static electricity discharge equipment such
(for printing or operation checks), be sure to unplug the power as anti-static wrist straps.
cord from the wall outlet before disassembling or assembling  When the printer has to be operated with the covers removed,
the printer to prevent electric shock and damage to the circuit. take extra care not to get your fingers or clothes caught in
 The Front Sensor provided for detecting open/close status of moving parts such as the fan unit.
the Printer Cover also acts as a safety interlock switch. Never  When the printer needs to be repacked for transportation after
disable the switch function to prevent possible injury. being used, make sure to follow the steps below after turning
 A lithium battery is mounted on the Main Board (control the power OFF.
circuit) for memory backup. Be sure to observe the following • Check that the Printhead is capped properly.
precautions when handling the Main Board. • Leave the Ink Tank installed in the printer.
• Be careful not to short the electrode of the battery. • Repack the printer using the packaging box, cushioning
• When replacing the battery, make sure to insert it in correct materials and protective equipment indicated in the
orientation. unpacking guide.
• Never heat the battery or plunge it into the flames.
• Do not put the Main Board directly on conductive materials.
 Be extremely careful not to get the ink into your eye or let it
come into contact with your skin. If it happens, wash out your
eye or skin with water immediately. If any abnormality is
found, contact a physician.
MAINTENANCE Overview 366

5.2 Setting Up/Storing the Printer 5.2.2 Storing the Printer

When storing the printer, make sure to leave the Ink Tank installed and place it on a
5.2.1 Setting Up horizontal surface, and also inform the user on the following cautions.
Make sure to open up the following installation room for the printer so as to maintain  When not using the printer for a long time
appropriate operation and usability.  Turn on the printer at least once a week to let it clean the nozzles and prevent
clogging of the nozzles.
 Remove the media. If the media is left set for a long time, nip impression of
the Press Roller may remain on the media, or the media may ripple.
 Check that the Printhead is capped properly.
 Close all the covers.
 When storing the printer for a long time, evacuate the ink and flush the ink
passage. (See “4.12.5 Tube Inner Cleaning” (p333).)
 Before using the printer again
Make sure to print a nozzle check pattern and check for clogging of the printhead.
If any clogging can be seen, carry out a head cleaning.
C H E C K After performing the head cleaning a few times, try turning off the
P O IN T printer and leaving it overnight or longer, so that the ink may
dissolve and the clogging might be improved.
Figure 5-1. Installation Room Requirement
MAINTENANCE Setting Up/Storing the Printer 367

5.3 When left unused/transportation 6. Remove all the ink tanks and chip units and discard them. (Page 207)
5.3.1 When left unused 8. Start the printer in the Serviceman Mode.
The following should be carried out if the printer is not used more than two weeks.
9. Select Ink eject.
5.3.1.1 Preparation before leaving printer unused Select All channels, and press the [Run] button to run the ink eject. (Page 332)
10. Select Activation of Cleaning cartridge.
REQUIRED TOOLS All channels, and press the [Run] button to make the cleaning cartridge available.
 Stubby screwdriver (Page 331)
 Screwdriver 11. Turn off the printer.
 Cleaning cartridge (x8) 12. Install the cleaning cartridges. (Page 207)
 USB cable 13. Lower all the lock levers.
 Service program 14. Turn on the printer.
 Communication Driver 15. Discard the waste ink.

PROCEDURE Select All channels, and press the [Run] button to charge the cleaning liquid.
(Page 333)
C H E C K If some of the chip units is reserved, return them to the customer. 18. Reset the Waste Ink Bottle Counter.
P O IN T (Because they can be used.)
20. Install the new ink tanks to prevent the foreign materials from intruding the ink
holder during transferring/left unused. (Page 207)
3. Select Procedure (Before no using printer over spec) from ADJUSTMENT
(Sequence).
The CR lock is released and the CR Unit moves to the full side, then the printer
turns off automatically.
5. Clean where ink attaches to the parts such as around the print head, cap, wiper and
wiper rail.
MAINTENANCE When left unused/transportation 368

5.3.1.2 Preparation for installation (after transport)

1. Remove all the ink tanks. (Page 207)
4. Start the service program and select Procedure (After no using printer over
spec) from ADJUSTMENT (Sequence).
5. Select Ink or Cleaning Liquid eject.
Select All channels, and press the [Run] button to run the cleaning liquid eject.
(Page 332)
Select All channels and Ink Tank, and press the [Run] button to make the ink
tank available. (Page 329)
9. Install the new chip units, and pour ink.
11. Start the service program and select Procedure (After no using printer over
spec) from ADJUSTMENT (Sequence).
12. Select Force charge.
Select all colors and press [Run] button to run Force charge.
Select All channels, and press the [Run] button to run the initial ink charge. (Page
334)
Select Nozzle Check Pattern Print, and press the [Run] button to run the nozzle
check. (Page 311)

5.3.2 Transportation 7. Lower all the lock levers.
When moving or transporting the printer, the following should be carried out by 8. Start the printer in the Serviceman Mode.
serviceman.
9. Select Ink eject.
5.3.2.1 Preparation before transportation Select All channels, and press the [Run] button to run the ink eject. (Page 332)
10. Select Activation of Cleaning cartridge.
REQUIRED TOOLS
All channels, and press the [Run] button to make the cleaning cartridge available.
 Stubby screwdriver (Page 331)
 Cleaning cartridge (CL14) (x8) 12. Install the cleaning cartridges. (Page 207)
 USB cable 13. Lower all the lock levers.
 Service program 14. Turn on the printer.
 Communication Driver 15. Discard the waste ink.

PROCEDURE Select All channels, and press the [Run] button to charge the cleaning liquid.
(Page 333)
C H E C K If some of the chip units is reserved, return them to the customer. 18. Reset the Waste Ink Bottle Counter.
P O IN T (Because they can be used.)
20. Install the eight cleaning cartridges to prevent the foreign materials from intruding
the ink holder during transferring. (Page 207)
3. Select Treatment for transfer (Before transfer) from ADJUSTMENT
(Sequence).
The CR lock is released and the CR Unit moves to the full side, then the printer
turns off automatically.
5. Clean where ink attaches to the parts such as around the print head, cap, wiper and
wiper rail.
6. Remove all the ink tanks and chip units. (Page 207)

5.3.2.2 Preparation after transportation (Without replacing Ink 4. Start the service program and select Treatment for transfer (After transfer
Tanks) without replacement Ink Tank) from ADJUSTMENT (Sequence).
REQUIRED TOOLS
 Stubby screwdriver tank available. (Page 329)
 Brand-new ink tank (x8) 7. Install the ink tanks. (Page 207)
 Brand-new chip unit (x8) 8. Install the chip units, and pour ink.
 Media (for nozzle checking)

C H E C K Install the ink tank and chip unit previously used.
 Service program P O IN T
 Communication Driver
PROCEDURE 9. Turn on the printer.

C H E C K Within two weeks since the preparation, install the ink tank and
P O IN T chip unit previously used. 11. Select Initial ink charge.
If two weeks or more has passed since the preparation before Select All channels, and press the [Run] button to run the initial ink charge.
transportation was carried out, Refer to Preparation after (Page 334)
transportation (With replacing Ink Tanks) (p.372)
Select Nozzle Check Pattern Print, and press the [Run] button to run the nozzle
1. Remove all the cleaning cartridges. (Page 207) check. (Page 311)
2. Lower all the lock levers. 13. Perform cleaning if necessary. (Page 313)

5.3.2.3 Preparation after transportation (With replacing Ink 4. Start the service program and select Treatment for transfer (After transfer with
Tanks) replacement Ink Tank) from ADJUSTMENT (Sequence).
REQUIRED TOOLS
 Stubby screwdriver tank available. (Page 329)
 Brand-new ink tank (x8) 7. Install the new ink tanks. (Page 207)
 Brand-new chip unit (x8) 8. Install the new chip units, and pour ink.
 Media (for nozzle checking)

C H E C K If two weeks or more has passed since the preparation before
 Service program P O IN T transportation was carried out, install the new ink tank and new
chip
 Communication Driver
PROCEDURE 9. Turn on the printer.

10. Start the service program and select Procedure (After transfer with
C H E C K If two weeks or more has passed since the preparation before
P O IN T transportation was carried out, install the new ink tank and new replacement Ink Tank) from ADJUSTMENT (Sequence).
chip 11. Select Force charge.
Within two weeks since the preparation, refer to Preparation after Select all colors and press [Run] button to run Force charge.
transportation (Without replacing Ink Tanks) (p.371).
1. Remove all the cleaning cartridges. (Page 207) Select All channels, and press the [Run] button to run the initial ink charge.
(Page 334)
3. Start the printer in the Serviceman Mode. Select Nozzle Check Pattern Print, and press the [Run] button to run the nozzle
Turn on the printer while pressing [Menu] + [Back] + [OK]. check. (Page 311)

5.4 Exchange Parts

Exchange parts of this printer are as follows.
Note *1: M/C = Maintenance call
S/C = Service call
*2: See Chapter 2 “Troubleshooting” for details of maintenance call and service call.
*3: Replace the Ink Tank and PF Roller Center Support together at the same time.
*4: Replace the Ink Tube and CR Motor together at the same time.
Table 5-1. Exchange Parts
Class Parts Exchanger Life Exchange Timing (call) *1*2
If the printout is faint or smudged, or segments are missing
Wiper cleaner ---
even after cleaning.
Consumables User If the printout is faint or smudged, or segments are missing
Wiper ---
even after cleaning.
Wasted Ink Bottle --- ---
 M/C: None
Ink Tank*3 1.5 years on average
 S/C: None
PF Roller Center  51.4 km  M/C: None

Periodic Replacement Parts
Support*3  1.5 years  S/C: None
 33km : when Take-up tension is max.  M/C: 00000400

Mounting Plate Assy
 100km : when Take-up tension is default.  S/C: None
 The number of fired ink droplets: 6,840,000,000,000  M/C: None

Print Head
 3 years or more after ink is charged  S/C: None
 M/C (Near end of life): 00000002

Duct CR Serviceman 400,000 times (Pump counter)
 S/C: 1435
 M/C (Near end of life): 00000080, 00400000

Ink Holder Pump counter: 400,000 times
 S/C: 1432, 1433
Life Parts
Ink Tube*4 The number of CR pass: 6,750,000
 S/C: 1101

Pump Cap Unit Rotation: 1,150,000 (3 years)
 S/C: 1430, 1431
 M/C: None
CR Motor*4 The number of CR pass: 6,750,000 (3 years)
 S/C: None
MAINTENANCE Exchange Parts 373

When exchanging any of the parts below, follow the flow chart below.
 Print Head
 Ink Holder START
 Duct CR
 Pump Cap Unit
 CR Motor YES NO Check Print Head life
Check Print Head life Exchanging Print
(usage amount) by NVRAM
 Ink Tube (usage amount) by NVRAM Head?
viewer. (See p.283)
viewer. (See p.283)
 Ink Tank
 PF Roller Center Support
Check the lives (usage NO Print Head usage NO Print Head usage
amount) of other parts by
more than 80%? more than 80%?
NVRAM viewer. (See p.283)
YES YES
Exchange all parts below. Exchange all parts below.

NO Any parts usage - Print Head Exchange the planned parts - Print Head
more than 80%? - Ink Holder only. - Ink Holder
- Duct CR - Duct CR
- Pump Cap Unit - Pump Cap Unit
- CR Motor - CR Motor
YES - Ink Tube - Ink Tube
- Ink Tank - Ink Tank
- PF Roller Center Support - PF Roller Center Support
Exchange Print Head and
Exchange Print Head only. the parts with over 80%
usage.
MAINTENANCE Exchange Parts 374

5.5 Cleaning 5.5.2 How to Clean

PRESSURE ROLLERS
5.5.1 Preliminary Check
1. Make sure the printer is turned off and the screen has turned off, and then unplug
REQUIRED TOOLS the power cable from the outlet.
Table 5-2. Cleaning Tools 2. Leave the printer for a minute.
Tool Purpose
3. Open the front cover.
Protective Glasses (commercial
Protect eyes from ink and Ink cleaner. 4. Raise the media loading lever.
item)
Mask (commercial item) Protects your eyes and nose from ink and ink cleaner. 5. Remove stains on the pressure rollers using a dry, soft cloth. (Slide a dry cloth
Maintenance kit (attached to this
between the pressure rollers and the platen and over the upper part of the pressure
Gloves, Cleaning Stick, Wiper, Wiper Cleaner included. rollers to wipe the area.
printer)
Waste cloth, brush (commercial Do not press strongly on the rollers when wiping. This may detach
item)
Wipe off stains inside the printer. C A U T IO N
the rollers.
Metallic or plastic (PP/PE) tray Place the used Cleaning swab or parts tainted with ink.
Cotton Swab For cleaning the Ink Mark Sensor and PW Sensor.
C A U T IO N Placing used Cleaning swab or the like directly on the printer may
result in a permanent stain.
MAINTENANCE Cleaning 375

6. Wipe lint, dust, and adhered ink from the platen using a brush or soft cloth that has
been soaked in water and squeezed well.
Figure 5-3. Cleaning the platen
Figure 5-2. Cleaning the pressure rollers

7. Wipe off the media holding plates using a soft cloth that has been soaked in water. HEAT SHIELD
C H E C K  Normally, wipe off any lint and dust that has attached to the 1. Use your fingers to completely remove the five screws securing the heat shield,
P O IN T surface, without removing the media holding plates.
and remove the heat shield.
 When media with glue is used or ink has adhered to the surface
of the media holding plates, remove the plates, and wipe stains
off both the front and rear surfaces.
Figure 5-4. Cleaning the media holding plates

8. Close the front cover.
Figure 5-5. Cleaning the Heat Shield (1)

2. Wipe off ink that has adhered to the heat shield with a soft cloth that has been NEAR PRINT HEAD
soaked in water and squeezed well.
C A U T IO N Be careful not to touch the nozzle surface when cleaning the Print
Head and its surroundings.
1. Move the Print Head to the cleaning position. Carry out “Head Maintenance -
Head Movement” from “Maintenance” menu.
2. Open the Maintenance cover on left side.

3. Align the holes on the heat shield with the ink tank cover, and then secure it in
place by tightening the screws in the following order; center, left, and finally right.
Figure 5-8. Open the Maintenance cover on left side

3. Wipe off the ink, lint and dust accumulated on the colored area shown in Figure
5-9 and Figure 5-10.
 Ink easily adheres to the outer periphery or gap (indicated by the arrows), so
be sure to wipe off any ink found.
 If any lint or dust is caught, hook it using the tip of a Cleaning Stick.
C A U T IO N Do not touch the parts framed below. Failure to observe this

precaution could affect print quality
PW Sensor
IM Sensor
Figure 5-9. Cleaning the Print Head (left side)
Nozzle surface
Figure 5-10. Cleaning the Print Head (right side)

4. Wipe off any ink that adheres to the areas as indicated by the arrows. WIPER
C A U T IO N  Use a cleaning stick to clean between the nozzles. 1. Open the Right Maintenance Cover.
 Make sure you do not press too hard on the nozzles.
 make sure you move the cleaning stick in one direction; do not 2. Remove the wiper while holding the wiper by the attachment point, tilt it left and
move it back and forth. lift it out.
Figure 5-12. Removing the Wiper

Before cleaning After cleaning
Figure 5-11. Cleaning the Print Head

5. Close the Left Maintenance Cover.

3. Clean the front and back of the wiper with a cleaning stick. 4. Clean the bottom of the wiper with a cleaning stick.
C H E C K If the wiper part has split off or is broken, we recommend replacing

P O IN T it with a new one.
Figure 5-14. Cleaning the Wiper (2)

5. Clean the attachment points with a cleaning stick.

6. Return the wiper when cleaning is complete. CAP
C A U T IO N Do not touch the insides of the suction cap. The part maybe
deformed, and it may no longer be possible to perform capping
correctly.
Figure 5-16. Attaching the Wiper

7. Clean the other wiper and attachment point in the same way.
Suction cap Anti-drying caps

1. Hold the cleaning stick in a perpendicular orientation, and wipe off any ink that 3. Wipe off ink that has adhered to the guide section.
has adhered to the inside of the Anti-drying caps.
Figure 5-17. Cleaning the Cap (1) Figure 5-19. Cleaning the Cap (3)
2. Hold the cleaning stick in a perpendicular orientation, and wipe the outer areas of 4. Clean other caps in the same way.
all the caps.
Figure 5-18. Cleaning the Cap (2)

WIPER RAIL 3. Wipe off any ink that has become attached to the top, right, and left sides of the
wiper rail.
1. Press the [OK] button in the control panel and confirm that the wiper has moved to
the back.
Top side Right and left sides
2. Remove the wiper cleaner while Grasping the cleaner as shown and lift it from the
printer.
Figure 5-21. Cleaning the Wiper Rail (1)
Figure 5-20. Removing the wiper cleaner

4. Attach the wiper cleaner. Place on the attachment point and press down until you 5. Clean the other wiper rail in the same way.
hear a click.
6. Close the right maintenance cover.
7. Press the [OK] button in the control panel.
Figure 5-22. Attaching the Wiper Rail

PW SENSOR INK MARK SENSOR
1. Move the Print Head to the cleaning position. 1. Move the Print Head to the cleaning position.
Carry out “Head Maintenance - Head Movement” from “Maintenance” menu. Carry out “Head Maintenance - Head Movement” from “Maintenance” menu.
2. Clean the sensing portion of the PW Sensor using a cotton swab. 2. Clean the sensing portion of the Ink Mark Sensor using a cotton swab.
Do not use alcohol or solvent. C A U T IO N Do not use alcohol or solvent.

C A U T IO N
Bottom of the CR Unit Bottom of the CR Unit
Sensing Portion PW Sensor

Sensing Portion Ink Mark Sensor Cotton swab
Cotton swab
Figure 5-23. Cleaning the PW Sensor Figure 5-24. Cleaning the Ink Mark Sensor

5.6 Lubrication [Lubrication 1]
Part Name Oil pad holder (Right/Left)

LUBRICATION 1. G-84 (1516265)
Lubricants (Part Code)
2. O-17 (1521154)
This section describes necessary lubrication to maintain the functions and performance
of this printer. Make sure to properly lubricate the parts/units specified in this section 1. 0.6 cc
Amount
as necessary when replacing or maintaining them. 2. Oil only: 0.09 - 0.11g, Pad included: 0.11 - 0.13g
Lubrication Tool φ 2 mm injector
C A U T IO N  Make sure to perform the lubrication following the specified
lubrication points, lubricants, and amount. Otherwise, the Take out the Oil pad holder. (p203)
printer may not operate normally. Lubrication Manner 1. Apply the lubrication with an injector.
 When lubricating the originally installed parts, first wipe off 2. Soak the oil pad with oil.
the old lubricant completely. Note Be careful not to apply lubricant beyond the specified point.
LUBRICATION POINTS LIST Oil Pad Holder
Lubrication
Corresponding Part Name of Lubricant Lubrication Tool Reference
No.
Part name: G-84
OIL PAD HOLDER Part code: 1516265
1 φ 2 mm injector p.387
(RIGHT/LEFT) Part name: O-17
Part code: 1521154
Part name: G-84
2 CR UNIT φ 2 mm injector p.388
Part code: 1516265
ROLL PAPER Part name: G-81
3 HOLDER Flux dispenser p.388
Part code: 1574337 Lubrication Point 2
(RIGHT/LEFT)
Lubrication Point 1
MAINTENANCE Lubrication 387

[Lubrication 2] [Lubrication 3]
Part Name CR Slider Part Name ROLL PAPER HOLDER (RIGHT/LEFT)

Lubricants (Part Code) G-84 (1516265) Lubricants (Part Code) G-81 (1574337)
Amount φ 2 mm x 7 mm Amount 25 mm x 76.7 mm
Lubrication Tool φ 2 mm injector Lubrication Tool Flux dispenser
Apply the lubrication to the portion of the CR slider where it contacts Using a flux dispenser, apply lubricant to the portion of the Roll paper
Lubrication Manner with the secondary axis. Lubrication Manner
holder where it contacts with the axis.
Using an injector, apply lubricant so as to fill in the band.
Note ---
Note Be careful not to apply lubricant beyond the specified point.
Roll Paper Holder
CR Slider
Lubrication Point
Lubrication Point
MAINTENANCE Lubrication 388

CHAPTER
6
APPENDIX

6.1 Block Wiring Diagram
㻼㻾㻵㻺㼀㻼㻾㻵㼀㻼㻭㻺㻱㻸㻌㼁㻺㻵㼀

㻴㻱㻭㻰㻌㻞㻴㻱㻭㻰㻌㻝
㻼㻺㻸㼋㻮㻌
㻼㻾㻱㻿㻿㼁㻾㻱㻮㻻㻭㻾㻰
㻾㻻㻸㻸㻱㻾㻯㻺㻠㻞
㻸㻯㻰
㻵㻹㻼㼃㻯㻾㻼㻻㻿㻵㼀㻵㻻㻺
㻿㻱㻺㻿㻻㻾㻿㻱㻺㻿㻻㻾㻱㻺㻯㻻㻰㻱㻾㻿㻱㻺㻿㻻㻾㻿㼁㻮㻙㻰㻌㻮㻻㻭㻾㻰
㻯㻺㻠㻜㻟㻯㻺㻠㻜㻞㻯㻺㻠㻜㻝㻯㻺㻠㻜㻜㻝㻜
㻯㻺㻟㻞㻯㻺㻞
㻼㻭㻺㻱㻸㻌㻮㻻㻭㻾㻰
㻯㻺㻠㻜㻠㻯㻺㻠㻜㻡㻯㻺㻠㻜㻢㻯㻺㻠㻜㻣㻯㻺㻝
㻞㻝
㻠㻟㻡
㻯㻺㻝㻜㻝㻯㻺㻝㻜㻟㻯㻺㻝㻜㻞
㻟
㻿㼁㻮㻌㻮㻻㻭㻾㻰㻯㻺㻝㻜㻤㻼㻻㼃㻱㻾㻌㻿㼁㻼㻼㻸㼅
㻹㻱㻰㻵㻭㻌㻸㻻㻭㻰㻵㻺㻳㻼㻳㻌㻿㻱㻺㻿㻻㻾㻟㻮㻻㻭㻾㻰㻌㻯㻻㻻㻸㻵㻺㻳㻌㻲㻭㻺
㻯㻺㻝㻜㻜
㻸㻱㼂㻱㻾㻌㻿㻱㻺㻿㻻㻾㻯㻺㻝㻜㻠
㻠㻜㻼㻱㻌㻿㻱㻺㻿㻻㻾
㻯㻾㻌㻴㻼㻌㻿㻱㻺㻿㻻㻾
㻹㻭㻵㻺㼀㻱㻺㻭㻺㻯㻱㻮㻻㼄㻌㻯㻻㻻㻸㻵㻺㻳㻌㻲㻭㻺
㻼㻻㻿㻵㼀㻵㻻㻺㻌㻿㻱㻺㻿㻻㻾㻯㻺㻠㻜㻤
㻟㻯㻿㻵㻯㻌㻯㻻㻺㼀㻭㻯㼀㻌㻹㻻㻰㼁㻸㻱㻌
㻹㻭㻵㻺㼀㻱㻺㻭㻺㻯㻱㻔㻲㼡㼘㼘㻕
㻼㻻㻿㻵㼀㻵㻻㻺㻌㻿㻱㻺㻿㻻㻾㻯㻺㻝㻜㻜㻼㻲㻌㻱㻺㻯㻻㻰㻱㻾
㻯㻺㻞㻥㻟
㻟㻠
㻠㻜㻠㻜㻠㻜㻠㻜㻠㻜
㻯㻺㻝㻣
㻯㻿㻵㻯
㻸㻱㻰㻸㻱㻰㻯㻺㻠㻜㻜㻯㻺㻠㻜㻝㻯㻺㻠㻜㻞㻯㻺㻠㻜㻟
㻵㻺㻷㻌㻯㻭㻾㼀㻾㻵㻰㻳㻱
㻯㻺㻝㻟㻯㻺㻞㻝㻢
㻯㻿㻵㻯㻌㻯㻻㻺㼀㻭㻯㼀㻌㻹㻻㻰㼁㻸㻱㻌
㻞㻝㻝㻡㻔㻴㼛㼙㼑㻕
㻯㻺㻞㻝㻡
㻹㻭㻵㻺㻌㻮㻻㻭㻾㻰㻯㻺㻞㻝㻜
㻸㻻㻯㻷㻯㻺㻞㻡㻜
㻝㻤㻞㻠㻯㻿㻵㻯
㻸㻱㼂㻱㻾
㻿㻱㻺㻿㻻㻾㻵㻺㻷㻌㻯㻭㻾㼀㻾㻵㻰㻳㻱
㻯㻺㻡㻯㻺㻝㻡
㻟㻜㻞㻜㻞㻜㻯㻺㻞㻣㻟
㻡㻝㻢㻼㻾㻱㻿㻿㼁㻾㻱㻌㻼㼁㻹㻼㻌㻹㻻㼀㻻㻾
㻯㻺㻞㻟㻜㻯㻺㻞㻢㻜㻹㻻㼀㻻㻾
㻸㻻㻯㻷㻯㻺㻞㻜㻟
㻸㻱㼂㻱㻾㻯㻺㻞㻜㻟㻞㻠㻟㻜㻡
㻿㻱㻺㻿㻻㻾㻼㼁㻹㻼㻌㻹㻻㼀㻻㻾
㻼㻾㻱㻿㻿㼁㻾㻱㻌
㻯㻺㻞㻠㻜㻹㻻㼀㻻㻾
㻯㻺㻠㻯㻺㻟㻟㻯㻺㻠㻜
㼁㻿㻮㻌㻵㻛㻲㻯㻺㻞㻜㻞㻯㻺㻞㻜㻠
㻠㻠㻟㻯㻺㻞㻟㻝㻠
㻯㻺㻢㻜㻜㻞㻞
㻯㻺㻟㻝㻯㻺㻟㻞㻯㻺㻞㻣㻝㻯㻺㻝㻥
㻝㻤㻟㻭㻼㻳㻌㻹㻻㼀㻻㻾
㻟㻟
㻟
㻯㻺㻢㻜㻝㻯㻺㻣㻜㻝㻯㻺㻣㻜㻜㻯㻺㻞㻣㻜㻯㻺㻝㻞㻯㻺㻞㻣㻞㻯㻺㻝㻤
㻟
㻝㻤㻢㻞㻜㻟㻠
㻟㻸㻌㻹㻭㻵㻺㼀㻱㻺㻭㻺㻯㻱
㻯㻻㼂㻱㻾㻌㻿㻱㻺㻿㻻㻾
㻼㻾㻱㻿㻿㼁㻾㻱㻲㻾㻻㻺㼀㻌㻯㻻㼂㻱㻾㻌㻸
㻼㼁㻹㻼㻌㻿㻱㻺㻿㻻㻾㻿㻱㻺㻿㻻㻾㻭㻰㻰㻵㼀㻵㻻㻺㻭㻸㻌㻼㻾㻵㻺㼀㻌㻰㻾㼅㻵㻺㻳㻌㼁㻺㻵㼀
㻡㻝㻢㻼㻾㻱㻿㻿㼁㻾㻱㻲㻾㻻㻺㼀㻌㻯㻻㼂㻱㻾㻌㻾
㻿㻱㻺㻿㻻㻾㻰㻾㼅㻵㻺㻳㻌㻲㻭㻺
㻯㻺㻣㻜㻝㻯㻺㻣㻜㻜㻼㼁㻹㻼㻌㻿㻱㻺㻿㻻㻾
㻾㻌㻹㻭㻵㻺㼀㻱㻺㻭㻺㻯㻱
㻯㻺㻣㻜㻞
㻱㼠㼔㼑㼞㼚㼑㼠㻼㻲㻌㻹㻻㼀㻻㻾㻌㻿㼁㻯㼀㻵㻻㻺㻌㻯㻾㻌㻹㻻㼀㻻㻾㻌㻯㻻㼂㻱㻾㻌㻿㻱㻺㻿㻻㻾
㻹㻭㻵㻺㻙㻮㻌㻮㻻㻭㻾㻰㻯㻻㻻㻸㻵㻺㻳㻌㻲㻭㻺㻯㻻㻻㻸㻵㻺㻳㻌㻲㻭㻺㼀㻴㻱㻾㻹㻵㻿㼀㻻㻾
㻵㻺㻷㻌㻸㻱㼂㻱㻸㻯㻺㻞
㻲㻭㻺㻡
㻿㻱㻺㻿㻻㻾㻭㻯㼋㻵㻺
㻼㻻㼃㻱㻾
㻵㻺㻷㻌㻸㻱㼂㻱㻸㻿㼁㻼㻼㻸㼅
㻯㻻㻻㻸㻵㻺㻳㻮㻻㻭㻾㻰
㻿㻱㻺㻿㻻㻾㻞㻝㻠
㻯㻺㻞㻝㻜
㻯㻺㻟㻲㻭㻺㻭㻯㼋㻵㻺㻯㻺㻝㻡
㻯㻺㻡㻝㻢㻯㻺㻡㻜㻜㻯㻺㻟
㻞
㻟㻟㻞㻡㻿㼁㻮㻙㻵㻌㻮㻻㻭㻾㻰
㻯㻺㻝㻿㼁㻮㻙㻱㻌㻮㻻㻭㻾㻰㻯㻺㻡㻜㻞
㻼㻲㻌㻞
㻯㻺㻡㻝㻤㻯㻺㻝
㻹㻻㼀㻻㻾㻯㻺㻡㻜㻢
㻾㻻㻸㻸㻌㼁㻺㻵㼀㻯㻺㻞㻠
㻯㻾㻌㻹㻻㼀㻻㻾
㻿㼃㻝㻯㻺㻢㻜㻢㻯㻺㻢㻜㻜㻟
㻢
㻠㻯㻺㻢㻜㻞㻝㻤㻿㼁㻮㻙㻹㻌㻮㻻㻭㻾㻰
㻭㼀㻯㻌㻹㻻㼀㻻㻾㻭㻲㼀㻱㻾㻌㻴㻱㻭㼀㻱㻾
㻞㻿㼁㻮㻙㻲㻌
㻯㻺㻢㻜㻠㻮㻻㻭㻾㻰
㻾㻱㻱㻸㻌㼁㻺㻵㼀
㻯㻺㻢㻜㻜
㻝㻢㻌㻯㻺㻡㻝
㻞㻜
㻿㼃㻝㻢㻯㻺㻢㻜㻢㻯㻺㻝
㻞㻯㻺㻡㻝
㻿㼃㻞㻠㻯㻺㻢㻜㻞㻯㻺㻞㻯㻺㻝
㻾㻱㻱㻸㻌㻹㻻㼀㻻㻾㻞㻞㻭㻯㼋㻵㻺㻼㻿㻴㻙㻮㻢
㻞㻯㻺㻢㻜㻠㻼㻿㻴
SC-F9200 Series 㻿㼁㻮㻙㻲㻌㻮㻻㻭㻾㻰
APPENDIX Block Wiring Diagram 390

6.2 Connection Diagram
6.2.1 Sensors
x
3 9
Main Board
4
5 7
8
x
APPENDIX Connection Diagram 391

Cable No. Connection

1 Front Cover L Sensor Main Board (CN18)
2 L Maintenance Cover Sensor Main Board (CN19)
3 Suction Fan Main Board (CN31)
4 Suction Fan Main Board (CN32)
5 Front Cover R Sensor Main Board (CN271)
6 R Maintenance Cover Sensor Main Board (CN272)
7 PE Sensor Main Board (CN293)
CR HP Sensor/Media Loading Lever
8 Main Board (CN250)
Sensor
9 Panel Board (CN1) Main Board (CN13)

6.2.2 Ink Holder (1) Cable No. Connection

1 LED Main Board (CN273)
2 Lock Lever Sensor Main Board (CN260)
3 Ink Level Sensor Main Board (CN240)
4 Pressure Motor Main Board (CN203)
5 Pressure Pump Sensor Main Board (CN230)
Main Board
2
3
4
5

6.2.3 Ink Holder (2) Cable No. Connection

1 CSIC Contact CSIC Contact Module (Holder 1)
2 CSIC Contact Module (Holder 1) Main Board (CN215)
3 CSIC Contact CSIC Contact Module (Holder 2)
4 CSIC Contact Module (Holder 2) Main Board (CN216)
Main Board
CSIC Contact Module 2

6.2.4 CR Unit (1) Cable No. Connection

1 Print Head 2 SUB-D Board (CN404/CN405)
2 Print Head 1 SUB-D Board (CN406/CN407)
3 SUB Board (CN100) Main Board (CN100)
3
2
1
SUB Board
To Main Board/SUB-D Board

6.2.5 CR Unit (2) Cable No. Connection

1 PW Sensor SUB Board (CN103)
2 PG Sensor SUB Board (CN104)
3 CR Encoder SUB Board (CN102)
SUB Board
4 IM Sensor SUB Board (CN101)

6.2.6 CR drive mechanism
SUB-D Board
7
1
2
3
Main Board
4
PSH-B Board
5
Main-B Board
PSH Board


1 CR Motor SUB-M Board (CN1)
2 SUB-M Board (CN3) Main Board (CN270)
3 SUB-M Board (CN2) Main Board (CN204)
4 APG Motor Main Board (CN210/CN203)
5 Main-B Board (CN701) Main Board (CN5)
6 PSH Board (CN2) PSH-B Board (CN1)
7 SUB-E Board (CN500) Main Board (CN23)

6.2.7 Paper Feed Mechanism/Pump Mechanism
Main Board


1 PF Motor Main Board (CN202)
2 PF Encoder Main Board (CN17)
3 PF Motor Cooling Fan Main Board (CN33)
4 Pump Motor Main Board (CN210/CN203)

6.2.8 Fan Cable No. Connection

1 Power Supply Board Cooling Fan Main Board (CN40)
2 Box Cooling Fan Main Board (CN408)
3 2 3 CR Motor Cooling Fan Main Board (CN12)

6.2.9 After Heater Cable No. Connection

1 After Heater SUB-E Board (CN506)
3 2 Cooling Fan SUB-E Board (CN518)

3 PSH Board (CN1) AC Inlet
4 SUB-E Board (CN502) AC Inlet
5 Thermistor (After Heater) SUB-E Board (CN516)
2 SUB-E Board

6.2.10 Roll Unit/Reel Unit Cable No. Connection

x
1 SUB-F Board (Roll) (CN600) Main Board (CN600)

Main Board
2 Roll Motor SUB-F Board (Roll) (CN604)
3 Roll Motor SUB-F Board (Roll) (CN602)
4 SW1 SUB-F Board (Roll) (CN606)
5 SUB-F Board (Reel) (CN600) Main Board (CN601)
6 SW1
SUB-F Board (Reel) (CN606)
7 SW2
8 Reel Motor SUB-F Board (Reel) (CN604)
9 Reel Motor SUB-F Board (Reel) (CN602)
6
5
SUB-F Board
(Reel) 4
7
8
3
SUB-F Board (Roll)

1
2

6.2.11 Additional Print Drying Unit
SUB-I Board
2
Power Supply
Board Main Board


1 Drying Fan SUB-I Board (CN3)
Drying Unit Power Supply Board
2 SUB-I Board (CN1)
(CN2)
Drying Unit Power Supply Board
3 AC Inlet
(CN1)
4 SUB-I Board (CN2) Main Board (CN23)

6.2.12 Panel Menu Map

This section provides the map of executable menus on the Control Panel.

panel-map_SCF9200_EN_01.pdf

panel-map_SCF9200_EN_02.pdf

6.3 Part names used in this manual Table 6-1. Conversion Table
Ref.
Part name used in this manual ASP part name
To make it easier to locate the target part from its part name, this manual uses the part (Ch3 sec.No.)
names different from the ASP part names. The table below shows the conversion of the R Maintenance Cover Sensor
INK LOCK,MAINTENANCE,
3.4.3.14
part names used in this manual and the corresponding ASP part names. HOME,ASSY ESL;ASP
INK LOCK,P COVER,
Housing Front Cover R Sensor 3.4.3.15
Table 6-1. Conversion Table HOME,ASSY ESL;ASP
Ref. PRINTER,COVER,OPEN
Part name used in this manual ASP part name Front Cover L Sensor 3.4.3.16
ASSY ESL;ASP
(Ch3 sec.No.)
Main Board BOARD ASSY.,MAIN 3.4.4.1
Panel Unit PANEL ASSY ESL;ASP 3.4.3.1
Main-B Board BOARD ASSY.,MAIN 3.4.4.2
 COVER,TOP,RIGHT,ASSY;
ASP BOARD ASSY.,POWER
PSH Board 3.4.4.3
Right Upper Cover  COVER,MAINTENANCE 3.4.3.2 SUPPLY
 COVER,MAINTENANCE,R PSH-B Board
BOARD ASSY.,POWER
3.4.4.3
IGHT,ASSY;ST ASP SUPPLY
Lower Ink Holder N/A 3.4.3.3 Sub Board BOARD ASSY.,SUB 3.4.4.4
Electric Circuit BOARD ASSY.,SUB,CB78
 COVER,FRONT,RIGHT,64, Sub-D Board 3.4.4.5
Right Front Cover ASSY;ST ASP 3.4.3.4 Components SUB-D(6644A)
 COVER,IH BOARD ASSY.,SUB,CB78
Sub-E Board 3.4.4.6
COVER SIDE RIGHT DOWN SUB-E(6645C)
Right Cover 3.4.3.5
ASSY ESL;ASP BOARD ASSY.,SUB,CB81
Sub-M Board 3.4.4.7
HOUSING,BASE,SUPPORT, SUB-M(6626B)
Right Lower Cover 3.4.3.6
RIGHT Box Cooling Fan FAN SET.DC;ASP 3.4.4.8
Left Rear Cover CAP,COVER,TUBE 3.4.3.7 Power Supply Board Cooling FAN SET. DC(PROPELLER
3.4.4.9
Housing Fan TYPE)
 COVER,TOP,LEFT,ASSY;
ASP CR Cover COVER,CR 3.4.5.1
Carriage Mechanism/
 COVER,MAINTENANCE, DUCT CR ASSY;CE30
Left Upper Cover 3.4.3.8 Ink System Duct CR 3.4.5.2
HEAD ESL;ASP
Mechanism
 COVER,MAINTENANCE,L Print Head PRINT HEAD,IE343J 3.4.5.3
EFT, ASSY.;ST ASP
COVER FRONT LEFT
Left Front Cover 3.4.3.9
ASSY.;ST ASP
FULL,MAINTENANCE
L Maintenance Cover Sensor 3.4.3.9
OPEN ASSY ESL;ASP
COVER SIDE LEFT DOWN
Left Cover 3.4.3.10
ASSY ESL;ASP
HOUSING,BASE,SUPPORT,L
Left Lower Cover 3.4.3.11
EFT
Upper Cover N/A 3.4.3.12
Board Box Cover N/A 3.4.3.13
APPENDIX Part names used in this manual 409

Table 6-1. Conversion Table Table 6-1. Conversion Table

Ref. Ref.
Part name used in this manual ASP part name Part name used in this manual ASP part name
(Ch3 sec.No.) (Ch3 sec.No.)
Head FFC HARNESS,HEAD ASSY;ASP 3.4.5.4 Media Loading Lever KNOB,LEVER 3.4.6.1
HARNESS,HEAD Media Loading Lever Sensor PHOTO INTERRUPTER 3.4.6.2
Head Relay FFC 3.4.5.5
ASSY,C;ASP PF Motor MOTOR ASSY.,PF;ASP 3.4.6.3
CR FFC HARNESS,CR 3.4.5.6 PF Motor Cooling Fan FAN ASSY.,CR 3.4.6.4
CR Scale SCALE,CR;ASP 3.4.5.7 BOARD
PF Encoder 3.4.6.5
CR Timing Belt BELT,CR 3.4.5.8 ASSY.,ENCODER,PF
CR Motor MOTOR ASSY.,CR 3.4.5.9 PF Scale SCALE,PF ASSY;ASP 3.4.6.6
CR Motor Cooling Fan FAN ASSY.,CR 3.4.5.10 Paper Feed PF Timing Belt TIMING BELT,PF 3.4.6.7
Mechanism
CR HP Sensor PHOTO INTERRUPTER 3.4.5.11 ROLLER
Driven Roller Assy 3.4.6.8
CR Encoder BOARD ASSY.,ENCODER 3.4.5.12 ASSY.,DRIVEN;ASP
APG Unit MOTOR ASSY.,ASF,SUB 3.4.5.13 Suction Fan FAN ASSY.,ABSORPTION 3.4.6.9
PG Sensor PHOTO INTERRUPTER 3.4.5.14 BOARD

PE Sensor 3.4.6.10
ASSY.,DETECTOR,PW;B
PUMP CAP ASSY,L;CE30
Carriage Mechanism/ Pump Cap Unit 1 ESL;ASP
3.4.5.15 Driven Roller Gear SPUR GEAR,26 3.4.6.11
Ink System CENTER,SUPPORT,ROLLER
Mechanism PUMP CAP ASSY,R;CE30 PF Roller Center Support 3.4.6.12
Pump Cap Unit 2 3.4.5.16 ,PF
ESL;ASP
HOLDER IC ASSY;CE30 AFTER,HEATER,ASSY
Ink Holder 1 3.4.5.17 After Heater 3.4.7.1
ESL;ASP ESL;ASP
Heater Mechanism
HOLDER IC ASSY;CE30 FAN SET. DC (PROPELLER
Ink Holder 2 3.4.5.18 Cooling Fan 3.4.7.2
ESL;ASP TYPE)
TUBE INK SUPPLY Media Feeding

Ink Tube 3.4.5.19 Roll Unit 3.4.8.1
ASSY.;CE30 ESL;ASP Unit,STAD;ASP
CARRIAGE ASSY CE30 GUIDE,ROLL PAPER,JACK

CR Unit 3.4.5.20 Roll Receiver Assy 3.4.8.2
ESL;ASP Roll Unit ASSY ASP
Oil Pad Holder OIL PAD,ASSY ESL;ASP 3.4.5.21 Roll Paper Holder FLANGE ASSY ASP 3.4.8.3
BOARD Sub-F Board (Roll) BOARD ASSY.,SUB 3.4.8.4

PW Sensor 3.4.5.22
ASSY.,DETECTOR,PW;B ATC Motor MOTOR,ASSY.,REWIND 3.4.8.5
IM Sensor BOARD ASSY.,INK MARK;B 3.4.5.23
Ink Tank N/A 3.4.5.24

Table 6-1. Conversion Table

Ref.
Part name used in this manual ASP part name
(Ch3 sec.No.)
Media Guide Bar Media Guide bar ASSY;ASP 3.4.9.1
Auto Take-up Reel
Reel Unit 3.4.9.2
Unit.STAD;ASP
Reel Unit
Roll Paper Holder FLANGE ASSY ASP 3.4.9.3
Sub-F Board (Reel) BOARD ASSY.,SUB 3.4.9.4
Reel Motor MOTOR,ASSY.,REWIND 3.4.9.5
Drying Fan Unit N/A 3.4.10.1
Drying Fan Cover N/A 3.4.10.2
Additional Drying Sub-I Board BOARD ASSY.,SUB 3.4.10.3
Fan Unit Drying Fan Power Supply BOARD ASSY.,POWER
3.4.10.4
Board SUPPLY
Drying Fan FAN ASSY.,DRYING 3.4.10.5

6.4 Exploded Diagram/Parts List

For the exploded diagrams and parts list, refer to Service Parts Information.
APPENDIX Exploded Diagram/Parts List 412


Manual de Serviço - Epson Scf9200 (Compativel Com F9370)

Enviado por

Dados do documento

Título original

Direitos autorais

Formatos disponíveis

Compartilhar este documento

Compartilhar ou incorporar documento

Opções de compartilhamento

Você considera este documento útil?

Este conteúdo é inapropriado?

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

Manual de Serviço - Epson Scf9200 (Compativel Com F9370)

Enviado por

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

Impressora a jato de tinta colorida de grande formato

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)

Revisão Data de emissão Descrição

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)

6.2.4 Unidade CR (1) . ....................................................................................... 395

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)

1.1 Product Description  CISS

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Product Description 12

 Realizes a high degree of usability

Figure 1-1. External View

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Product Description 13

1.2 Basic Specifications Table 1-5. Nozzle Layout (Head 2)

Table 1-3. Basic specifications 1.2.2 Electric Specifications

Table 1-4. Nozzle Layout (Head 1)

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Basic Specifications 14

1.2.3 Ink Specifications

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Basic Specifications 15

1.3 Printing Specifications PRINTABLE AREA

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Printing Specifications 16

1.4 Hardware Specifications WEIGHT

1.4.2 Installation Room Requirement

Figure 1-3. Dimensions

Table 1-9. Dimensions

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Hardware Specifications 17

1.4.3 Part Names Table 1-11. Front Side

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Hardware Specifications 18

Figure 1-6. Front Side

Table 1-12. Slider

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Hardware Specifications 19

Figure 1-8. Back

Table 1-14. Back

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Hardware Specifications 20

1.5 Control Panel Table 1-15. Control panel

11 Specifies the entering character position when registering

Figure 1-9. Control Panel

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Control Panel 21

LCD Table 1-16. LCD

 The media remaining is not displayed if [Off] is selected

Table 1-16. LCD

The heater temperature has reached the preset temperature.

The heater temperature has not reached the preset temperature.

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Control Panel 22

Table 1-16. LCD Table 1-16. LCD

An error occured while the chip unit that cannot

The chip unit could not be recognized or

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Control Panel 23

1.5.1 Setup Menu

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Control Panel 24

Table 1-17. Setup Menu

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Control Panel 25

Table 1-17. Setup Menu

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Control Panel 26

Table 1-17. Setup Menu

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Control Panel 27

Table 1-17. Setup Menu

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Control Panel 28

Table 1-17. Setup Menu

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Control Panel 29

Table 1-17. Setup Menu

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Control Panel 30